1st Semester

CURRICULAR STRUCTURE
AND
S Y L L A B I OF
FULL–TIME DIPLOMA COURSES IN
ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY

EFFECTIVE FROM THE SESSION 2013-14

WEST BENGAL STATE

TATE COUNCIL OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)

“Kolkata Karigori Bhavan”, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata – 700013

1
 st
CURRICULAR STRUCTURE FOR PART – I (1 YEAR) OF THE
FULL-TIME DIPLOMA COURSES IN ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY
WEST BENGAL STATE COUNCIL OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR DIPLOMA IN ENGINEERING COURSES
COURSE NAME: All Branches except Architecture, Photography , Multi media and Printing Technology
DURATION OF COURSE: 6SEMESTERS
SEMESTER: FIRST
BRANCH: Common for all branches except Architecture, Photography, Multi media and Printing Technology
PERIODS EVALUATION SCHEME
SR.
SUBJECT CREDITS INTERNAL SCHEME Total
NO. L TU PR ESE PR
TA CT Total Marks
1 Communicative English 3 2 2 - 10 20 30 70 100
2 Basic Physics 3 2 - 2 10 20 30 70 50 150
3 Basic Chemistry 3 2 - 2 10 20 30 70 50 150
4 Mathematics 5 4 1 - 10 20 30 70 - 100
5 Engineering Mechanics 4 3 1 - 10 20 30 70 - 100
6 Technical Drawing 4 2 - 3 5 10 15 35 50 100
7 Computer Fundamentals 2 1 - 3 - - - - 50 50
8 Workshop Practice-I 2 - - 3 - - - - 50 50
Total: 26 16 4 13 55 110 165 385 250 800
STUDENT CONTACT HOURS PER WEEK:33 hrs
Theory and Practical Period of 60 Minutes each.
L- Lecture, TU- Tutorials, PR- Practical, TA- Teachers Assessment, CT- Class Test, ESE- End Semester Exam.
 Syllabus for Communicative English

Name of the Course: Communicative English

Course Code: Semester: First

Duration:15 weeks Maximum Marks: 100

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 2 hrs./week Mid Semester Exam.: 20 Marks
Tutorial: 2 hrs./week Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks
Practical: -hrs./week End Semester Exam.: 70Marks
Credit: 3
Aim:
Sl. No.

1. Primarily to develop verbal communication skills in English among students.

2. Developing reading & writing skills in students, especially among students who lack
confidence in communicating in English.
3. Developing listening and speaking skills.
Objective:
Sl. No.
1. To increase power of comprehending a written text.
2. Training to isolate important information from a written text and represent the same in note
form.
3. Increase ability to write short paragraphs
4. To write technical reports.
5. To improve speaking skill of students through active listening & speaking practice.
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Knowledge of reading & writing English.
2. Knowledge of preliminary English grammar.
Contents (Theory) Hrs./Unit Marks
Unit:1 1.1Identifying important information & keywords
Comprehending a text using SQ3R (i.e. survey, question, read, recite, and
review) or similar technique and linking words.
1.2Comprehension –Responding to multiple choice& 8 20
short-answer questions from the text; making
sentences with marked words from the text to bring
out the meaning of the words, filling up gaps to
complete information structure, Identifying central
idea of the text.

Unit: 2 2.1Communication using symbols & abbreviations.

Note taking 2.2Communication using diagrams & charts.
 2.3Using mind-mapping to establish relationship 6 15
among information
2.4 Using SQ3R(or similar) technique , mind
mapping , symbols, abbreviations, diagrams & charts
to represent important information from written text
in note form

Unit: 3 3.1Developing notes into paragraph (that is, from

Writing Technical given information in diagrams, pictures, charts & so
Paragraphs on).
Concept of Topic Sentence and Supporting
sentences. 8 15
The paragraph types are:
i) Description of process and route;
ii) Problem-Solution type;
iii) Cause & Effect type;
iv) Comparing & Contrasting type.

Unit:4
Writing Technical Reports The reports should contain a Front Cover and
Covering Letter 8 20
i) Progress Reports
ii)Industrial Accident Report
iii) Feasibility Report
Total 30 70
Text Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
Ghosh, Mukherjee English Skills for Technical Orient Black Swan
&Ghosh Students
(WBSCTE & The
British Council)
P.C. Wren & H. High School English Grammar & S. Chand & Co. Ltd.
Martin Composition
Dr. Sunita Mishra Communication skills for Pearson2012
Dr. C. Engineers
Muralikrishna

Reference Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
Sanjay Kumar Communications Skills Oxford University Press
&PushpLata
Meenakshi Raman Technical Communication: Oxford University Press
&Sangeeta Sharma Principles & Practice
M. Raman & S. Technical Communication 2nd Oxford University Press
Sharma
B.K. Mitra Effective Technical Oxford University Press
4
 Communication
Duss&Duss Comprehension Test Question West Bengal Council
Bunch Higher Secondary
Education
Suggested list of Assignments / Tutorial:
Sl. No. Topic on which tutorial is to be conducted
1. A brief introduction to the process of communication (sender-encoding-message-decoding-
receiver-encoding- feedback/response-decoding) and classification of skills in
communication.
2. How to introduce oneself, introducing friends, how to greet, how to bid goodbye
3. Listening and viewing video clips to improve pronunciation and vocabulary (use of English
language software is recommended).
4. Analysing and commenting on situations shown in short video clippings/pictures
5. Teaching etiquettes and interactions- wishing, drawing attention, seeking apologies, seeking
permission and so on.
6. Remedial grammar / Revision of English grammar (as required) in paragraph and report
writing with special emphasis on voices, tenses, reported speech and preposition.
Note:
Sl. No.
1. Tutorials should primarily be used to develop listening and speaking skills and also to revise
important topics in English grammar.
The tutorial classes should be preferably conducted in the language lab.
2. Question Paper setting tips
i) No objective type questions are to be set separately.
ii) Questions are to be set to examine the reading and writing skills of the students (that is,
questions on the process & technics of communication, namely, communication models,
SQ3R technic, mind-mapping, and so on are to be avoided).
iii) All questions should be answered; however, options within a question may be given.

5
 Syllabus on BASIC PHYSICS

Name of the Course:

Subject : BASIC PHYSICS

Course Code: Semester: FIRST

Duration: 6 months Maximum Marks: 100

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 2 hrs./week Mid Semester Exam.: 20 Marks
Tutorial: Nil Attendance, Assignment & interaction: 10 Marks
Practical: 2 hrs./week End Semester Exam.: 70 Marks
Credit: 3
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. To make the students of Engineering & Technology aware of the basic laws and
principles of Physics and their applications in the field of Engineering &
Technology.
2. The goal of physics is to formulate comprehensive principles that bring together
and explain the world around us.
3. To establish the awareness about the power of Physics as a tool in the practicality
of the life.
Objective:
Sl. No. Students will be able to
1. • Learn the use of Dimensional analysis in Physics and in engineering fields.
• Estimate errors in measurement.
• Select proper material for intended purpose by studying properties of
materials.
• Analyze surface tension property and properties of fluid.
2. • Identify good & bad conductors of heat.
• Analyze laws of thermodynamics and to distinguish different
thermodynamic processes.
3. • Learn about measurement of light energy and the illumination produced
by it.
• Analyze the phenomenon of refraction and its consequences.
• Identify the effect of interference between light waves.
• Identify photo electric effect for engineering applications.
• Enhance analytical approach in formulating and solving problems related
to different physical situations.
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Basic Mathematics knowledge to solve the problems.
2. Knowledge of basic concepts sciences such as physics, chemistry and
mathematics
3. Visualization and analytical approach towards the subject is necessary

6
End Semester Examinations Scheme. Maximum Marks – 70. Time allotted – 3 hrs.
Group Unit Objective Questions Subjective Questions
(MCQ only with one correct
answer)
No. of questions Total No. of To answer Marks Total
to be set marks questions to per marks
be set question
A 1, 2, 3 12 5 3
20 10 50
B 4, 5 8 4 2
• Only multiple choice type questions (MCQ) with one correct answer are to be set in the
objective part.
• Specific instruction to the students to maintain the order in answering objective questions
should be given on top of the question paper.

Content (Theory) Hrs/Unit Marks/Unit

Unit – 1 1.1 System of units – Need of measurement in 4 10
UNITS, engineering and science. CGS, MKS and SI.
DIMENSIONS & Fundamental and derived units (SI).
MEASUREMENTS
1.2 Dimensions: Dimensions of physical quantity.
Principle of dimensional homogeneity
(explanation with examples). Applications of
dimensional analysis. Limitations of dimensional
analysis.

1.3 Estimation of errors: Concept of significant figure.

Absolute error, Relative or Proportional error and
percentage error (concept only). Accuracy &
precision of instruments (concept only, examples
only with slide calipers and screw gauge).

Unit – 2 2.1 Elasticity: Deforming force and restoring force. 8 20

GENERAL Elastic and plastic body. Stress and strain. Hooke’s law.
PROPERTIES OF Stress – strain diagram. Young’s modulus, Bulk modulus,
MATTER Rigidity modulus and Poisson’s ratio (definition and
formula) and relation between them (no derivation).
(Simple numerical problems).

2.2 Surface tension: Cohesive and adhesive forces.

Definition, dimension and SI unit of surface tension.
Surface energy (concept only). Angle of contact
(definition only). Capillarity, shape of liquid meniscus in a
capillary tube, rise of liquid in a capillary tube (no
derivation, simple numerical problems). Effect of
impurity and temperature on surface tension. Some
natural examples of surface tension.

2.3 Fluid Mechanics: Pascal’s law. Multiplication of

force. Buoyancy. Conditions of equilibrium of floating

7
 body. Archimedes’ principle. [Simple numerical problems].
Streamline flow and turbulent flow of a fluid
(concept), critical velocity (definition only). Equation of
continuity and Bernoulli’s theorem (statement and
equation only, simple problems). Viscosity, Newton’s
formula for viscous force, co-efficient of viscosity
(definition, dimension and SI unit). Stokes law
(dimensional derivation) and terminal velocity (concept
and formula only).Effect of temperature on viscosity.

Unit – 3 3.1 Thermal expansion of solid: Linear, areal and cubical 5 12

HEAT AND expansion and their coefficients (definition and formula)
THERMODYNAMICS and their relation (no derivation). Change of density with
temperature (formula only). (Simple numerical
problems).

3.2 Transmission of heat: Conduction, convection and

radiation (differences). Thermal conductivity (formula,
definition, dimensions and SI unit). (Simple formula
based numerical problems including composite slab).
Examples & use of good and bad conductor of heat.

3.3 Thermodynamics: Zeroth law of thermodynamics.

Temperature and internal energy (concept only). First
law of thermodynamics (statement and equation only).
Specific heats of gas, their relation (no derivation) and
their ratio. Isothermal, isobaric, isochoric and adiabatic
process (definition only).

Unit – 4 4.1 PHOTOMETRY: Luminous flux, luminous intensity, 11 24

LIGHT illumination and their S.I. units — Principle of Photometry
(statement only).

4.2 REFRACTION OF LIGHT: Refraction of light through

plane surface. Laws of refraction. Refractive index --
Relative & Absolute, its relation with the velocity of light in
different media. Total internal reflection and critical angle.
Optical fibre (Principle & applications – mention only).

4.3 OPTICAL LENS: Lens and definition of related terms

(Recapitulation). Cartesian sign convention. Lens maker's
formula (no derivation). Relation between u, v, f (usual
symbols) (no derivation). Principle of magnifying glass.
Power of a lens and its unit. Equivalent focal length &
power of two thin lenses in contact (formula only). (Simple
numerical problems).

4.4 WAVE THEORY OF LIGHT & INTERFERENCE: Huygen’s

wave theory, wave front – spherical, cylindrical and
plane wave front (Idea only). Huygen’s principle of
propagation of wave front. Analytical expression for 1D

8
 plane light wave. Principle of superposition of waves.
Coherent sources (Idea only). Interference of light waves,
constructive and destructive interference. Young’s
double slit experiment – analytical treatment.

Unit – 5 PHOTOELECTRIC EFFECT: Photoemission, Work function. 2 4

MODERN PHYSICS Photoelectric current, its variation with intensity and
frequency of incident radiation. Stopping potential,
Threshold frequency. Concept of photon. Einstein’s
photoelectric equation. Principle of solar photo-voltaic cell
and its uses.

TOTAL 30 70
Practicals:
Sl. No. Skills to be developed
1. 1) Intellectual skills-
• Proper selection of measuring instruments on the basis of range, least
count, precision and accuracy required for measurement.
• Analyze properties of matter & their use for the selection of material.
• To verify the principles, laws, using given instruments under different
conditions.
• To read and interpret the graph.
• To interpret the results from observations and calculations.
2. 2) Motor skills-
• Proper handling of instruments.
• Measuring physical quantities accurately.
• To observe the phenomenon and to list the observations in proper tabular
form.
• To adopt proper procedure and precautions while performing the
experiment.
• To plot the graphs

Examination scheme: Maximum marks: 50

• Continuous Internal Assessment: 25 marks.

• External Assessment: Marks – 25. Time allotted – 2 hrs. External teacher will assess the
students. Each student will have to perform one experiment allotted on lottery basis.
Distribution of marks: Theory – 5. Table, units & data taking – 10. Viva – Voce – 10.

Laboratory Experiments :
Sl. No. At least six experiments to be performed
1. • Determination of volume of the material of a hollow cylinder by using slide calipers.
2. • Determination of area of cross-section of a wire / thin solid rod by using a screw gauge
.Estimate the maximum proportional error in the measurement.
3. • Determination of the specific gravity of a solid, insoluble in water and heavier than
water, by hydrostatic balance.
4. • Determination of the specific gravity of sand by specific gravity bottle.
5. • Verification of Boyle’s law by Boyle’s law apparatus.
6. • Verification of laws of refraction of light and determination of refractive index of glass

9
7. • Determine of focal length of a convex lens by U-V method.
8. • Determination of the Young’s modulus of steel by Searl’s method.
9. • Determination of the surface tension of water by capillary rise method (Capillary tube
& radii to be supplied).
10. • Determination of coefficient of viscosity of given highly viscous liquid by Stoke’s
method (Radii & density of the balls and density of the liquid to be supplied).

Text and reference books:

Sl. No. Title of the Book Name of Authors Publisher
1. Physics – I &II Resnik & Halliday Wily Eastern Ltd.
2. Physics. Part – I & II NCERT
3. Applied Physics Arthur Beiser Tata McGraw- Hill
4. Physics - I V. Rajendram Tata McGraw- Hill Pub.
5. Engineering Physics Avadhanulu, Kshirsagar S. Chand Publication
6. Concept of Physics. Vol.- I &II H. C. Verma Bharati Bhavan Pub. &
Distribution
7. B. Sc. Physics. Vol.- I & II C. L. Arora S. Chand & Co. Ltd.
8 Engineering Physics R. K. Gaur & S. L. Gupta Dhanpat Rai Pub.
9 University Physics Young
10. ABC of Physics S. K. Gupta Modern Publisher, New Delhi
11. General Properties of matter D. S. Mathur S. Chand & Co. Ltd.
12. Text Book of ISC Physics Bhatnagar Selina Publication
13. A Text Book of Light B. Ghosh & K. G. Majumder Sreedhar Pub.
14. Elements of H. S. Physics-I & Dutta & Pal Publishing Syndicate
II
15. H. S. Physics. Vol.- I & II Duari, Maity & Majumder Chhaya Prakashani
16. H. S. Physics – I & II C. R. Dasgupta Pub.Book Syndicate
18. Senior Practical Physics A.S. Vasudeva S. K. Kataria & Sons
19. Elements of Physics-1 Dr. Subrata Kamilya Knowledge Group Publications
20 Engineering Physics JOSHI Tata McGraw- Hill
21 Engineering Physics MALIK Tata McGraw- Hill
22 Physics 1 Basak (WBSCTE Series) Tata McGraw- Hill
List of equipment / apparatus for laboratory experiments :
Sl. No. Name of equipment / apparatus
1 Vernier calipers
2 Screw gauge
3 Physical balance
4 Boyle’s law apparatus
5 Glass slab
6 Optical bench
7 Searl’s apparatus for Young’s modulus
8 Travelling microscope
9 Stoke’s law apparatus

10
 Syllabus for: Basic Chemistry

Name of the Course: All Branches of Diploma in Engineering And Technology

(Basic Chemistry)

Course Code: Semester: first

Duration: : Seventeen weeks Maximum Marks: 100

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 2 hrs./week Internal Examination: 20Marks
Tutorial: Nil hrs./week Attendance+Assignment + interaction :10 Marks
Practical: 2 hrs./week Final Examination: 70Marks
Credit:
Aim:
Sl. No. The Students will be able to:
1. To apply the knowledge of chemical and physical properties and processes in engineering field.
2. The content of this subject provides knowledge of engineering materials.
Objective:
Sl. No. The students are likely to acquire the following skills at the end of the course:
1. • To draw the atomic structure of different elements.
• To represent the formation of molecules schematically.
2. • To describe the mechanism of electrolysis.
• Ti identify the properties of metals & alloys related to engineering applications.
3. • To identify the properties of non metallic materials related to engineering applications.
4. • To acquire the knowledge of softening treatment of water in industry.
• To know basic organic compounds applicable to industry.
Pre-Requisite: Nil
GROUP: A Hrs./Unit Marks
Unit: 1 Atomic Structure : Bohr model of atom [ Radius and 6 12
Name of the Topics: Energy of H – atom is excluded ] , De Broglie
Atomic Structure and modification, Quantum numbers, Orbits and Orbitals,
Chemical Bonding Aufbau principal, Pauli’s Exclusion principle, Hunds
rule of maximum multiplicity, Electronic configaration
of elements upto atomic number 36. Definition of
Atomic number, Mass number, Isotopes, Isotones and
Isobars with suitable examples.
3 2
Concept of hybridization sp , sp ,sp and shape of
molecules (simple example H2O, NH3, BCl3, BeCl2)

Chemical Bonding: Electrovalent, Covalent and

coordinate bonds, H-bond in HF, water and ice.
Classification of solids – crystalline and amorphous.
Relationship between structure and properties of the
following crystalline solids- (i) Ionic solid i,e. Sodium
chloride (ii) Covalent solid i,e. diamond and graphite
11
 (iii) Molecular solids i,e. metallic bonds and related
properties. Properties and uses of Carbon, Silicon and
Germanium.

Unit: 2 Avogadro number, Mole concept, Simple numerical 4 12

Name of the Topics: problems involving Weight and volume. Acids, Bases
Avogadro Concept , Acids , and Salts (Arrhenius and Lewis concept) Basicity of
Bases & Salts acids and Acidity of bases, Neutralization reaction,
Hydrolysis of Salts,. Equivalent Weight of acids, bases,
& salts of Strength of Solution ---- normality, molarity,
molality, formality and percentage strength, standard
solution primary and secondary standards, concept of
pH, and pH scale, Indicators and choice of indicator,
principles of acidimetry and alkalimetry (simple
numerical problems) Buffer solution (excluding
numerical problems) Solubility product principle
(excluding numerical problems), common ion effect
with relation to group analysis.

Total
GROUP – B

Unit: 3 3.1 Oxidation, Reduction, Electrochemistry 4 8

Oxidation and Reduction by electronic concept,

balancing chemical equations by Ion-electron method,
Redox Titration, Electrolysis, Arrhenius theory,
Faraday’s Laws, Electrolysis of CuSO4 solution using
Pt-electrode and Cu-electrode, simple numerical
problems on electrolysis, Application of electrolysis
such as Electroplating, Electrorefinings and
Electrotyping, Electrochemical Cells, Primary Cell- Dry
Cell, Secondary Cell --- Lead storage cell,
Electrochemical series.

3.2 Chemical Equilibrium

Reversible and irreversible reactions, Exothermic and
Endothermic reactions, concept of chemical 3
equilibrium, Lechatelier’s principle, Industrial 8
preparation of Ammonia by Haber’s Process, Nitric
acid by Ostwald’s process and Sulphuric acid by
Contact Process (Physico chemical principles only),
catalyst and calalysis.

Unit: 4 Minerals, Ores, Gangue, Flux, Slag, General method 5 12

Name of the Topics: of extraction of metals with reference to Iron,

12
Metallurgy copper and Aluminium (detailed method of
extraction is excluded) Definition of Alloy, purposes
of making Alloy, Composition and uses of alloys
(Brass, Bronze German Silver, Deuralumin,
Nichrome, Bell metal, Gun metal, Monel metal,
Alnico, Dutch metal, Babbit metal, stainless steel),
Amalgams, properties and uses of cast iron, wrought
iron, steel and sponge iron , Manufacture of steel by
L-D process, composition and uses of different alloy
steels.

Unit: 5 3 8
Name of the Topics: Soft and Hard water, Action of soap on water, Types
Water of Hardness, causes of hardness, Units of hardness,
Disadvantages of using hard water, Estimation of
total hardness by EDTA method, Removal of
hardness --- Permulit process, Ion-exchange process,
phosphate conditioning and calgon treatment.
Distilled water and Deionised water.

Unit: 6 Organic compounds, their differences from inorganic 5 10

Name of the Topics: compounds, Classification, Homologous series,
Organic Chemistry Functional groups, Isomerism, Nomenclature up to
C5 , properties and preparation of Methane,
Ethylene and Acetylene, Methylated spirit, Rectified
spirit, Power alchohol, Proof spirit, uses of Benzene,
Naphthalene and phenol, Chromatographic
techniques of separation of organic compounds
(Thin-Layer Chromatography).

Laboratory Experiments :
Sl. No.
1 To identify the following Basic Radicals by dry and
wet tests – Pb+2 , Cu +2 , Al+3, Fe+3, Zn+2 , Ni+2 , Ca+2 ,
Mg+2 , Na+ , K+ , NH4+
2 To identify the following Acid Radicals by dry and
wet tests – Cl- , CO3-2 , SO4-2, S-2 , NO3-

3 To identify an unknown water soluble salt containing

one basic and one acid radical as mentioned above.

13
4 To perform titration of (N/10) approximate solution
of an alkali with an unknown solution of an acid
supplied.

5 To determine Iron content in Mohr’s salt by standard

K2Cr2O7 solution.

6 Preparation of Potash Alum.

Text Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Name of the Publisher
S. S. Dara Environmental chem. & pollution control S. Chand Publication
Dr. Aloka Debi A Text Book of Env. Engg. Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co.
Jain & Jain Engg. Chem. Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co.
Madhusudan
Chem I & II Naba Prakashani
Chowdhury
Dr. Kaberi
Chem I & II Lakshmi Prakasani
Bhattacharya
Dr. Aloka Debi Chem I & II Bhagabati Prakasani
Reference Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Name of the Publisher
Jain & Jain Engg. Chem. Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co.
Dr. Aloka Debi A Text Book of Env. Engg. Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co.
Shrieve Atkins Industrial Chem
Bahl & Bahl A Text Book of Organic Chemistry S. Chand Publication
M. M. Uppal Engg. Chemistry
S. N. Poddar & S.
General & Inorganic. Chemistry Book Syndicate Pvt. Ltd.
Ghosh
Harish Kr. Chopra Engg. Chemistry
Narosha Publishing House
Anupama Parkar A Text Book
B. K. Sharma Industrial Chemistry Goel Publishing House
Dilip Basu Polytechnic Chemistry-! Knowledge Kit Publication

14
 Syllabus for Mathematics

Name of the Course : MATHEMATICS (First Semester all branches)

Course Code : */1/T4/MTHS Semester : First
Duration : 15 weeks Maximum Marks : 100
Teaching Scheme : Examination Scheme :
Theory : 4 contact hours/week. Internal Examination : 20 Marks
Tutorial : 1 contact hour /week Class Attendance : 5 Marks
Practical : NA End Semester Examination : 70 Marks
Credit : 5 Teacher’s Assessment : 5 Marks
Aim :
1. To develop logical & precise thinking ability.
2. To make the student aware about the utility of mathematics as a tool for solving scientific &
engineering problems.
3.
Objectives – The student will be able to
1. Develop an analytical & systematic approach towards solving any problem.
2. Appreciate the power of mathematics in inter-disciplinary applications.
3. Visualize various abstract concepts using mathematics as a tool.
Pre-Requisite -
1. Basic mathematical terms & formulae should be known.
2. Knowledge of basic mathematical concepts are also necessary.
3.

Content (Name of Topic) Periods

Group - A
Unit 1 ALGEBRA 21
1.1 Logarithm
1.1.1 Definition of natural and common Logarithm 3
1.1.2 Laws of Logarithm. Simple Problems.
1.2 Complex Numbers
1.2.1 Definition of Complex numbers, Cartesian and polar.
Exponential forms of complex numbers.
1.2.2 Modulus, amplitude & conjugate of a complex number
1.2.3 Algebra of Complex numbers (Equality, Addition, 6
Subtraction, Multiplication).
1.2.4 Cube roots of unity & its properties.
1.2.5 De Moivre’s theorem (statement only) and simple problems.
1.3 Quadratic Equations
1.3.1 Definition of Quadratic Equations
1.3.2 Analysing the nature of roots using discriminant 4
1.3.3 Relation between roots & coefficients
1.3.4 Conjugate roots
1.4 Binomial Theorem
1.4.1 Definition of factorial notation, definition of permutation
and combination with formula
1.4.2 Binomial theorem for positive index (statement only) 4
15
 1.4.3 General term and middle term.
1.4.4 Binomial theorem for negative index (statement only).
1.5 Partial Fraction
1.5.1 Definition of polynomial fraction, proper & improper 4
fractions and definition of partial fractions
1.5.2 Resolving proper fractions into partial fractions with
denominator containing non repeated linear factors, repeated
linear factors and irreducible non repeated quadratic factors.

Unit 2 Vector Algebra 10

2.1 Definition of a vector quantity.
2.2 Concept of Position vector and Ratio formula.
2.3 Rectangular resolution of a vector.
2.4 Algebra of vectors – equality, addition, subtraction & scalar
multiplication.
2.5 Scalar (Dot) product of two vectors with properties.
2.6 Vector (cross) product of two vectors with properties.
2.7 Applications
2.7.1 Application of dot product in work done by a force and
projection of one vector upon another.
2.7.2 Application of cross product in finding vector area and
moment of a force.
Group - B
Unit 3 TRIGONOMETRY 10
3.1 Trigonometric Ratios of associated, compound, multiple and
sub-multiple angles.
3.2 Inverse trigonometric functions – Definition, formulae and
simple problems.
3.3 Properties of Triangle – sine, cosine and tangent formulae -
Simple Problems.

Unit 4 COORDINATE GEOMETRY & MENSURATION 13

4.1 Co-ordinate System
4.1.1 Cartesian & Polar co-ordinate system
4.1.2 Distance formula and section formula 2
4.1.3 Area of a triangle and condition for collinearity.
4.2 Straight Line
4.2.1 Equation of straight line in slope point form, intercept form,
two-point form, two-intercept form, normal form.
4.2.2 General equation of a straight line. 3
4.2.3 Angle between two straight lines – Condition for parallelism
and perpendicularity.
4.2.4 Length of perpendicular from a point on a line. Perpendicular
distance between two parallel lines.
4.3 CIRCLE
4.3.1 Equation of circle in standard form, centre-radius form,
diameter form, two-intercept form. 3
4.3.2 General equation of circle with a given centre and radius.
Simple Problems.
16
 4.4 Conic Section
4.4.1 Standard equations of parabola, ellipse & hyperbola. 2
4.4.2 Definition of focus, vertex, directrix, axes, eccentricity.
Simple problems.
4.5 MENSURATION
4.5.1 Regular Polygon of n sides – Formula for area and perimeter.
4.5.2 Prism and Pyramid – Formula for volume & Surface area. 3
Simple Problems.
Group - C
Unit 5 FUNCTION, LIMIT & CONTINUITY
5.1 Function 3
5.1.1 Definitions of variables, constants, open & closed intervals.
5.1.2 Definition & types of functions – Simple Examples
5.2 Limits 4
5.2.1 Concept & definition of Limit.
5.2.2 Standard limits of algebraic, trigonometric, exponential and
logarithmic functions.
5.2.3 Evaluation of limits.
5.3 Continuity 2
5.3.1 Definition and simple problems of continuity.
Unit 6 DERIVATIVE 12
6.1 Definition of Derivatives, notations.
6.2 Derivative of standard functions.
6.3 Rules for differentiation in case of sum, difference, product and
quotient of functions.
6.4 Derivative of composite functions (Chain rule).
6.5 Derivatives of inverse trigonometric functions.
6.6 Derivatives of implicit functions.
6.7 Logarithmic derivatives.
6.8 Derivatives of parametric functions.
6.9 Derivative of one function with respect to another function
6.10 Second order derivatives.
6.11 Applications of Derivatives.
6.11.1 Geometric meaning of derivative.
6.11.2 Rate measurement
6.11.3 Maxima & Minima (one variable)
Total 75

17
 EXAMINATION SCHEME

Internal Examination : Marks – 20 Marks on Attendance : 05

Final Examination : Marks – 70 Teacher’s Assessment : 05

Group Unit Objective Questions Total Marks

To be Set To be Marks per
Answered Question
A 1,2 12
B 3,4 7 Any Twenty 1 20 x 1 = 20
C 5,6 6

Group Unit Subjective Questions Total Marks

To be Set To be Marks per
Answered Question
A 1,2 4 Any Five
B 3,4 3 Taking At Least 10 5 x 10 = 50
C 5,6 3 One From Each
Group

Note 1 : Teacher’s assessment will be based on performance on given assignments & quizzes.
Note 2 : Assignments may be given on all the topics covered on the syllabus.

Text Books
Name of Authors Title of the Book Publisher
B.K. Paul Diploma Engineering Mathematics (Vol-1) U.N. Dhar & Sons
A. Sarkar Mathematics (First Semester) Naba Prakashani
G.P. Samanta A Text Book of Diploma Engineering Mathematics, Learning Press
Volume-1
Dr. S. Bose & S. Saha A Complete Text Book of Mathematics Lakhsmi Prakasan
Reference Books
H.S. Hall & S.R. Knight Higher Algebra Book Palace, New Delhi
S.L. Loney Trigonometry S. Chand & Co.
H.K. Dass Engineering Mathematics S. Chand & Co.
T.M. Apostol Calculus, Volume-1 John Wiley & Sons
B.K.Pal, K.Das Engineering Mathematics, Volume-1 U.N. Dhar & Sons
B.C. Das & B.N. Differential Calculus U.N. Dhar & Sons
Mukherjee
KAR Engineering Mathematics Tata McGraw- Hill
SINGH Engineering Mathematics Tata McGraw- Hill

18
 Syllabus of Engineering Mechanics

Name of the Course: Engineering Mechanics

Course Code: Semester: First
Duration: 15 Weeks Maximum Marks: 100
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 3 hrs/week Internal Examination: 20
Tutorial: 1 hrs/week Assignment & Quiz: 10
Practical: hrs/week End Semester Exam:70
Credit: 4
Aim:
1. To study and realize the action of force system & moment on a rigid body.
2. To study the concept of Centroid & Centre of gravity.
3. To study the law of motion of simple lifting machine.
4. To study the effect of friction on a body.
5. To prepare the students for further understanding of other allied subjects (e.g. SOM,
TOS, MOM,TOM, DOM, DOS).

Objective: The students will be able to

1. Make composition of forces, resolution of force, and find resultant and equilibrant of coplanar
force system.
2. Calculate moment of force & couple and thus support reactions of statically determinate beams
under different load conditions.
3. Solve the problems of friction, its effect on ladder, horizontal plane and inclined plane.
4. Find the centre of gravity of composite solids and centroid of composite plain figures.
5. Find mechanical advantage, velocity ratio, efficiency of simple machines.
Pre-Requisite: Students should know
1. Basic Physics
2. Geometry and Trigonometry
3. General Mathematical manipulation
Contents:
Hrs/unit Marks
Unit 1 Force Systems: 12 15
1.1 Fundamentals and Force system: Definitions of Mechanics,
engineering mechanics, statics, dynamics, kinetics, kinematics,
rigid body, scalar and vector, force, SI unit of force,
representation of force by vector and by Bow’s notation
method, Characteristics of a force, effect of a force, Principle
of transmissibility, Classification of force system( coplanar &
non coplanar), detail classification of coplanar force system
(collinear, concurrent, non concurrent, parallel, like parallel &
unlike parallel).
1.2 Resolution of a force: Definition, Method of resolution,
mutually perpendicular components and non – perpendicular
components.
1.3 Moment of a Force: Definition, measurement of moment of a
force, SI unit of moment, physical significance of moment of a
force, classification of moments according to direction of
19 rotation, sign convention, law of moments – Varignon’s
theorem and it’s use. Couple- Definition, SI unit, measurement
 of moment of a couple, Equivalent couples- resultant of any
number of coplanar couples, resolution of a given force into a
force acting at a given point and a couple, properties of
couple.
1.4 Composition of Force: Definition of resultant force, method of
composition of force – Analytical method - parallelogram law,
triangles law & polygon law of force, Algebraic method for
determination of resultant for concurrent, non-concurrent &
parallel coplanar force system. Graphical method - space
diagram, vector diagram and funicular polygon to determine
resultant for concurrent & parallel force system only
Unit 2 Equilibrium: 10 15
2.1 Definition, condition of equilibrium, analytical and graphical
conditions of equilibrium for concurrent, non concurrent and
parallel force system, free body and free body diagram.
2.2 Lami’s Theorem – statement & explanation, Application of this
theorem for solving various engineering problems.
2.3 Definition of equilibrant, relation between resultant and
equilibrant, equilibrant of concurrent & non concurrent force
system.
2.4 Beams – Definition, types of beams (cantilever, simply
supported, overhanging, fixed and continuous), types of end
supports (simple support, hinged, roller, fixed), classification of
load, reaction of a simply supported, cantilever and
overhanging beam subjected to vertical point load and
uniformly distributed load by analytical and graphical method.
Unit 3 Friction: 08 13
3.1 Definition: friction, limiting frictional force, coefficient of
friction, angle of friction, angle of repose, relation between
angle of friction & angle of repose, cone of friction & its
significance, types of friction, laws of friction, advantages &
disadvantages of friction.
3.2 Equilibrium of bodies on horizontal and inclined plane:
equilibrium of body on horizontal plane subjected to
horizontal and inclined force, equilibrium of body on inclined
plane subjected to forces parallel to inclined plane only,
Ladder friction
Unit 4 Centroid and Centre of gravity 08 12
4.1 Centroid: Definition of Centroid, moment of an area about an
axis, Centroid of basic geometrical figures such as square,
rectangle, triangle, circle, semicircle, quadrant of a circle.
Centroid of composite figure. (No deduction for determining
Centroid of basic geometrical figures)
4.2 Centre of gravity: Definition of centre of gravity, centre of
gravity of simple solids such as cylinder, sphere, hemisphere,
cone, cube and rectangular block. Centre of gravity of
composite solids. (No deduction for determining Centre of
gravity of simple solids)
Unit 5 Simple Machine: 10 15
5.1 Definition: simple machine, compound machine, load, effort,

20
 mechanical advantage, velocity ratio, input of a machine,
output of a machine, efficiency of a machine, ideal machine,
ideal load, ideal effort, machine friction, load lost in friction,
effort lost in friction.
5.2 Analysis: Law of machine, maximum mechanical advantage of
a machine & maximum efficiency of a machine, Reversibility of
a machine, condition of Reversibility of a machine, self locking
machine.
5.3 Study of Simple machine: Calculation of mechanical
advantage, velocity ratio, efficiency and identification of
reversible or self locking machine of following machines:
Simple Axle & Wheel, Differential axle and Wheel, Weston’s
differential pulley block, Single Purchase crab, Double
Purchase crab, Worm & Worm wheel, geared pulley block,
Screw Jack, Pulleys ( first, second & third system of pulleys).
Total: 48( 70
Lecture
+
Tutorial)
Text Books:
Name of Author Title of the Book Edition Name of the
Publisher
D.S.Kumar Engineering Mechanics S.K. Kataria & Sons
R.S.Khurmi Engineering Mechanics S. Chand & Co
Basu Engineering Mechanics Tata McGraw Hill
R.C. Hibbeler Engineering Mechanics Pearsion Education
S. S. Bhavikatti, K. G. Engineering Mechanics New Age International
Rajashekarappa

Reference Books:

R.K. Rajput Engineering Mechanics S.K. Kataria & Sons

Beer – Johnson Engineering Mechanics Tata McGraw Hill
S.Ramamruthum Applied Mechanics Dhanpat Rai & Sons
B. Bhattacharyya Engineering Mechanics Oxford University
Press
Engineering Mechanics: Statics Tata McGraw Hill
NELSON
(Schaum's Outline Series)
Engineering Mechanics: Dynamics Tata McGraw Hill
NELSON
(Schaum's Outline Series)
Engineering Mechanics : Statics & Tata McGraw Hill
NELSON
Dynamics
TIMOSHENKO Engineering Mechanics, Revised Fourth Tata McGraw Hill
DUBEY Engineering Mechanics Tata McGraw Hill
Roy Chowdhury Engineering Mechanics Tata McGraw Hill
Suggested List of Laboratory Experiment: Nil (As decided in the meeting of subject coordinators)

21
Suggested list of Assignments / Tutorial:
Group A
1. Numerical on resolution of force / moment of force / Resultant of force System.
2. Numerical on Application of Lami’s Theorem.
3. Numerical on calculation of reaction of beam subjected to point load and uniformly
distributed load.
4. Numerical on friction force acting on body resting on horizontal surface / inclined surface
and ladder friction.
5. Numerical on calculation of Centroid of composite figures.
6. Numerical on calculation of Centre of gravity of composite solids.
7. Numerical on calculation of M.A., VR, Efficiency, Law of Machine for simple machine.
8. Free body diagram of different mechanical system /2 dimensional force body.
Group B
1. Graphical Solution of Concurrent force system – 2 problems
2. Graphical Solution of parallel force system – 2 problems
3. Graphical Solution of Reaction of beam – 2 problems
Note:
Total students have to be divided into 10 groups. Each group shall be allotted five different
numerical from group A and three different problems from group B. problems shall be
submitted by each student in separate note book. All problems have to be solved in the
tutorial classes.

Sl. No.
1. Examination Scheme: (End semester examination)

Unit: Marks of each Question to be Set Question to be answered

question
1,2 10 4 2
3,4 10 3 2
5 10 2 1
1 1 6 5
2 1 6 5
3 1 4 3
4 1 3 2
5 1 6 5
Total 5*10+20*1 = 70

22
 Syllabus for Technical Drawing
Name of the Course: TECHNICAL DRAWING
Course Code: ETCE,MLT,FPT,EE,CSWT,CST,DP,PHO,CHE,EIE,IT, MET, Semester: First
ME,MEP,CE, AE,ARCH,MIN,MS,SE,PT,LGT,And FWT.

Duration: 17 weeks Maximum Marks: 100

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 2 hrs./week Internal Examination: marks: 10 Marks on
attd.: 05
Tutorial: hrs./week Continuous Internal Assessment: 25 External
Assessment : 25
Practical: 3 hrs./week End Semester Exam.: Marks
: 35
Credit:
Aim:
Sl.No.
1. The Course is aimed at developing basic graphic skills so as to enable them to use these skills in preparation of
engineering drawings.
2. Understand the fundamentals of Engineering Drawing
3. Read and interpret object drawings.
Objective:- The student should be able to:-
Sl.No.
1. Draw different engineering curves and know their applications.
2. Draw orthographic projections of different objects.
3. Visualize three dimensional objects and draw Isometric Projections.
4. Use the techniques and able to interpret the drawing in Engineering field
5. Use computer aided drafting
Pre-Requisite:
Sl.No.
1. Unambiguous and clear visualization.
2. Sound Pictorial Intelligence
Contents (Theory) Hrs./Unit Marks
Unit: 1 1.1 Letters and numbers (Single stroke vertical 04 07
Name of the Topics: 1.2 Convention of lines and their applications.
Drawing Instruments and 1.3 Scale ( reduced, enlarged & full size ) plain scale and diagonal
their uses. scale.
1.4 Geometrical construction
Unit: 2 2.1 To draw an ellipse by (a) Directrix and focus method (b) Arcs of 08 07
Name of the Topics: circle method (c) Concentric circles method
Engineering curves & Loci 2.2 To draw a parabola by (a) Directrix and focus method (b) Rectangle
of Points. method
2.3 To draw a hyperbola by (a) Directrix and focus method (b) Passing
through given points with reference to asymptotes
2.4 To draw involutes of circle & polygon
2.5 To draw a cycloid, epicycloid, hypocycloid
2.6 To draw Helix & spiral
2.7 Loci of points with given conditions and examples related to simple
mechanism.
Unit: 3 3.1 Lines inclined to one reference plane only and limited to both ends 06 07
Name of the Topics: in one quadrant.
Projection of Straight 3.2 Projection of simple planes of circular, square, rectangular,
Lines and Planes rhombus, pentagonal and hexagonal, inclined to one reference plane
and perpendicular to the other.
Unit: 4 4.1 Introduction to Orthographic projections 06 07
Name of the Topics: 4.2 Conversion of pictorial views into Orthographic views (First Angle
Orthographic projections Projection Method only)
4.3 Dimensioning technique as per SP-46

23
 Unit: 5 5.1 Isometric scale 04 07
Name of the Topics: 5.2 Conversion of orthographic views into isometric views / projection
Isometric projection (Simple objects)

Unit: 6 6.1 To draw line, rectangle, circle, polygon with given dimensions and 04
Name of the Topics: hatch
Introduction to CAD

Total 32 35
Contents (Practical)
List of Practical Intellectual skills Motor skills
1. LETTERING , SCALE & GEO.CONST. To develop ability to understand Scaling To develop ability to draw Scale &
Single Stroke vertical Alphabets and problem on geometrical geometrical constructions
&Numerical Plain Scale and Diagonal Scale constructions
( reduced & enlarged ) Construction of
Regular Polygons
( 1 Sheet )

2. Engineering Curves & loci of points To develop ability to differentiate To develop ability to draw different
Draw ellipse , parabola, hyperbola, between conic and curves. types of curves.
involutes, cycloid, spiral To develop ability to identify the type of
Draw locus of point on any one locus from the nature of surface and the
mechanism position of generating circle.
( 1 Sheet ) Able to interpret the given mechanisms
and locus of points.
3. Projection of line and planes To develop ability to differentiate Able to draw orthographic projections
Two problems on projection of lines and between true length and apparent of line and planes.
Two problems of planes. length.
( 1 Sheet ) To interpret the position of lines and
planes with plane
4. Orthographic projections Develop ability to interpret first angle Develop ability to draw orthographic
Four objects by first angle method projection method projections by first angle projection
( 1 Sheet ) To interpret and able to solve problem method
on orthographic projection of given
object.
5. Isometric projection Develop ability to differentiate between Develop ability to draw isometric views
Four objects two by true scale and isometric view and isometric and isometric projections from given
another two by isometric scale projections. orthographic views of an object
( 1 Sheet ) To differentiate between isometric scale
and true scale
6. Introduction to CAD To develop ability to handle different To develop ability to draw different
Draw a figure with the help of different tools of CAD figure by computer.
draw and modify Command by
Computer
And redraw any one object of
Orthographic projection.

Text Books:
Name of Authors Titles of the Book Edition Name of the publisher
N.D.Bhatt Engineering Drawing Charotkar Publishing House
R.K.Dhawan Engineering Drawing S.Chand & Co.
K.Venugopal Engineering Drawing and New Age publication
Graphics +AutoCAD
Basant Agrawal Engineering Drawing Tata McGraw Hill Education
C M Agrawal Private Ltd.
Pal & Bhattacharya Engineering Drawing 6th Viva Books
Reference Books:
Name of Authors Titles of the Book Edition Name of the publisher
P S Gill Engineering Drawing SK Kataria and sons

24
Dhananjay A Jolhe Engineering Drawing Tata McGraw Hill Education
Private Ltd.
Pal & Bhattacharya Computer Aided Engineering 7th Viva Books
Drawing
Suggested list of laboratory experiments:
Not Applicable

Suggested list of Assignments/ Tutorial:

Not Applicable

Note :
1. Student should use two separate A3 size sketch books, one for class work practice and another for assignment.
2. Student should solve assignment on each topic.
3. Use approximately 570mm x 380mm size Drawing sheet for sessional work.

25
 Syllabus of Computer Fundamentals

Name of the Course: Computer Fundamentals (For All Branches of Diploma in Engineering and Technology)

Course Code: Semester: First

Duration: Maximum Marks: 50 (Practical 25+25)

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 1 hrs./week Mid Semester Exam.: Marks
Tutorial: hrs./week Assignment & Quiz: 25 Marks
Practical: 3 hrs./week End Semester Exam.: 25 Marks
Credit: 3
Aim: To understand computer and able to work with it i.e. to operate it and familiar with Office and
Internet.
Sl. No.
1. To Understand basics of Computer and operate it.
2. To Learn various application software’s like MS Office or Open Office.
3. To understand and use of Internet and Email.
Objective: Student will be able to
Sl. No.
1. Understand a computer system that has hardware and software components, which controls and
makes them useful.
2. Understand the operating system as the interface to the computer system.
3. Use the basic functions of an operating system.
4. Compare major OS like Linux and MS-Windows.
5. Use file mangers, word processors, spreadsheets, presentation software's and Internet.
6. Have hands on experience on operating system and Office package.
7. Use the Internet to send mail and surf the World Wide Web.

Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Basic knowledge of computer is helpful.
2. Basic knowledge of Internet is helpful
Contents (Theory) Hrs./Unit Marks
Unit: 1 1.1 Introduction, Components of PC 4
Name of the Topics: 1.2 The system Unit, Processor, Motherboard, Memory.
Fundamentals of Computer 1.3 Monitor,Keyboard, Mouse, Printer, Scanner,Disk
drive, Speaker, Modem, Pendrive, CD, DVD etc.
Unit: 2 2.1 Working with window, Desktop,Components of window. 3
Name of the Topics: 2.2 Windows Explorer, Folders, Files , Start button.
Introduction to Windows 2.3 Use of Paint, Notepad, WordPad etc.
XP/7/8.
Unit: 3 3.1 Basics of Word application and its use. 4
Name of the Topics: 3.2 Basics of Excel/Spreadsheet application and its use.
26
Use of Office or Open Office 3.3 Basics of Presentation application and its use.
Unit: 4 4.1 Internet and its use, Browser, ISP, Search Engine etc. 3
Name of the Topics: 4.2 Creating Email account, Composing and sending
Introduction to Internet mails, Chatting, Downloading etc.
Unit: 4 5.1 Computer application in Offices, books publication, 1
Name of the Topics: data analysis ,accounting , investment, inventory control,
Usage of Computers in graphics, Airline and railway ticket reservation, robotics
Various Domains
Total 15
Contents (Practical)
Sl. No. List of Practicals
1. Working with Windows XP/7/8 desktop, start icon, taskbar, My Computer icon, the Recycle Bin and
deleted files, Creating shortcuts on the desktop, Use of Notepad, WordPad, Paint, Calculator.
2. The Windows Explorer, concept of drives, Switching drives, Folder creation, Moving or copying files,
Renaming, Deleting files, and folders.
3. Printing, Installation of a printer, Maintaining print queue, Handling common printer problems.
4. Moving through a Word document menu bar and drop down menus toolbars, Entering text into a Word
document, selection techniques, Deleting text, Font formatting, keyboard shortcuts, Paragraph
formatting, Bullets and numbering, Page formatting, Page margins, Page size and orientation Page breaks,
Headers and footers, Introducing tables and columns, Printing, Print setup, Printing options, Print
preview.
5. Development of application using mail merge, Mail merging addresses for envelopes, Printing an
addressed envelope and letter, Creating and using macros in a document.
6. Creating and opening workbooks, Navigating in the worksheet, Inserting and deleting cells, rows and
column, Moving between worksheets, saving worksheet, workbook; Formatting and customizing data.
7. Formulas, functions; Creating, manipulating & changing the chart type; Printing, Page setup, Margins;
Sheet printing options, Printing a worksheet;
8. Preparing presentations with Microsoft Power Point; Slides and presentations, Opening an existing
presentation , Saving a presentation; Using the AutoContent wizard ,Starting the AutoContent wizard;
Presentation type; Presentation titles, footers and slide number.
9. Selecting a slide layout; Manipulating slide information within normal and outline view; Formatting and
proofing text; Pictures and backgrounds; drawing toolbar; AutoShapes; Using clipart; Selecting objects; The
format painter.
10. Navigating through a slide show; Slide show transitions; Slide show timings; Animation effects.
11. Internet; Connecting to the Internet; The Internet Explorer program window and other browser software;
Searching the Internet; Searching the Internet using Yahoo, Google and other search engines; Favorites,
security & customizing Explorer; Use of antivirus software to increase the protection of the system;
12. Using electronic mail; Creating and sending emails; Attached files; Receiving emails; Creating a mailing
group; Locating and subscribing to newsgroups; Posting a message to a newsgroup.
13. Chatting on internet, Understating chat environment.
Text Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
Vikas Gupta Comdex Computer Course Ki 1st Dreamtech
Henry Lucas Information Technology for 7th TMH
management
Ramesh Bangia Computer Fundamentals and 2nd Laxmi Publication Pvt Ltd.
27
 Information Technology
Dinesh Maidasani Learning Computer Fundamentals, MS 2nd Laxmi Publication Pvt Ltd.
office ,Internet & Web Technology.
Reference Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
Sanjay Saxsena A First Course in Computer 2nd Vikash Publishing House
Bangia,Arora and Computer Software and Application 1st Laxmi Publication Pvt Ltd.
Jalota
Suggested list of Laboratory Experiments:
Sl. No. Laboratory Experiments
1. Installation of a printer and taking print out.
2. Creating a resume of your own using Word.
3. Creating a letter by using mail merge and taking print out of those letters.
4. Prepare a student mark sheet in excel.
5. Prepare a salary bill in excel.
6. Making a presentation on any topics of your subject.
7. Making Presentation about the College one studied.
Suggested list of Assignments / Tutorial:
Sl. No. Topic on which tutorial is to be conducted
1. Draw a picture on paint brush and take print out.
2. Creating a resume of your own using Word.
3. Creating a letter by using mail merge and taking print out of those letters.
4. Prepare a student mark sheet in excel.
5. Prepare a salary bill in excel.
Note:
Sl. No.
1. Internal marks will be given mainly on the basis on Laboratory work and assignment given. Student
should prepare a Note Book on the assignment or work done. Student can work with any version of
Windows/Linux, MS Office or Open Office software.

28
 Workshop practice

Name of the Course: Diploma in Mechanical/ Electrical/ Electronics/ Electronics &

Instrumentation/ Civil/ Computer/ Chemical Engg. Groups/Mechanical
(Production)/Automobile/Computer Software/Footwear/Leather Goods/Food
Processing/Packaging/Medical Lab. Tech/Mine Survey/ Mining/ Metallurgical Engg. &
Technology/IT/Agricultural Engg./ Survey Engg

Course Code: Semester: First At least One Unit should be completed in 1st
semester (Rest two will be completed in 2nd semester)
Evaluation may be done by continuous assessment process
and by External Examiner in end semester.
Duration: : Seventeen weeks/Semester Maximum Marks: 50 ( 1st semester)
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme: Continuous Evaluation- 25( internal) ,
External practical Exam-25( at the end of 1st semester)
Theory: Nil hrs./week Mid Semester Exam.: Nil
Tutorial: Nil hrs./week Attendance & Teacher’s Assessment -25 Marks(1st )
Practical: 3 hrs./week End Semester Exam.:25 Marks(1st)
Credit: 2
Aim: To impart practical knowledge in Work Shop related with course of study.
Objective: Student will able to
Sl. No.
1. Know basic Work Shop Processes.
2. Read and interpret job drawings.
3. Identify, select, & use of various marking, measuring, holding, striking & cutting tools & equipments.
4. Operate, control different machines & equipments.
5. Inspect the job for specified dimensions.
6. Produce jobs as per specified dimensions.
7. Adopt safety practices (tools, jobs& personal) while working on various machines.
8. Acquaint with the chronological operational processes involving in the jobs.
9. Care & maintenance of the tools & machines.
Pre-Requisite: Nil
Sl. No.
1.
2.
Contents : GROUP: A/B/C TOTAL PERIODS: 90 (30 Weeks) + 12 (4 Weeks) = Hrs./Unit Mark
102 (34 Weeks) s
Unit: 1 is compulsory and any two units from the rest as deemed fit for the branches.
Unit: 1 Electrical Shop (Compulsory) 6 periods
1. General Shop Talk
1.1 General safety & precautions taken in Electrical
 Workshop
1.2 Electric shock, methods of shock treatment
1.3 Fuse and safety measure
1.4 Earthing as safety measure — I.E. Rule – 61 —
Different types of Earthing
1.5 Different types of wire-gauge & strands,
applications
1.6 Different tools used Electrical wiring installations —
Applications
1.7 General wiring accessories & their uses.
1.8 Types of wiring & their comparison.

24
2.0 PRACTICES
periods

2.1 Study of Single Phase service connection from

Pole to house ( Equipments required : Service
Pole, Energy Meter, Service Fuse, Distribution
Board, Earth Wire) & Complete connection of
Consumer Installation.
2.2 To make Straight & ‘T’ Joint of 7/20 PVC wire.
2.3 Wiring practice in Casing / Conduit Wiring (PVC
Conduit) ( one light, one fan ,one plug point & One
lamp controlled by Two- Way switches including
connection of Single phase Energy Meter & Main
Switch).
2.4 Wiring of Calling-Bell ( on T.W. batten/ PVC
conduit / PVC casing).
2.5 Connection of Twin-Fluorescent Tube (AC/DC) .
2.6 Practice of Soldering & De soldering
Techniques).
2.7 Identification of Basic Electronics components
using Multimeter.
* N.B. ITEM 2.1 & 2.3 ARE COMPULSORY AND THE
STUDENTS ARE TO UNDERGO ANY 3 OUT OF THE REST 5
PRACTICES.

Unit: 2 6
Carpentry PERIODS

1.0 GENERAL SHOP TALK

1.1 Name and use of raw materials used in carpentry

shop: wood & alternative materials
1.2 Names, uses, care and maintenance of hand tools
such as different types of Saws, ‘G’- Clamp
Chisels, Mallets, Carpenter's vices, Marking
gauges, Try-squares, Rulers and other commonly
used tools and materials used in carpentry shop
by segregating as cutting tools, supporting tools,
holding tools , measuring tools etc.
1.3 Specification of tools used in carpentry shop.
1.4 Different types of Timbers , their properties, uses
& defects.
1.5 Seasoning of wood.
1.6 Estimation.
2.0 PRACTICES

24
2.1 PRACTICES FOR BASIC CARPENTRY W ORK
PERIODS

(a) Sawing practice using different types of saws

(b) Assembling jack plane — Planning practice
including sharpening of jack plane cutter
(c) Chiselling practice using different types of
chisels including sharpening of chisel
(d) Making of different types of wooden pin &
Fixing methods.
(e) Marking, measuring and inspection of jobs.
2.2 PREPARATION OF JOINTS IN A SINGLE PIECE OF JOB (ANY
ONE )
(a) Half-lap joint ("I" Cross or "L" or ‘T’).
(b) Mortise & Tenon Joint (including drilling and
fixing using wooden pins) — T-joint
(c) Dovetail joint (Lap & Bridle Dovetail)
2.3 PRACTICE ON W OOD W ORKING LATHE

(a) Safety precaution on Wood working machines.

(b) Study of wood working lathe; (c) Sharpening

of lathe tools; (d) Setting of jobs and tools;

(e) Different type of wood turning practice

2.4 * PRODUCTION OF UTILITY ARTICLES (GROUP WORK)

(a) Making Handles of chisels / files /screw

drivers etc.

(b) Making Legs of cabinets: Straight, Tapered

and Ornamental

2.5 Study on and practice of the following machines:

(a) Surface Planer (b) Band Saw (c) Circular
Saw

* May be done in group work if possible

Unit: 3 SMITHY/ FORGING SHOP
6
PERIODS

1. GENERAL SHOP TALK

1.1 Purpose of Smithy / Forging Shop

1.2 Different types of Hearths used in Smithy / Forging
shop
1.3 Purpose specifications uses, care and maintenance
of various tools and equipments used in hand forging
by segregating as cutting tools, supporting tools,
holding tools, measuring tools etc.

1.4 Types of fuel used and maximum temperature

obtained
1.5 Types of raw materials used in Smithy / Forging shop
1.6 Uses of Fire Bricks & Clays in Forging Work Shop.

2. PRACTICES 24
PERIODS
2.1 Practice of firing of hearth / Furnace, Cleaning of
Clinkers and Temperature Control of Fire.
2.2 Practice on different basic Smithy / Forging
operations such as Cutting, Upsetting, Drawing
down, Setting down, Necking, Bending, Fullering,
Swaging, Punching and Drifting
(A) Demonstration — Making cube, hexagonal
cube, hexagonal bar from round bar
(B) Job Preparation (Any one)
Job 1 Making a cold / hot, hexagonal /
octagonal flat chisel including
tempering of edges
Job 2 Making a chain-link or Door Ring by
bending and forge-welding
Job 3 Production of utility goods e.g.
hexagonal bolt / square shank boring
tool, fan hook (long S-type) [Two
jobs are to be done by the students]

2.3 Practice of Simple Heat treatment processes like

Tempering, Normalizing Hardening etc.
Unit: 4 WELDING SHOP
6 Periods
 1. GENERAL SHOP TALK

1.1 Purpose of Welding, Brazing and Soldering.

1.2 Purpose, specifications, uses, care and
maintenance of various Welding machines,
Cables, tools and equipments used for welding,
brazing and soldering (soft and hard)
1.3 Purpose of fluxes, electrodes, filler rods
1.4 Safety equipments used in Welding Shop
1.5 Various method of Welding (Fusion and
Resistance ) and its use.
1.6 Selection of Electrods
2.0 PRACTICES 24
PERIODS

2.1 Study of Welding Transformers and Generators

used in Arc-Welding
2.2 Demonstration of Gas-Cutting and Gas-Welding
processes
2.3 Practice of Edge Preparation, Simple run, Tag
Welding on arc-welding.
2.4 PRACTICE OF W ELDING: (a) Lap welding, (b)
Different methods of Butt Welding (c) T’ Fillet &
Groove Welding, (d) Edge & Corner Welding in
different position like Down hand Flat, Horizontal
and Vertical (e) Stress relieving method.
(A) Job Preparation (Any One)
JOB - 1 JOINING of M.S. plates — Two
jobs on Lap-Joint and Butt-Joint
(single/double plates), thickness
of plates varying from 6 mm to 12
mm with proper edge preparation
JOB - 2 SPOT-W ELDING on M.S. /G.I.
Sheets
JOB - 3 SOLDERING: use of soft / hard
solders and brazing on dissimilar
materials
JOB - 4 Study of TIG / MIG welding sets
(B) Testing
Defects in welding and testing of welding
joints by Dry Penetration method & by
Mechanical Method.

_______

Unit: 5 6
PERIODS
BENCH WORK & FITTING SHOP
 1. GENERAL SHOP TALK

Purpose of Bench Work and Fitting Shop:

(a) Study of different types of hand tools & their
uses, care and maintenance of tools e.g. Files,
Chisels, Hammers, Hack-saw with frames, Fitting
Bench Vice, Different other Vices, Divider, Try-
square, Drill-taps, Dies, V-blocks, Bevel
protector, Scribers, Surface plates, Types of
Callipers Types of Drill bits etc.
(b) Study of measuring instruments by direct
and indirect methods: Micrometer – Vernier
callipers – Bevel protectors – Steel Rule.
24
(c) Dismantling & Assembling of Fitting Bench PERIODS
Vice.
(d) Study of Drilling Machine.
2.0 BASIC FITTING SHOP PRACTICES*

2.1 Chipping and chiselling practice

2.2 Filling practice
2.3 Marking and measuring practice
2.4 Drilling and tapping practice
2.5 Making Stud Bolt by Die.
2.6 Making Male- Female Joint.
* N.B. AT LEAST ONE JOB COVERING THE ABOVE MENTIONED ARE
TO BE PREPARED INCLUDING PROCESSES.

Unit: 6 6PERIODS
M ACHINE SHOP

1. SHOP TALK ON MACHINE SHOP

1.1 Safety Precautions.

1.2 Demonstration of drilling machine, Lathe
machine, Shaping, Slotting machine. 24
1.3 Demonstration of drill bits, Single Point & Multi PERIODS
point Cutting tools
2. PRACTICE ON MACHINE SHOP

2.1 Use of Drill Machine and drilling practice

2.2 Preparation of one job in Lathe machine
involving the operation like Plane Turning, Step
Turning, Grooving, Chamfering, Knurling etc.

Unit :7 6
PERIODS
 ELCTRONICS WORKSHOP

1. SHOP THEORY

1.1 Common Assembly tools.

1.2 Identification of Basic Components; both active &
passive
1.3 Use of Multimeter (both Analog and digital).
1.4 Rules for soldering & de-soldering.
1.5 Rules of component mounting and harnessing.
1.6 Artwork Materials in PCB design, General artwork
rules, taping guidelines.
2. PRACTICES 24
PERIODS
2.1 Identification of basic components: Passive-
resistors, Capacitors, Inductors/Coils,
Transformers, relays, switches, connectors;
Active- Batteries/cells, diode, transistors (BJT,
FET) SCR, diac, Triac, LED, LCD, Photo-diode,
Photo-transistors.

2.2 Use of Multimeters to test components and

measurement of circuits, Voltage, resistance etc.
2.3 Soldering and de-soldering practice
2.4 Component mounting practice
2.5 Wire harnessing practice
2.6 General artwork practice on graph sheets and
taping practice on mylar sheet.
_______

Unit :8 6
PERIODS
COMPUTER WORKSHOP

1. SHOP THEORY

1.1 Different types of Key Boards.

1.2 Different types of Mouse.
1.3 Different types of Scanners.
1.4 Different types of Modems.
1.5 Different types of Printers.
1.6 Different types of CD Writers, Speakers, CD
Read/ Write Drive.
1.7 Different types of Microphones, LCD Projectors,
Pen Drive, DVD Drives.
1.8 Different types of Monitors.
1.9 Different makes of Hard Disks.
 1.10 Different types of Net Work Interface
Cards.
1.11 Different types of Cables Such as Data
Cables, Printers Cables Net Work Cables, Power
Cables etc.
1.12 Different types of Floppy Disk.
1.13 Mother Board connection.
1.14 Graphics Card connection.
1.15 Net Work Interface card connection.

2. PRACTICES 24
PERIODS
2.1 Connection of Mouse in different ports.
2.2 Connection of Key Boards in different ports.
2.3 Connection of Monitors.
2.4 Connection of Printers.
2.5 Different Switch settings of Printers.
2.6 Printer’s self test.
2.7 Jumper setting of Hard Disks.
2.8 Attaching FDD, HDD and CD Drives.
2.9 Attaching Pen Drives and DVDs.
2.10 Attaching Scanner.

_______

Text Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
S. K. Hazra Chaudhury Work Shop Technology Volume I &II Latest Media promoters, Mumbai
Raghuwanshi Work Shop Technology Volume I &II Latest Dhanpath Rai &Sons
Gupta Production Technology Sayta Prakasani
Bawa Manufacturing Processes Tata McGraw-Hill
Ali Hasan & R. A. Manufacturing Processes Scitech Pub.Chenni
Khan

Reference Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher

Sl. No. Question Paper setting tips

A D. S. Kumar, Mechanical Engineering
B
 PART – I
2nd Semester
FINAL
CURRICULAR STRUCTURE
AND
S Y L L A B I OF
FULL–TIME DIPLOMA COURSES IN
ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY
W.E.F. 2013-14

WEST BENGAL STATE COUNCIL OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION

(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)

“Kolkata Karigori Bhavan”, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata – 700013

1
 CURRICULAR STRUCTURE FOR PART – I (1st YEAR) OF THE
FULL-TIME DIPLOMA COURSES IN ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY
WEST BENGAL STATE COUNCIL OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR DIPLOMA IN ENGINEERING COURSES
COURSE NAME: All Branches except Architecture, Photography , Multi media and Printing Technology
DURATION OF COURSE: 6SEMESTERS
SEMESTER: FIRST
BRANCH: Common for all branches except Architecture, Photography, Multi media and Printing Technology
PERIODS EVALUATION SCHEME
SR.
SUBJECT CREDITS INTERNAL SCHEME Total
NO. L TU PR ESE PR
TA CT Total Marks
1 Communication Skill 3 2 2 - 10 20 30 70 100
2 Basic Physics 3 2 - 2 10 20 30 70 50 150
3 Basic Chemistry 3 2 - 2 10 20 30 70 50 150
4 Mathematics 5 4 1 - 10 20 30 70 - 100
5 Engineering Mechanics 4 3 1 - 10 20 30 70 - 100
6 Technical Drawing 4 2 - 3 5 10 15 35 50 100
7 Computer Fundamentals 2 1 - 3 - - - - 50 50
8 Workshop Practice-I 2 - - 3 - - - - 50 50
Total: 26 16 4 13 55 110 165 385 250 800
STUDENT CONTACT HOURS PER WEEK:33 hrs
Theory and Practical Period of 60 Minutes each.
L- Lecture, TU- Tutorials, PR- Practical, TA- Teachers Assessment, CT- Class Test, ESE- End Semester Exam.

WEST BENGAL STATE COUNCIL OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION

TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR DIPLOMA IN ENGINEERING COURSES
COURSE NAME: All Branches except Architecture, Photography, Multi media and Printing Technology
DURATION OF COURSE: 6 SEMESTERS
SEMESTER: SECOND
BRANCH: Common for all branches except Architecture, Photography, Multi Media and Printing Technology
PERIODS EVALUATION SCHEME
SR. CREDIT INTERNAL
SUBJECT Total
NO. S L TU PR SCHEME ESE PR
Marks
TA CT Total
1 Business Economics & Accountancy 3 4 - - 10 20 30 70 - 100
2 Applied Physics 3 2 - 2 5 10 15 35 50 100
3 Applied Chemistry 3 2 - 2 5 10 15 35 50 100
4 Engineering Mathematics 4 3 1 - 10 20 30 70 - 100
5 Strength of Materials 2 2 1 - 5 10 15 35 - 50
6 Electrical Technology 2 2 1 - 5 10 15 35 - 50
7 Engineering Drawing 3 1 - 3 5 10 15 35 100 150
8 Workshop Practice-II 2 - - 3 - - - - 100 100
9 Development of Life Skill -I 3 1 - 3 - - - - 50 50
Total: 25 17 3 13 45 90 135 315 350 800
STUDENT CONTACT HOURS PER WEEK:33 hrs
Theory and Practical Period of 60 Minutes each.
L- Lecture, TU- Tutorials, PR- Practical, TA- Teachers Assessment, CT- Class Test, ESE- End Semester Exam.

2
 2nd Semester
Syllabus for: Business Economics & Accountancy

Name of the Course: Business Economics & Accountancy

Course Code: Semester: Second

Duration: : Seventeen weeks Maximum Marks: 100

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 4 hrs./week Mid Semester Exam.:20 Marks
Tutorial: Nil hrs./week Attendance & Teacher’s Assessment : 10 Marks
Practical: Nil hrs./week End Semester Exam.:70 Marks
Credit: 3
Aim:
Sl. No. The Students will be able to:
1. Understand some basic economic principles applied in business
2. Analyze logically the interrelationships among economic ideas
3. Solve economic problems using mathematics as a tool
4. Derive results using mathematical formula
5. Apply decision rules to select best alternative
6. Relate theory to real life observations
7. Make judgment in case of choice problems
8. Understand basic concepts of Accounts
9. Apply Golden Rules in Journal & Ledger
10. Maintain Cash Book
11. Prepare Trial Balance
12. Prepare Final Account
Objective:
Sl. No. The students are likely to acquire the following skills at the end of the course:
1. Critical thinking skill
2. Mathematical problem solving skill
3. Theorizing skill
4. Decision making skill
5. Accounting skill
6. Computing skill
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.

3
 1. Elementary knowledge about Co-ordinate Geometry
2. Basic knowledge in Algebra and Differential Calculus
Contents : GROUP: A BUSINESS ECONOMICS TOTAL PERIODS: 30 Hrs./Unit Marks
Unit: 1
Name of the Topics: 1.1 Allocation and effective utilisation of scarce Period: 2
Economics and Its Relation resources ;Opportunity cost; Rationality
with Engineering Costs and benefits
Period: 10 1.2 Theory of demand and Supply

Demand function; Law of demand ;

Determinants and exceptions to the law of demand;
Price elasticity of demand and its importance; Period: 8
Determinants of elasticity;
Income elasticity of demand;
Cross price elasticity of demand;
Classification of goods on the basis of elasticities
Determinants of price elasticity
Supply function and its determinants
Market mechanism; equilibrium and its stability
Application :
(a) Calculating elasticity from linear demand equation;
(b) solving linear demand and supply equations
(C) Shifts of demand and supply curves

Unit: 2 2.1 Theory of Production and Costs Period 8

Name of the Topics: Production func@on ̶ short run & long run;
Theory of Production, Cost Short run ̶ theory of production ;
and Markets Long run ̶ Returns to scale;
Theory of costs ̶ short run and long run cost curves
Periods: 12 Economic Concept of profit;
Application:
(a) Cobb-Douglas production function
(b) Maximization of profit /output from linear
demand function and quadratic or cubic cost
functions;
2.2 Markets Period 3
Basic features of ̶
(a) Perfectly Competitive Market
(b) Monopolistic Competition
(c) Oligopoly and
(d) Monopoly,
Relevant examples from Indian economy

Unit: 3
Investment Planning and 3.1 Investment Planning
Period :3
Problems of Indian Economy
Concept of investment
Periods: 8
Evaluating Capital Projects

4
 (a ) Payback Period Method
(b) Net Present Value Method
(c) Internal Rate of Return Method
Application : Solving numerical problems

Period: 6
3.2 Economic Concepts and issues in the Context of
Indian Economy

Mixed Economy and relevance of planning;

Globalization;
Gross Domestic Product and its growth;
Inflation;
Business Cycle and real estate business in India;
Foreign Direct Investment;

Total Periods : 30
GROUP – B ACCOUNTANCY TOTAL PERIODS: 30

Unit: 4 4.1 Introduction to Accountancy Periods: 2

Name of the Topics:
Fundamentals of 4.1.1 Accountancy: Definition & objectives
Accountancy 4.1.2 Book Keeping & Accountancy
Periods: 12 4.1.3 Accountancy &Accounting Evolution
4.1.4 Single & Double Entry System

4.2 Double Entry System

Periods:10
4.2.1. Transaction Concepts: Accounts & Classification of
Accounts – Transaction- Two fold aspects Events –
Golden Rules
4.2.2 Journal as a book of prime entry : subdivisions of
Journal –Recording of Transaction Narration
4.2.3 Ledger : Rules for writing Ledger – Balancing of
Ledger Accounts—Concepts of b/d and c/d

Unit: 5 5.1 Cash Book Periods: 3

Name of the Topics:
Cash Book and Trial Balance 5.1.1. Single Columns and Double Column including
Periods: 9 Contra Entry
5.1.2. Concept of Petty Cash Book
5.2 Trial Balance

5.2.1 Preparation of Trial Balance Periods: 6

5.2.2 Rectification of Wrong Trial Balance
5.2.3 Errors detected in Trial Balance
5.2.4 Errors not detected in Trial Balance

5
Unit: 6 6.1 Basic Concepts Regarding Final Account Periods:2
Name of the Topics: General Concept – Assets, Liabilities, Capital Drawings,
Preparing Final Account Provision, Reserve, Reserve Fund, Bad Debts, Provision
for Debts, Profit Seeking and Non-profit Seeking
Periods: 9 Concerns
6.2 Final Account
Trading Account – Profit & Loss Account – Balance Periods: 7
Sheet (with simple adjustment)

Total Periods : 30
Text Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
Samuelson & Nordhaus Economics Sixteenth Edition Tata McGraw Hill
Mankiw, Gregory N. Principles of Economics Sixth Edition CENAGE Learning
A.N. Agarwal Indian Economy: Problem of Development and New Age International
Planning
Dey & Dutt Hisab Shastra Chaya Prakashani
Amitava Basu Financial Accountancy ̶ 1 Teedee Publisher
Ranesh Roy Bharat-er Arthaniti (Bengali Version) Mitram
Haridas Acharya Adhunik Arthaniti De Book Concern

Reference Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
Archibald & Lipsey Introduction to Mathematical Harper & Row
Economics
Lipsey & Chrystal Economics 12th Edition Oxford
Basu & Das Practice in Accountancy Rabindra Library
S. N. Maheshwari Introduction to Accountancy Pioneer Book House

Sl. No. Question Paper setting tips

A Business Economics Short Question: 10 Marks, Students will answer 10 questions, each carrying 1
mark out of 14 questions. Type: True/False, MCQ, Fill in the blanks, Definitions, Matching the items
etc.

Accountancy Short Question: 10 Marks, Students will answer 10 questions, each carrying 1 mark
out of 14 questions. Type : True/False , Classification of Accounts(Personal/Real/Nominal) etc.
B
Business Economics Broad question: 25 Marks, Students have to answer any 5 questions choosing
at least 1(one) from each of the 3 units. A total of 9(nine) questions have to be set, 3 from each
unit. Each question will carry 5 Marks. Only short note to be set from Unit 3 Chapter 2

Accountancy Broad Question: 25 Marks, students will answer 3 questions choosing 1 (one) from

6
 each of the 3 units. A total of 6(six) questions have to be set, 2(two) from each Unit. From Unit 4,
1(one) numerical problem & 1(one) theoretical question carrying 8(eight) marks. From Unit 5,
1(one) numerical problem & 1(one) theoretical question carrying 7(seven) marks. From Unit 6,
1(one) numerical problem & 1(one) theoretical question carrying 10(ten) marks. Theoretical
questions may have more than 1(one) part questions.

Syllabus on Applied Physics

Name of the Course:

Subject : APPLIED PHYSICS

Course Code: Semester: SECOND

Duration: 6 months Maximum Marks: 50

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 2 hrs./week Mid Semester Exam.: 10 Marks
Tutorial: -- hrs./week Attendance, Assignment & interaction: 5 Marks
Practical: 2 hrs./week End Semester Exam.: 35 Marks
Credit: 3
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. To make the students of Engineering & Technology aware of the basic laws and
principles of Physics and their applications in the field of Engineering &
Technology.
2. The goal of physics is to formulate comprehensive principles that bring together
and explain the world around us.
3. To establish the awareness about the power of Physics as a tool in the
practicality of the life.
Objective:
Sl. No. Students will be able to
1. • Analyze and solve problems of mechanics with engineering aspects.
• Acquire basic knowledge on rotational mechanics for engineering
applications.
• Acquire knowledge on superconductivity
• Differentiate galvanometer, ammeter and voltmeter.
• Learn the applications of Wheatstone bridge principle.
• Learn thermoelectric effects.
2. • Analyze magnetic effect of electric current and its application.
• Learn the applications of electromagnetic induction.
3. • Acquire basic knowledge on semiconductor and applications of p-n
junction diode.
• Learn the applications of X-ray and LASER.
• Enhance analytical approach in formulating and solving problems related
to different physical situations.
Pre-Requisite:

7
Sl. No.
1. Basic Mathematics knowledge to solve the problems.
2. Knowledge of basic concepts sciences such as physics, chemistry and
mathematics
3. Visualization and analytical approach towards the subject is necessary

End Semester Examinations Scheme. Maximum Marks – 35. Time allotted – 2 hrs.
Group Unit Objective Questions Subjective Questions
(MCQ only with one correct
answer)
No. of questions Total No. of To answer Marks Total
to be set marks questions to per marks
be set question
A 1, 2, 3 6 5 3
10 5 25
B 4, 5 4 4 2
• Only multiple choice type questions (MCQ) with one correct answer are to be set in the
objective part.
• Specific instruction to the students to maintain the order in answering objective questions
should be given on top of the question paper.

Content (Theory) Hrs/Unit Marks/Unit

Unit – 1 1.1 Rectilinear Motion: Kinematical 8 10
PARTICLE DYNAMICS equations in one dimension: v=u+ a t,
s=ut+(1/2)at2, V2=u2+2as (only equation),
Distance travelled by particle in nth second,
Velocity- Time Diagrams:- uniform velocity,
uniform acceleration and uniform
retardation. Kinematical equations for
motion under gravity.

1.2 Laws of Motion: Newton’s laws of motion,

definition of force from second law. Momentum
and impulse of force (definition and SI unit) and
their relation. Conservation of linear momentum
(statement only). Applications to – Recoil of gun,
Motion of lift, Motion of two bodies connected by
light inextensible string passing over smooth pulley.
(Simple problems).

1.3 Rotational Motion: Angular displacement,

angular velocity and angular acceleration (definition
and SI unit only). Relation between linear velocity &
angular velocity and between linear acceleration &
angular acceleration. Centripetal acceleration and
centripetal force (definition and formula only, no
derivation). Centrifugal force (formula & concept
only). Moment of a force or torque (definition & SI
unit). Moment of inertia (definition & SI unit).

8
 Angular momentum (definition & SI unit). Relation
between torque and angular momentum (no
derivation). Principle of conservation of angular
momentum (Statement only).

Unit – 2 Concept and explanation of work, power and 3 4

WORK, POWER AND energy with their SI units. Importance of force –
ENERGY displacement curve (concept of work). Mechanical
energy: kinetic energy (derivation) and potential
energy. Work – energy principle. Law of
conservation of mechanical energy. (Simple
numerical problems).

Unit – 3 3.1 ELECTRIC CURRENT: Ohm’s law — Resistance 6 7

CURRENT and its unit, specific resistance — Various factors
ELECTRICITY affecting the resistance. Concept of super
conductivity, Equivalent resistance for Series and
Parallel arrangements of resistances (No deduction),
(Simple numerical problems) Concept of conversion
of Galvanometer to Ammeter and Voltmeter and
related simple problems. Wheatstone Bridge
Principle for balanced condition, its applications in
Meter Bridge and P.O. Box.

3.2 HEATING EFFECTS OF CURRENT: Joule’s law —

Electrical work, energy and power with practical
units (Simple numerical problems).

3.3 THERMOELECTRICITY: Thermocouple. Seebeck

effect, thermo-emf (expression only), emf-
temperature curve, neutral temperature & inversion
temperature, thermoelectric power(definition only)
Peltier effect (statement only). Differences between
Peltier effect with Joule’s effect.

Unit – 4 4.1 MAGNETIC EFFECT OF ELECTRIC CURRENT: Bio- 5 5

ELECTROMAGNETISM Savart’s law. Magnetic field: (i) for infinitely long
straight current conductor, (ii) at the centre of a
current carrying circular coil, (iii) for infinitely long
current solenoid (no deduction, only concept and
mathematical expression in S.I. units). Force on
a current carrying conductor placed in a
magnetic field (formula only), Fleming’s left hand
rule. Application of Magnetic effect of electric
current – Galvanometer (concept only)

4.2 ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION: Magnetic flux,

Magnetic flux density with SI units, Faraday's
laws, Lenz's law, Motional emf (qualitative
discussion with formula only). Fleming's right
hand rule. Self induction, mutual induction and
their coefficients (definition and SI unit).
Principles of generation of AC.
Unit – 5 5.1 SEMI – CONDUCTOR: Energy band in solids (Idea 8 9

9
MODERN PHYSICS only). Distinction between conductor, insulators &
semi-conductors in terms of energy band diagram,
Intrinsic and extrinsic (P-type; N-type)
semiconductor, P – N junction diode, depletion
region, potential barrier. Forward and reverse
biasing; Forward and reverse bias characteristic
curve. Application of P – N junction diode as – (i)
half wave rectifier, (ii) full wave rectifier (Bridge
circuit only) (only circuits and explanation with input
and output curves).

5.2 X – rays: Production of X- rays by Coolidge X-

ray tube. X-ray spectra – continuous and
characteristic X- rays (Graphical plot only), minimum
wavelength (simple problems). Properties of X- rays.
Application of X- rays.

5.3 LASER: Light amplification by stimulated

emission of radiation. Properties of laser.
Spontaneous and stimulated emission,
population inversion, pumping. He - Ne laser
(Principle only). Hologram and its use (mention
only).
TOTAL 30 35
Recommended that Units – 3 & 4 be taught at the beginning to provide back up to ELECTRICAL
TECHNOLOGY.
Practicals:
Sl. No. Skills to be developed
1. 1) Intellectual skills-
• Proper selection of measuring instruments on the basis of range, least
count, precision and accuracy required for measurement.
• Analyze properties of matter & their use for the selection of material.
• To verify the principles, laws, using given instruments under different
conditions.
• To read and interpret the graph.
• To interpret the results from observations and calculations.
2. 2) Motor skills-
• Proper handling of instruments.
• Measuring physical quantities accurately.
• To observe the phenomenon and to list the observations in proper
tabular form.
• To adopt proper procedure and precautions while performing the
experiment.
• To plot the graphs.

Examination scheme:
• Continuous Internal Assessment: 25 marks.

• External Assessment: Marks – 25. Time allotted – 2 hrs. External teacher will assess the
students. Each student will have to perform one experiment allotted on lottery basis.
Distribution of marks: Theory – 5. Table, units & data taking – 10. Viva – Voce – 10.

10
Laboratory Experiments :
Sl. No. At least six experiments to be performed
1. • Verification of series law of resistances by P.O. Box (Values of resistances to be
supplied).
2. • Determination of specific resistance of the material of a wire by metre bridge
(length and diameter of the wire to be supplied).
3. • Verification of parallel law of resistances by ammeter – Voltmeter method.
4. • Drawing of the forward bias characteristic curve (I-V curve) of a P – N junction
diode.
5. • Determination of the velocity of sound in air at NTP by resonance air column
method.
6. • Determination of the frequency of an unknown tuning fork by resonance air
column method / preferably by sonometer.
7. • Determination of acceleration due to gravity by simple pendulum.
8. • Determination of the resistance of a table galvanometer by half deflection
method.

Text and reference books:

Sl. No. Title of the Book Name of Authors Publisher
1. Physics – I &II Resnik & Halliday Wily Eastern Ltd.
2. Physics. Part – I & II NCERT
3. Applied Physics Arthur Beiser Tata McGraw- Hill
4. Physics - I V. Rajendram Tata McGraw- Hill Pub.
5. Engineering Physics Avadhanulu, Kshirsagar S. Chand Publication
6. Concept of Physics. Vol.- I H. C. Verma Bharati Bhavan Pub. &
&II Distribution
7. B. Sc. Physics. Vol.- I & II C. L. Arora S. Chand & Co. Ltd.
8 Engineering Physics R. K. Gaur & S. L. Gupta Dhanpat Rai Pub.
9 University Physics Young
10. ABC of Physics S. K. Gupta Modern Publisher, New Delhi
11. General Properties of D. S. Mathur S. Chand & Co. Ltd.
matter
12. Text Book of ISC Physics Bhatnagar Selina Publication
13. A Text Book of Light B. Ghosh & K. G. Sreedhar Pub.
Majumder
14. Elements of H. S. Physics-I Dutta & Pal Publishing Syndicate
& II
15. H. S. Physics. Vol.- I & II Duari, Maity & Majumder Chhaya Prakashani
16. H. S. Physics – I & II C. R. Dasgupta Pub.Book Syndicate
18. Senior Practical Physics A.S. Vasudeva S. K. Kataria & Sons
19. Elements of Physics-2 Dr. Subrata Kamilya Knowledge Group Publications
20 Physics 2 Basak (WBSCTE Series) Tata McGraw- Hill
List of equipments / apparatus for laboratory experiments :
Sl. No. Name of major equipment / apparatus
1 P. O. Box
2 Metre bridge
3 Table galvanometer
4 Resistance box
5 Standard resistance coil

11
 6 Variable DC power supply (Eliminator)
7 Sliding rheostat
8 Commutator
9 Sonometer

Syllabus for: Applied Chemistry

Name of the Course: Applied Chemistry

(All Branches of Diploma in Engineering And Technology)
Course Code: Semester: first

Duration: : 6 months Maximum Marks: 50

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 2 hrs./week Internal Examination: 10Marks
Tutorial: Nil hrs./week Attendance+Assignment + interaction :05 Marks
Practical: 2 hrs./week Final Examination: 35Marks
Credit:
Aim:
Sl. No. The Students will be able to:
1. It is intended to teach students the appropriate use of engineering materials, their protection &
lubrication processes in different working conditions of machines.
Objective:
Sl. No. The students are likely to acquire the following skills at the end of the course:
1. Suggest the appropriate use of metals, alloys & non metallic materials in engineering.
2. Applying the Knowledge to Protect Metallic & Non Metallic Surfaces
3. Select Lubricants for Smooth Running of Machines.
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
Detailed Course Content Hrs./Unit Marks
GROUP: A
Unit: 1 Portland cement: Raw materials, Composition and 3 4
Name of the Topics: Manufacture, Setting and Hardening of cement,
Cement function of gypsum, Cement Mortar, Cement concrete,
Lime mortar, plaster of paris.
Unit: 2 Definition, purpose and types of lubrication, names of 2 4
Name of the Topics: common lubricants and uses, Flash point, Fire point,
lubricant Pour point, Cloud point, selection of lubricant.

Unit: 3 3 4
(For printing Aliphatic compounds: Chemical test to identify & uses-
Technology only) Alcohol: Ethanol, 2-propanol, 1- butanol.
Ketone: Acetone, butanone.
Acid: Acetic acid, propanoic acid.
Ester: Ethyl acetate, amylacetate.

12
 Aromatic compounds : Benzene: chlorination,
Nitration, Friedel-Crafts alkylation;
Aniline: Diazolisation, Coupling reaction with phenol
aniline & N, N-dimethyl aniline.
Unit: 4 Defination and classification, calorific value ( Dulong 6 7
Name of the Topics: formula ), Determination of calorific value by Bomb
Fuel calorimeter.

Solid Fuels : Composition , properties and uses of

wood, peat, lignite, Proximate andU A

Liquid fuels : Fractional distillation of petroleum (

product and uses ), Cracking, Knocking, Octane
number, Cetane number, antiknock compounds.

Gaseous Fuels : Composition and uses of Coal gas,

Water gas, Producer gas, Gobar gas, Natural gas, LPG,
CNG, LNG.

GROUP – B

Unit: 5 Definition, Causes of Corrosion and methods of 4 4

Name of the Topics: prevention, Refractories --- properties and use of
Corrosion Boron Carbide and Carborandirm , Asbestors,
Glass, Ceramics, Cork (preliminary idea only).

Unit: 6 Paints : Composition , types (Snowchem, distemper) 4 4

Name of the Topics:
Varnishes : Definition , types , difference from paint,
Protective Coating
uses, characteristics.
Metallic coating : Galvanisation, Electroplating, Tin
plating.
Lacquers.
Unit: 7 Definition & classification of Synthetic polymers 5 6
Name of the Topics: Synthetic plastic : Thermoplastic plastic and
Polymers Thermosetting plastic --- their differences with
examples, preparation and uses of Polythene, PVC,
Polypropylene, Polystyrene, Teflon, Bakelite, Orlon,
Saran.
Synthetic rubber : Buna –S, Buna –N, Neoprene, Butyl,
rubber, silicone, Vulcanization of rubber.
Synthetic Fibres : Nylon , Terylene , Rayon.

GROUP – C

Unit: 8 Introduction , Definition , Causes of pollution, Types of 6 6

Name of the Topics: pollution.

13
Environmental Pollution
Air pollution : Definition, sources of Air pollution,
causes of Air pollution, Different types of Air pollutants
and their effects, Green House Effect, Acid Rain, OZone
Layer Depletion, Air pollution control methods.

Water Pollution : Definition, causes of water

pollution, sources of water pollution, Methods of
preventing water pollution, Domestic wastes,
Industrial wastes, their physical and Biologocal
characteristics, BOD, COD, Effects of water pollution.

a) Internal Examination Marks : 10

b) Final Examination Marks : 35 Full Marks = 50

c) Attendance + Assignment + interaction. : 5

Laboratory Experiments :
Sl. No.
1 Estimation of total hardness of a sample of water by

standard EDTA method.

2 Qualitative detection of Arsenic content of a given

sample of water [ 5 ppm soln of sod. Arsenite] [ 2 lit

Arsenic containing water to 20ml by evoporation]

3 To determine pH value of an unknown solution by pH

meter.

4 To apply Thin Layer Chromatography for separation

of mixture of compounds.

5 Preparation of phenol formaldehyde resin.

6 Determination of dissolve O2 in a sample of water.

7. To determine neutralization point of weak acid and

14
 weak base by conductivity meter.

8. 1. To determine end point of titration between

dilute H2SO4 and BaCl2 using conductivity

meter.

Text Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Name of the Publisher
S. S. Dara Environmental chem. & pollution control S. Chand Publication
Dr. Aloka Debi A Text Book of Env. Engg. Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co.
Jain & Jain Engg. Chem. Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co.
Madhusudan
Chem I & II Naba Prakashani
Chowdhury
Dr. Kaberi
Chem I & II Lakshmi Prakasani
Bhattacharya
Dr. Aloka Debi Chem I & II Bhagabati Prakasani
Reference Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Name of the Publisher
Jain & Jain Engg. Chem. Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co.
Dr. Aloka Debi A Text Book of Env. Engg. Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co.
Shrieve Atkins Industrial Chem
Bahl & Bahl A Text Book of Organic Chemistry S. Chand Publication
M. M. Uppal Engg. Chemistry
S. N. Poddar & S.
General & Inorganic. Chemistry Book Syndicate Pvt. Ltd.
Ghosh
Harish Kr. Chopra Engg. Chemistry
Narosha Publishing House
Anupama Parkar A Text Book
B. K. Sharma Industrial Chemistry Goel Publishing House
B. Hazra Applied Chemistry Knowledge Kit Pub.

15
 Syllabus for Engineering Mathematics
Name of the Course : ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS (Second Semester all branches)
Course Code : Semester : Second
Duration : 15 weeks Maximum Marks : 100
Teaching Scheme : Examination Scheme :
Theory : 3 contact hours/week. Internal Examination : 20 Marks
Tutorial : 1 contact hour/week Class Attendance : 05 Marks
Practical : NA End Semester Examination : 70 Marks
Credit : 4 Teacher's Assessment : 05 Marks
Aim :
1. To make the student efficient in mathematical calculations.
2. To make the student aware about the topics in mathematics having application to
engineering.
3.
Objectives – The student will be able to
1. Develop the ability to apply mathematics for solving engineering & practical problems.
2. Gather concepts, principles & different methods of mathematics.
3. Realize the importance of mathematics in the study of engineering.
Pre-Requisite -
1. Concepts of mathematics taught in the subject Mathematics in Sem-1.
Content (Name of Topic) Periods
Group – A
Unit 1 DETERMINANTS & MATRICES 12
1.1 Determinant
1.1.1 Definition & expansion of determinants of order 2 and 3.
1.1.2 Properties of determinants (statement only)
1.1.3 Minors and cofactors.
1.1.4 Evaluation of determinants of order 4 by Chio’s method.
1.2 Matrix Algebra
1.2.1 Definition of a matrix of order mxn, leading element,
principal diagonal.
1.2.2 Types of matrices – null matrix, square matrix, diagonal
matrix, identity matrix etc.
1.2.3 Symmetric and Skew symmetric matrices.
1.2.4 Matrix algebra – addition, subtraction, scalar
multiplication and multiplication of matrices.
1.2.5 Matrix inversion by adjoint method.
Unit 2 NUMERICAL METHODS 7
2.1 Concept of Interpolation with Newton forward interpolation
formula (Statement only). Simple Problems.
2.2 Numerical solution of simultaneous linear equations by
Gaussian elimination method only (without proof).
2.3 Numerical Solutions of non-linear equations by Newton-
Raphson method (without proof).
2.4 Numerical integration by trapezoidal rule & Simpson’s 1/3
rule (without proof).

GROUP - B

16
Unit 3 INTEGRATION 17
3.1 Definition of Integration as inverse process of differentiation.
3.2 Integration of standard functions.
3.3 Rules for integration (sum, difference, scalar multiple).
3.4 Methods for Integration
3.4.1 Integration by substitution.
3.4.2. Integration by trigonometric substitution.
3.4.3 Integration by parts.
3.4.4 Integration by partial fraction.
3.5 Definite Integral
3.5.1 Definition of Definite Integral.
3.5.2 Properties of definite integrals with simple problems.
3.6 Applications of Definite Integral
3.6.1 Area under plain curves.
3.6.2 Area bounded by two curves.
3.6.3 Volume of revolution. Simple examples.
GROUP - C
Unit 4 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 10
4.1 Definition of ordinary differential equation, order & degree.
4.2 Solution of differential equations of 1st order & 1st degree of
4.2.1 variable separable type
4.2.2 Homogeneous type
4.2.3 Reducible to homogeneous type
4.2.4 Exact type
4.2.5 Linear type
4.2.6 Reducible to linear type (Bernoulli’s Equation).
.4.3 Solution of 2nd order linear ordinary differential
equations with constant coefficients –
4.3.1 Evaluation of Complementary functions (C.F.)
4.3.2 Evaluation of Particular Integral (P.I.) for exponential
function, polynomial function, sine and cosine function &
functions of the form ݁ ௔௫ ܸ where V is any one of the above.
GROUP - D
Unit 5 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIATION 4
5.1 Definition & meaning of partial derivative.
5.2 Evaluation of partial derivatives.
5.3 Definition & examples of homogeneous functions.
5.3 Euler’s theorem (1st order) on Homogeneous functions for 2
& 3 variables (without proof). Simple problems.
Unit 6 STATISTICS & PROBABILITY 10
6.1 Statistics
6.1.1 Definition & examples of frequency distribution.
6.1.2 Measures of central tendency (mean, median, mode) for
ungrouped and grouped frequency distribution.
6.1.3 Measures of dispersion – Standard deviation, Simple
problems.
6.2 Probability
6.2.1 Definition of random experiment, sample space, event,
occurrence of events & types of events (eg. Impossible, mutually
exclusive, exhaustive, equally likely)
17
 6.2.2 Classical & axiomatic definition of probability
6.2.3 Addition & multiplication theorems of probability
(statement only). Simple problems.
Total 60
EXAMINATION SCHEME

Internal Examination : Marks – 20 Marks on Attendance : 05

Final Examination : Marks – 70 Teacher’s Assessment : 05

Group Unit Objective Questions Total Marks

To be Set To be Marks per
Answered Question
A 1,2 10
B 3 6 Any Twenty 1 20 x 1 = 20
C 4 6
D 5,6 6

Group Unit Subjective Questions Total Marks

To be Set To be Marks per
Answered Question
A 1,2 3 Any Five
B 3 3 Taking At 10 5 x 10 = 50
C 4 2 Least One
D 5,6 2 From Each
Group
Note 1 : Teacher’s assessment will be based on performance on given assignments & quizzes.
Note 2 : Assignments may be given on all the topics covered on the syllabus.
Text Books
Name of Authors Title of the Book Publisher
B.K. Paul Diploma Engineering Mathematics (Vol-2) U.N. Dhar & Sons
A. Sarkar Engineering Mathematics Naba Prakashani
G.P. Samanta A Text Book of Diploma Engineering Learning Press
Mathematics, Volume-2
Konch & Dey Engineering Mathematics Bhagabati Publication
B.S. Grewal Higher Engineering Mathematics Khanna Publishers, New Delhi
Babu Ram Engineering Mathematics Pearson
H.K. Dass Advanced Engineering Mathematics S. Chand & Co.
Erwin Kreyszig Advanced Engineering Mathematics Wiley
Nurul Islam Numerical Analysis Academic Press
B.C. Das & B.N. Integral Calculus - Differential Equations U.N. Dhar & Sons
Mukherjee
Srimanta Pal Engineering Mathematics Oxford University Press
Reference Books
Name of Authors Title of the Book Publisher
Fatunla S O Numerical Methods for initial value Academic Press Inc. (London)
problems in ordinary differential Ltd
equations.
Kendall E A An Introduction to numerical analysis John Wiley and Sons, 1989
(Second edition)

18
Burden, Richard L and Numerical Analysis Thomson, 9th Edition, 2011
Douglas
Braun M, Golubitsky M, Differential Equations and their New York, Springer-Verlag
Marsden J, Sirovich L, applications LLC, 1992
Jager W,

19
 Syllabus of Strength of Materials

Name of the Course: Strength of Materials

Course Code: Semester: Second
Duration: 17 Weeks Maximum Marks: 50
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 2 hrs/week Internal Examination: 10
Tutorial: 1 hrs/week Assignment & Quiz: 5
Practical: Nil hrs/week End Semester Exam:35
Credit: 2
Aim:
1. To study and realize the effect of deformable body under various loading conditions.
2. To study the concept of Moment of Inertia of various cross section.
3. To study the various mechanical properties and stress – strain diagram of different materials.
4. To prepare the students for further understanding of other allied subjects (e.g. TOS,
MOM, TOM, machine design, and Design of structure).

Objective: The students will be able to

1. Define mechanical properties of materials and understand and analyze stress-strain diagram of
engineering materials
2. Determine normal stress, shear stress, thermal stress, hoop stress, buckling stress, linear
deformation, lateral deformation and angular deformation of deformable body.
3. Calculate moment of inertia of different cross sections of various engineering body.
Pre-Requisite: Students should know
1. Elementary knowledge on engineering mechanics
2. Differential and integral calculus
Contents:
Hrs/unit Marks
Unit 1 Mechanical Properties of Materials, Simple stresses & Strain:
Definition of Elasticity, plasticity, ductility, malleability, hardness, 15 10
fatigue, creep, brittleness.
Types of loads, Types of stress – normal stress (tensile stress &
compressive stress) & shear stress, Strain – longitudinal & lateral
strain, Poisson ratio, Hooke’s law, Young’s modulus, Stress- strain
curves for ductile material (MS) and brittle material (CI)- discussion
on salient points on the stress – strain diagram, working stress,
Factor of safety.(simple problems on normal stresses and
longitudinal strain, no discussion on composite section ).
Direct shear stress, Single shear, double shear, shear strain,
modulus of rigidity. (simple Problems on direct shear in riveted
joint, punching press, cotter pin, lap welded joint)
Thermal stress & strain of uniform section (no discussion on
composite section) simple problem.
Thin cylindrical shell subjected to internal pressure - hoop stress –
longitudinal stress. Simple problem.
Unit 2 Shear Force & Bending Moment
Definition of Shear force & bending moment, sign convention, 12 8
20 Relation between shear force & bending moment, Shear force and
bending moment diagrams for simply supported beam,
overhanging beam and cantilever subjected to point loads &
 uniformly distributed load, location of point of contraflexure.
(Problems to be based on simply supported beam, overhanging
beam & cantilever beam)
Unit 3 Moment of Inertia
Definition of area and mass moment of inertia, Parallel and 9 7
perpendicular axes theorem (no derivation),
Moment of inertia about centroidal axis of solid sections – Square,
rectangular, circular, semicircular, Triangular section, Hollow
sections – square, rectangular and circular cross section only.
Moment of Inertia of angle section, channel, Tee, I section about
centroidal axis and any other axis parallel to centroidal axis.
Polar moment of inertia of circular solid and hollow section.
Problems on concerned cross sections
Unit 4 Deflection of Beam
Concepts of deflection, Maximum deflection and slope of simple 3 5
supported beam subjected to point load at mid span and / or
uniformly distributed load on entire span and cantilever beam
subjected to point load at free end and / or uniformly distributed
load on entire length. (no deduction). Simple problem on maximum
deflection and slope of beam.
Unit 5 Columns & Struts
Definitions of column & strut – Buckling of column, Concept of 6 5
equivalent length as per different end conditions, Critical load/
buckling load, safe load, Euler’s & Rankine’s formulae for critical/
buckling load for columns. Simple problem

Total: 45( 35
Lecture
+
Tutorial)
Internal assessment examination and preparation for semester 2 weeks
examination i.e. 6
lecturer
hour
Totat: 51
lecturer
hour( 17
weeks)
Text Books:
Name of Author Title of the Book Name of the Publisher
R.S.Khurmi Strength of Materials S. Chand & Co
S.S.Bhavikatti Strength of Materials V ikas publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
S. Ramamrutham & R. Strength of Materials Dhanpat Rai & Publication
Narayanan
R.K. Rajput Strength of Materials S. Chand & Co
B.K.Sarkar Strength of Materials Tata McGraw Hill
R.K.Bansal Strength of Materials Laxmi Publication Pvt. Ltd.

M. Chakraborty Strength of Materials S.K. kataria

21
Reference Books:

S.P. Timoshenko, D.H. Elements of Strength of West Press Pvt. Ltd.

Young materials
D. S. Prakash Rao Strength of Materials – A Universities Press
Practical Approach
Egor P Popov Engineering Mechanics of Prentice Hall of India
Solid
R. Subramanian Strength of Materials Oxford Press
Pranab Majumdar Learning Strength of Materials Knowledge Kit publication
Suggested List of Laboratory Experiment: Nil (As decided in the meeting of subject coordinators)
Suggested list of Assignments / Tutorial:
Group A
1. One problem on normal stress, longitudinal strain & lateral strain
2. Stress – strain diagram of MS & CI and label the salient points
3 One problem on shear stress, shear strain and modulus of rigidity
4. One problem on thermal stress and strain
5. One problem on hoop stress
6. One problem on area moment of inertia
7. One problem on column
8. One problem on deflection of beam
Group B
1. One problem of Shear force & Bending moment diagram for simple supported beam use
graphical method
2. One problem of Shear force & Bending moment diagram for cantilever beam use
graphical method
3. One problem of Shear force & Bending moment diagram for overhanging beam use
graphical method and locate point of contraflexure
Note:
Total students have to be divided into 10 groups. Each group shall be allotted three
different numerical from group A and two different problems from group B. problems shall
be submitted by each student in separate note book. All problems have to be solved in the
tutorial classes.
Sl. No.
1. Examination Scheme: (End semester examination)

Unit: Marks of each Question to be Set Question to be answered

question
1 5 3 2
2,3 5 4 2
4,5 5 2 1
1 1 4 4
2 1 2 2
3 1 2 2
4 1 1 1
5 1 1 1
Total 5×5+10×1 = 35

22
 Syllabus for Electrical Technology
Name of the Course: ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY

Course Code: Semester: 2ND

Duration: 51 hrs (34L+17T) Maximum Marks: 50

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 02 hrs./week Mid Semester Exam.: 10 Marks
Tutorial: 01 hr./week Assignment & Quiz: 05 Marks
Practical: 00 hrs./week End Semester Exam.: 35 Marks
Credit: 2
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. To understand the working principle, field of application of various electrical machines,
equipments and instruments.
2. To study basic rules and laws of electric ( dc & ac) and magnetic circuits
3. To understand the basics of electric power supply both general and domestic
Objective:
Sl. No.
1. State definitions of Basic electrical quantities used in electricity, magnetism and electromagnetic
induction and application of different laws to analyze dc and ac circuits.
2. Impart Knowledge of basic principles and field of application of electrical machines and storage
cells
3. To give Basic knowledge of electrical power supply system and testing equipments necessary for a
diploma engineer.
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. knowledge of basics of physics and mathematics at 10th std.
Contents (Theory) Hrs./Unit Max
Marks
7+5x4
UNIT-I
=27

1.1 Conventional & Non- conventional sources of energy

Module 1 : 1.2 Advantages of Electrical Energy
Different sources 1.3 Uses of Electrical Energy 2L
of Energy

Module 2: Basic
concepts of 2.1 Basic concept of charge, current, voltage, resistance,
Electrical inductance, Capacitance, power, energy and their units. 2L
quantities 2.2 Basic concept about supply source- D.C. & A.C. (names only)

23
 3.1 Statement & explanation of (a) Ohm’s law, resistances in 3L+1T
Module 3: D.C. series and parallel (b) Kirchhoff’s Current & Voltage laws
Circuits 3.2 Simple problems on D.C. Circuits

4.1 Principle of generation of sinusoidal voltage and its

waveform representation
4.2 Difference between a.c. & d.c.
4.3 Idea about- (i) instantaneous value(ii) Cycles (iii)
Frequency (iv) Time Period (v) Amplitude (vi) Phase (vii) Phase
difference (viii) average value & R.M.S. value of
Module 4: A.C. Sinusoidal quantity (ix) Form factor & peak factor
Circuits 4.4 Representation of sinusoidal quantities in
(i)Exponential form (ii) Complex form (iii) Polar form
4.5 Expressions of voltage and current for sinusoidal sources
through Pure Resistance, Inductance, and Capacitance
4.6 Simple R –L, Simple R – C and Simple R– L – C circuits 5L+2T
4.7 Concept of impedance , impedance triangle , power factor,
active, reactive and apparent power and power triangle.
4.8 Simple problems on A.C. circuit.

4+5x3
UNIT-II =19

1.1 Introduction to electromagnetism : magnetic field around a

straight current carrying conductor and a solenoid and
methods to find its direction ( concept only)
1.2 Force between two parallel current carrying conductors
(concept only)
1.3 Force on a conductor placed in the magnetic field (concept
only)
Module 1: 1.4 Definitions and units of : Magnetising force, Magnetic
Electromagnetism intensity, Magnetomotive force, Magnetic flux, Permeability,
Permeance, Reluctance 4L
1.5 Concept of magnetic circuit and comparison with electric
circuit
1.6 Concept of hysteresis, loop and hysteresis loss
1.7 Simple problems
Module 2:
Electromagnetic 2.1 Faraday’s Laws of electromagnetic induction
induction 2.2 Lenz’s law
2.3 Fleming’s right and left hand rule 3L
2.4 Principle of self and mutual induction
2.5 Energy stored in a magnetic field
2.6 concept of eddy current, eddy current loss

24
Module 3: 3.1 Classification of electrical machines
Electrical 3.2 Basic working principles of generator , motor and 4L+4T
Machines transformer ( no deductions)
3.3 Field of applications
3.4 Storage cells- working principle, charging method, care and
maintenance of storage cells.

UNIT-III 4+5x2
=14

1.1 Comparison between D.C. and A.C. system

Module 1:
1.2 Block diagram of a typical A.C. power supply system
Electrical power
supply systems 1.3 Concept of single phase and three phase system
4L+3T
1.4 Star and delta connections- relation between phase and
line voltage and current
( no deductions)

2.1 Simple idea of house wiring starting from

commencement of supply
Module 2: 2.2 Types of electric wiring used for domestic purpose and
Domestic power name of materials
4L+3T
supply 2.3 Role of fuses/ MCB/RCCB/ELCB
2.4 Concept and necessity of earthling

3.1 Name and Types of instruments used in measurement of

Voltage, Current, Power and Energy (Moving iron, Moving coil
Module 3: & Digital Meters
Measuring and 3.2 Use of Meggar with connection diagram, measurement of
earth resistance
Testing
3.3 Connection diagram of energy meter and basic principle of
Instruments
energy measurement 3L+4T
3.4 Digital & Analog multimeters-applications

Total 34L+17T 35
Text Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
1.B.L. Thereja A text book of Electrical Technology S.Chand Publication
Vol-I & II
2.Nagrath& Kothari Basic Electrical Engineering Tata McGraw hill
Publication
3.J.B.Gupta Basic Electrical Engineering/ S K Kataria & Sons

25
4.Surjit Singh Electrical Estimating & Costing Dhanpat Rai Publication
5.K.Murugesh Kumar Basic Electrical Science & Technology/ Vikas Publication
Reference Books
T. K. Nagsarkar & M. S. Basic Electrical Engineering 2 nd Oxford University Press
Sukhija
Dr. J Pal Electrical Technology Knowledge Kit Publication

Note: During Tutorial classes Teachers will take students to the laboratory for
demonstration and make them familiar with electrical apparatus, machineries and
instruments.

Assignments & Question paper setting tips:

1. Maximum 5 questions are to be given in each tutorial, in which two 2 marks questions (based on
basic concept and formulae with one/two step calculations) and three 4 marks questions are
expected.
2. Question Paper setting tips
GROUP OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL MARKS

ANSWER PER MARK SET ANSWERED QUESTION
SET ED QUESTI S
ON

A 7 4 FIVE
QUESTIONS,
B 4 10 X 1 3 TAKING AT
10 1 5 5 X 5 = 25
= 10 LEAST ONE
C FROM EACH
4 2
GROUP

Syllabus for Engineering Drawing

Name of the Course: ENGINEERING DRAWING( For ETCE,MLT,FPT,EE,CSWT,CST,DP,PHO,CHE,EIE,IT, MET,
ME,MEP,CE, AE, ARCH, MIN, MS, SE, PT, LGT, and FWT.)

Course Code: Semester: Second

Duration: 17 weeks Maximum Marks: 150
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 1 hrs./week Internal Examination: Marks: 10 Marks
on attd.:05
Tutorial: hrs./week Continuous Internal Assessment : 50 External
Assessment: 50
Practical: 3 hrs./week End Semester Exam.:
Marks 35
Credit: 3
Aim:
Sl.No.
1. The Course is aimed at developing basic graphic skills so as to enable them to use these skills in preparation
of engineering drawings.
2. Understand the fundamentals of Engineering Drawing
3. Read and interpret object drawings.
Objective:- The student should be able to:-
Sl.No.

26
1. Draw different engineering curves and know their applications.
2. Draw orthographic projections of different objects.
3. Visualize three dimensional objects and draw Isometric Projections.
4. Use the techniques and able to interpret the drawing in Engineering field
5. Use computer aided drafting
Pre-Requisite:
Sl.No.
1. Unambiguous and clear visualization.
2. Sound Pictorial Intelligence
Contents (Theory) Hrs./Unit Marks
Unit: 1 1.1 Projections of Prism, Pyramid, Cone, Cylinder, 02 05
Name of the Topics: Tetrahedron, Cube with their axes perpendicular /inclined to
Projections of Solids one reference plane and parallel to other.
Unit: 2 2.1 Types of sections 02 05
Name of the Topics: 2.2 Conversion of pictorial view into sectional orthographic
Sectional Views views (First Angle Projection Method only )
Unit: 3 3.1 Draw missing view from the given orthographic views- 02 05
Name of the Topics: simple components (First Angle Projection Method only
Missing Views[Not for ARCH] )[Not for ARCH]
Perspective Projection [For Introduction to the Principals of perspective projection
ARCH] (one point and two points) Ground Plane-Picture Plane-
Station Point-Horizontal Plane-Central Plane-Ground Line-
Horizontal Line-Axis of Vision-Centre of Vision-Visual Ray
Method- Vanishing Point Method. [ For ARCH ]
Unit: 4 4.1 Prism, Pyramid, Cone, Cylinder, Tetrahedron, Cube 03 05
Name of the Topics: resting on their base on Horizontal plane.
Sections of Solids 4.2 Prism, Cylinder : Axis parallel to both the reference
plane
4.3 Section plane inclined to one reference plane and
perpendicular to other
Unit: 5 5.1 Conversion of orthographic views into Isometric view / 03 05
Name of the Topics: projection ( Including rectangular, cylindrical objects,
Isometric Projection representation of slots on sloping as well as plane surfaces )
Unit: 6 6.1 Developments of Lateral surfaces of cube, prism, 02 05
Name of the Topics: pyramids, cylinder, cone and their applications such as tray,
Developments of Surfaces funnel, chimney, pipe bends etc.
Unit: 7 7.1 Free hand sketches of nuts, bolts, rivets, threads, split 02 05
Name of the Topics: pin, foundation bolts, keys and couplings.[Not for ARCH]
Free Hand Sketches[Not For Introduction to Axonometric Projections [ For ARCH ]
ARCH ]
Axonometric Projections[For
ARCH]
Total 16 35
Contents (Practical)
List of Practical Intellectual skill Motor skill
1.Projection of solids To interpret the different positions of To draw projections of different solids
Three problems on three different solids with reference planes. when axis is inclined or perpendicular
solids, one by axis of solid inclined to To develop ability to differentiate to one of the reference plane.
H.P and parallel to V.P. and one between true length of axis and
problem by axis inclined to V.P. and apparent length of axis.
parallel to H.P. and one problem by
axis inclined to both planes.
( 1 sheet )
2.Sectional Views & Isometric To interpret sectional views of given Develop ability to draw sectional views
Projections object , Isometric views and Isometric
Two objects by First Angle Projection Develop ability to differentiate projections from given objects and
Method with section between Isometric view and isometric orthographic views of an object
Two objects one by true scale and projections
another by Isometric scale (
1 sheet )
3.Missing Views To interpret the missing view from To develop ability to draw missing view
Two problems by first angle projection given orthographic views.[Not for from given orthographic views.

27
method [ Not for ARCH] ARCH] To develop ability to draw perspective
Two simple problems on Perspective To generate the perspective views view from given orthographic views.
Projection [ For ARCH ] from given orthographic views [For
( 1 sheet ) ARCH]

4.Section of solids To differentiate between true shape To develop ability to draw the
Three problems on different solids, and apparent shape of section. sectional orthographic views of given
one problem, section plane inclined to To Interpret the positions of section solids ,when it is cut by section plane in
H.P.and perpendicular to V.P. one plane with reference planes. different position with reference
problem ,section plane inclined to planes.
V.P.and perpendicular to H.P Ability to draw true shape of section.
And one problem, section plane
perpendicular to one reference plane
and parallel to other plane.
( 1 sheet )
5.Development of surfaces Able to interpret the development of Ability to draw the development of
Three problems on development of surfaces of different solids. surfaces of different objects in
surfaces of different objects different shapes.
( 1 sheet )
6.Free hand sketches [ Not for ARCH ] To differentiate between scale Develop ability to draw orthographic
Any six figures on different topics drawing and free hand drawing. views of different machine
Axonometric Projections[For ARCH] To differentiate between various parts elements.[Not for ARCH]
Axonometric Projection of exterior of machine.[Not for ARCH] Develop ability to draw axonometric
interiors (Bed Room-Kitchen- To express exterior or interior views of views of exterior or interiors of any
Toilet etc.) of any house. any house through Axonometric views house [For ARCH]
( 1 sheet ) [For ARCH ]

7. Drawing with CAD To differentiate between two Develop ability to draw orthographic
One object by first angle projection dimensional figure and three and Isometric figure with computer
method with section and one dimensional figure.
Isometric figure.

Text Books:
Name of Authors Titles of the Book Edition Name of the publisher
N.D.Bhatt Engineering Drawing Charotkar Publishing House
R.K.Dhawan Engineering Drawing S.Chand & Co.
K.Venugopal Engineering Drawing and New Age publication
Graphics +AutoCAD
Basant Agrawal Engineering Drawing Tata McGraw Hill Education
C M Agrawal Private Ltd.
N D Bhatt Machine Drawing Charotkar Publishing House
R K Dhawan Machine Drawing S.Chand & Co.
Pal & Bhattacharya Engineering Drawing 6th Viva Books
D. Sen Engineering Drawing Knowledge Kit Pub.
Reference Books:
Name of Authors Titles of the Book Edition Name of the publisher
P S Gill Engineering Drawing SK Kataria and sons
Dhananjay A Jolhe Engineering Drawing Tata McGraw Hill Education
Private Ltd.
Pal & Bhattacharya Computer Aided Engineering 7th Viva Books
Drawing
B. Bhattacharyya Machine Drawing Oxford University Press
Suggested list of laboratory experiments:
Not Applicable
Suggested list of Assignments/ Tutorial:
Not Applicable
Note :
1.Students should use two separate A3 Size sketch books ,One for class work practice and another for assignment.
2.Students should solve assignment on each topic.
3.Use approximately 570mm x 380mm size Drawing Sheet for sessional work

28
 Syllabus for : Workshop Practice

Name of the Course: Workshop Practice ( For Diploma in Mechanical/ Electrical/ Electronics/
Electronics & Instrumentation/ Civil/ Computer/ Chemical Engg. Groups/Mechanical
(Production)/Automobile/Computer Software/Footwear/Leather Goods/Food
Processing/Packaging/Medical Lab. Tech/Mine Survey/ Mining/ Metallurgical Engg. &
Technology/IT/ Agricultural Engg)/ Survey Engg.
Course Code: Semester: Remaining two unit ( except the unit completed in
1st semester) should be completed in 2nd semester.
Evaluation may be done by continuous assessment process
and by External Examiner in end semester.
Duration: : Seventeen weeks/Semester Maximum Marks: 100 (2nd semester)
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme: Continuous Evaluation- 50 ( Internal ),
External practical exam-50 ( at the end of 2nd semester)
Theory: Nil hrs./week Mid Semester Exam.: Nil
Tutorial: Nil hrs./week Attendance & Teacher’s Assessment:-50 Marks( 2nd)
Practical: 3 hrs./week End Semester Exam.: 50 Marks( 2nd)
Credit: 2
Aim: To impart practical knowledge in Work Shop related with course of study.
Objective: Student will able to
Sl. No.
1. Know basic Work Shop Processes.
2. Read and interpret job drawings.
3. Identify, select, & use of various marking, measuring, holding, striking & cutting tools & equipments.
4. Operate, control different machines & equipments.
5. Inspect the job for specified dimensions.
6. Produce jobs as per specified dimensions.
7. Adopt safety practices (tools, jobs& personal) while working on various machines.
8. Acquaint with the chronological operational processes involving in the jobs.
9. Care & maintenance of the tools & machines.
Pre-Requisite: Nil
Sl. No.
Contents : TOTAL PERIODS: 45 (15 Weeks) + 6 (2 Weeks) = 51 (17 Weeks) Hrs./Unit Mark
Unit: 1 is compulsory( 1st sem) and any two units ( 2nd sem) from the rest as deemed s
fit for the branches.
Unit: 1 Electrical Shop (Compulsory) 6 periods
1. General Shop Talk
1.1 General safety & precautions taken in Electrical
Workshop
1.2 Electric shock, methods of shock treatment
1.3 Fuse and safety measure
1.4 Earthing as safety measure — I.E. Rule – 61 —
Different types of Earthing
1.5 Different types of wire-gauge & strands,
applications
1.6 Different tools used Electrical wiring installations —

29
 Applications
1.7 General wiring accessories & their uses.
1.8 Types of wiring & their comparison.

24
2.0 PRACTICES periods

2.1 Study of Single Phase service connection from

Pole to house ( Equipments required : Service
Pole, Energy Meter, Service Fuse, Distribution
Board, Earth Wire) & Complete connection of
Consumer Installation.
2.2 To make Straight & ‘T’ Joint of 7/20 PVC wire.
2.3 Wiring practice in Casing / Conduit Wiring (PVC
Conduit) ( one light, one fan ,one plug point & One
lamp controlled by Two- Way switches including
connection of Single phase Energy Meter & Main
Switch).
2.4 Wiring of Calling-Bell ( on T.W. batten/ PVC
conduit / PVC casing).
2.5 Connection of Twin-Fluorescent Tube (AC/DC) .
2.6 Practice of Soldering & De soldering
Techniques).
2.7 Identification of Basic Electronics components
using Multimeter.
* N.B. ITEM 2.1 & 2.3 ARE COMPULSORY AND THE
STUDENTS ARE TO UNDERGO ANY 3 OUT OF THE REST 5
PRACTICES.

Unit: 2 6
Carpentry PERIODS
GENERAL SHOP TALK

1.1 Name and use of raw materials used in carpentry

shop: wood & alternative materials
1.2 Names, uses, care and maintenance of hand tools
such as different types of Saws, ‘G’- Clamp
Chisels, Mallets, Carpenter's vices, Marking
gauges, Try-squares, Rulers and other commonly
used tools and materials used in carpentry shop
by segregating as cutting tools, supporting tools,
holding tools , measuring tools etc.
1.3 Specification of tools used in carpentry shop.
1.4 Different types of Timbers , their properties, uses
& defects.
1.5 Seasoning of wood.
1.6 Estimation.
2.0 PRACTICES

2.1 PRACTICES FOR BASIC CARPENTRY W ORK

(a) Sawing practice using different types of saws 24

PERIODS
(b) Assembling jack plane — Planning practice
including sharpening of jack plane cutter
(c) Chiselling practice using different types of

30
 chisels including sharpening of chisel
(d) Making of different types of wooden pin &
Fixing methods.
(e) Marking, measuring and inspection of jobs.
2.2 PREPARATION OF JOINTS IN A SINGLE PIECE OF JOB (ANY
ONE )
(a) Half-lap joint ("I" Cross or "L" or ‘T’).
(b) Mortise & Tenon Joint (including drilling and
fixing using wooden pins) — T-joint
(c) Dovetail joint (Lap & Bridle Dovetail)
2.3 PRACTICE ON W OOD W ORKING LATHE

(a) Safety precaution on Wood working machines.

(b) Study of wood working lathe; (c) Sharpening

of lathe tools; (d) Setting of jobs and tools;

(e) Different type of wood turning practice

2.4 * PRODUCTION OF UTILITY ARTICLES (GROUP WORK)

(a) Making Handles of chisels / files /screw

drivers etc.

(b) Making Legs of cabinets: Straight, Tapered

and Ornamental

2.5 Study on and practice of the following machines:

(a) Surface Planer (b) Band Saw (c) Circular
Saw

* May be done in group work if possible

Unit: 3 SMITHY/ FORGING SHOP

6
PERIODS

1. GENERAL SHOP TALK

1.1 Purpose of Smithy / Forging Shop

1.2 Different types of Hearths used in Smithy / Forging
shop
1.3 Purpose specifications uses, care and maintenance
of various tools and equipments used in hand forging
by segregating as cutting tools, supporting tools,
holding tools, measuring tools etc.

1.4 Types of fuel used and maximum temperature

obtained
1.5 Types of raw materials used in Smithy / Forging shop
1.6 Uses of Fire Bricks & Clays in Forging Work Shop.

31
 2. PRACTICES
24
PERIODS
2.1 Practice of firing of hearth / Furnace, Cleaning of
Clinkers and Temperature Control of Fire.
2.2 Practice on different basic Smithy / Forging
operations such as Cutting, Upsetting, Drawing
down, Setting down, Necking, Bending, Fullering,
Swaging, Punching and Drifting
(A) Demonstration — Making cube, hexagonal
cube, hexagonal bar from round bar
(B) Job Preparation (Any one)
Job 1 Making a cold / hot, hexagonal /
octagonal flat chisel including
tempering of edges
Job 2 Making a chain-link or Door Ring by
bending and forge-welding
Job 3 Production of utility goods e.g.
hexagonal bolt / square shank boring
tool, fan hook (long S-type) [Two
jobs are to be done by the students]

2.3 Practice of Simple Heat treatment processes like

Tempering, Normalizing Hardening etc.
Unit: 4 WELDING SHOP
6 Periods

1. GENERAL SHOP TALK

1.1 Purpose of Welding, Brazing and Soldering.

1.2 Purpose, specifications, uses, care and
maintenance of various Welding machines,
Cables, tools and equipments used for welding,
brazing and soldering (soft and hard)
1.3 Purpose of fluxes, electrodes, filler rods
1.4 Safety equipments used in Welding Shop
1.5 Various method of Welding (Fusion and
Resistance ) and its use.
1.6 Selection of Electrods
24
2.0 PRACTICES PERIODS

2.1 Study of Welding Transformers and Generators

used in Arc-Welding
2.2 Demonstration of Gas-Cutting and Gas-Welding
processes
2.3 Practice of Edge Preparation, Simple run, Tag
Welding on arc-welding.
2.4 PRACTICE OF W ELDING: (a) Lap welding, (b)
Different methods of Butt Welding (c) T’ Fillet &
Groove Welding, (d) Edge & Corner Welding in

32
 different position like Down hand Flat, Horizontal
and Vertical (e) Stress relieving method.
(A) Job Preparation (Any One)
JOB - 1 JOINING of M.S. plates — Two
jobs on Lap-Joint and Butt-Joint
(single/double plates), thickness
of plates varying from 6 mm to 12
mm with proper edge preparation
JOB - 2 SPOT-W ELDING on M.S. /G.I.
Sheets
JOB - 3 SOLDERING: use of soft / hard
solders and brazing on dissimilar
materials
JOB - 4 Study of TIG / MIG welding sets
(B) Testing
Defects in welding and testing of welding
joints by Dry Penetration method & by
Mechanical Method.

_______

Unit: 5 6
PERIODS
BENCH WORK & FITTING SHOP
1. GENERAL SHOP TALK

Purpose of Bench Work and Fitting Shop:

(a) Study of different types of hand tools & their
uses, care and maintenance of tools e.g. Files,
Chisels, Hammers, Hack-saw with frames, Fitting
Bench Vice, Different other Vices, Divider, Try-
square, Drill-taps, Dies, V-blocks, Bevel
protector, Scribers, Surface plates, Types of
Callipers Types of Drill bits etc.
(b) Study of measuring instruments by direct
and indirect methods: Micrometer – Vernier
callipers – Bevel protectors – Steel Rule.
(c) Dismantling & Assembling of Fitting Bench 24
Vice. PERIODS

(d) Study of Drilling Machine.

2.0 BASIC FITTING SHOP PRACTICES*

2.1 Chipping and chiselling practice

2.2 Filling practice
2.3 Marking and measuring practice
2.4 Drilling and tapping practice
2.5 Making Stud Bolt by Die.
2.6 Making Male- Female Joint.
* N.B. AT LEAST ONE JOB COVERING THE ABOVE MENTIONED ARE
TO BE PREPARED INCLUDING PROCESSES.
Unit: 6 6PERIODS
MACHINE SHOP
1. SHOP TALK ON MACHINE SHOP

33
 1.1 Safety Precautions.
1.2 Demonstration of drilling machine, Lathe
machine, Shaping, Slotting machine.
1.3 Demonstration of drill bits, Single Point & Multi 24
point Cutting tools PERIODS
2. PRACTICE ON MACHINE SHOP

2.1 Use of Drill Machine and drilling practice

2.2 Preparation of one job in Lathe machine
involving the operation like Plane Turning, Step
Turning, Grooving, Chamfering, Knurling etc.

Unit :7 6
ELCTRONICS WORKSHOP
PERIODS

1. SHOP THEORY

1.1 Common Assembly tools.

1.2 Identification of Basic Components; both active &
passive
1.3 Use of Multimeter (both Analog and digital).
1.4 Rules for soldering & de-soldering.
1.5 Rules of component mounting and harnessing.
1.6 Artwork Materials in PCB design, General artwork
rules, taping guidelines.
2. PRACTICES

2.1 Identification of basic components: Passive- 24

resistors, Capacitors, Inductors/Coils, PERIODS
Transformers, relays, switches, connectors;
Active- Batteries/cells, diode, transistors (BJT,
FET) SCR, diac, Triac, LED, LCD, Photo-diode,
Photo-transistors.

2.2 Use of Multimeters to test components and

measurement of circuits, Voltage, resistance etc.
2.3 Soldering and de-soldering practice
2.4 Component mounting practice
2.5 Wire harnessing practice
2.6 General artwork practice on graph sheets and
taping practice on mylar sheet.
_______
Unit :8 6
COMPUTER WORKSHOP
PERIODS
1. SHOP THEORY

1.1 Different types of Key Boards.

1.2 Different types of Mouse.
1.3 Different types of Scanners.

34
 1.4 Different types of Modems.
1.5 Different types of Printers.
1.6 Different types of CD Writers, Speakers, CD
Read/ Write Drive.
1.7 Different types of Microphones, LCD Projectors,
Pen Drive, DVD Drives.
1.8 Different types of Monitors.
1.9 Different makes of Hard Disks.
1.10 Different types of Net Work Interface
Cards.
1.11 Different types of Cables Such as Data
Cables, Printers Cables Net Work Cables, Power
Cables etc.
1.12 Different types of Floppy Disk.
1.13 Mother Board connection.
1.14 Graphics Card connection.
1.15 Net Work Interface card connection.

2. PRACTICES

2.1 Connection of Mouse in different ports.

2.2 Connection of Key Boards in different ports. 24
2.3 Connection of Monitors. PERIODS
2.4 Connection of Printers.
2.5 Different Switch settings of Printers.
2.6 Printer’s self test.
2.7 Jumper setting of Hard Disks.
2.8 Attaching FDD, HDD and CD Drives.
2.9 Attaching Pen Drives and DVDs.
2.10 Attaching Scanner.

_______
Text Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
S. K. Hazra Chaudhury Work Shop Technology Volume I &II Latest Media promoters, Mumbai
Raghuwanshi Work Shop Technology Volume I &II Latest Dhanpath Rai &Sons
Gupta Production Technology Sayta Prakasani
Bawa Manufacturing Processes Tata McGraw-Hill
Ali Hasan & R. A. Manufacturing Processes Scitech Pub.Chenni
Khan

Reference Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher

Sl. No. Question Paper setting tips

A D. S. Kumar, Mechanical Engineering
B

35
Unit: 2 Information Search
Information source –Primary, secondary, tertiary Print and non –
print, documentary, Electronic Information center, Library ,
exhibition, Government Departments. Internet Information search 06
– Process of searching, collection of data –questionnaire , taking
Interview , observation method. Information analysis and
processing.
Unit: 3 Self Analysis
Understanding self—
Attitude, aptitude, assertiveness, self esteem,
09
Confidence buildings.
SWOT Analysis – concept, how to make use of SWOT
Concept of motivation.
Unit: 4 Self Development
Stress Management –Concept, causes, effects and remedies to
Avoid / minimize stress.
Health Management – Importance, dietary guidelines and
exercises.
Time management‐ Importance, Process of time planning, Urgent 20
Vs importance, Factors leading to time loss and ways to handle it,
Tips for effective time management.
EMOTION‐CONCEPT, TYPES, CONTROLLING, EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE.
CREATIVITY‐CONCEPT, FACTORS ENHANCING CREATIVITY.
THINKING – ANALYTICAL & LOGICAL THINKING, HIGHER ORDER THINKING
GOAL SETTING – CONCEPT, SETTING SMART GOAL.
Unit: 5 Study habits
Ways to enhance memory and concentration.
Developing reading skill. 10
Organisation of knowledge,
Model and methods of learning.
Total 48

Text Books:
Name of Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
Authors
Personality
Development
& Soft Skills B. K. Mitra Oxford University Press
E.H. Mc Grath Basic Managerial Skills for All Prentice Hall of India,
, S.J. Pvt Ltd
Allen Pease Body Language Sudha Publications
Pvt. Ltd.
Lowe and Phil Creativity and problem solving Kogan Page (I) P Ltd
Adair, J Decision making & Problem Solving Orient Longman
Bishop , Sue Develop Your Assertiveness Kogan Page India
Marion E Make Every Minute Count Kogan page India

2
Haynes
Pearson Organizational Behavior Tata McGraw Hill
Education
Asia
Michael Presentation Skills ISTE New Delhi
Hatton
( Canada –
India Project)
‐‐ ‐‐ Stress Management Through Yoga and Meditation Sterling Publisher Pt Ltd.
Richard Hale, Target setting and Goal Achievement Kogan page India
Peter Whilom
Chakravarty, Time management Rupa and Company
Ajanta
Marshall Adams Time management Viva Books
Cooks
Internet Assistance:
1. http://www.mindtools.com

2. http://www.stress.org

3. http://www.ethics.com

4. http://www.coopcomm.org/workbook.htm

5. http://www.mapfornonprofits.org/

6. http://www.learningmeditition.com

7. http://bbc.co.uk/learning/courses/
8. http://eqi.org/

9. http://www.abacon.com/commstudies/interpersonal/indisclosure.html
10. http://www.mapnp.org/library/ethics/ethxgde.htm

11. http://www.mapnp.org/library/grp_cnfl/grp_cnfl.htm

12. 11)http://members.aol.com/nonverbal2/diction1.htm

13. http://www.thomasarmstron.com/multiple_intelligences.htm

14. http://snow.utoronto.ca/Learn2/modules.html

15. http://www.quickmba.com/strategy/swot/
Reference Books:
Name of Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
Authors
Darlene Life Skills Activities for 5th Kindle Edition

3
Mannix Secondary Students with Special
Needs
Autism or 1001 Great Ideas for Teaching 2 nd Kindle Edition
Asperger's, and Raising Children with Autism
or Asperger's,
How to Nikolai Shevchuk Kindle Edition
Become
Smarter
Suggested List of Laboratory Experiments :
1. Conduct Guest Lectures.
2. Conduct industrial visit
3. Conduct Seminar/Group Discussions.
Suggested List of Assignments/Tutorial :
S. No The Term Work Will Consist Of Following Assignments.
Library search:‐
Visit your Institute’s Library and enlist the books available on the topic given by
your teacher. Prepare a bibliography consisting name of the author, title of the
book, publication and place of publication.
Enlist the magazines, periodicals and journals being available in your library.
Select any one of them and write down its content. Choose a topic for
presentation
Attend a seminar or a guest lecture, listen it carefully and note down the important
points and prepare a report of the same.
Visit to any one place like historical/office/farms/development sites etc. and
gather information through observation, print resources and interviewing the
people.
Prepare your individual time table for a week –
(a) List down your daily activities.
(b) Decide priorities to be given according to the urgency and importance
of the activities.
(c) Find out your time wasters and mention the corrective measures.
Keep a diary for your individual indicating‐ planning of time, daily transactions,
collection of good thoughts, important data, etc
Find out the causes of your stress that leads tension or frustration .Provide the
ways to
Avoid them or to reduce them.
Undergo the demonstration on yoga and meditation and practice it. Write your
own views, feeling and experiences on it.
MINI PROJECT on Task management. Form different teams from taking 5‐8 students in
a group. Decide any task to be completed in a stipulated time with the help of teacher.
Write a report considering various steps in a task management.
NOTE: ­ THESE ARE THE SUGGESTED ASSIGNMENT FOR GUIDE LINES TO THE SUBJECT
TEACHER. HOWEVER THE SUBJECT TEACHERS CAN SELECT, DESIGN ANY ASSIGNMENT
RELEVANT TO THE TOPIC, KEEPING IN MIND THE OBJECTIVES OF THIS SUBJECT.

4
 INTRODUCTION

The syllabus committee had taken note of the AICTE prescribed model curriculum and model syllabus for Diploma in
Electrical Engineering. It had done some brain storming sessions and come out with a curriculum and syllabus which is
largely in conformity with the AICTE syllabus with some prudent deviations. It will be worthwhile to have a qualitative
comparison between the AICTE suggested model curriculum and WBSCTE new proposed curricular structure.

Subject and Credit point comparison:

(points in bold red are the deviations)

Semester III
WBSCTE AICTE
Sr No Subject Credit Subject Credit
1 Electrical Circuit & Network Points5 Electrical Circuit & Network Points
4
2 Electrical Machine I 5 Electrical Power Generation 3
3 Basic Electronics 4 Basic Electronics 5
4 Programming concept using C 3 Applied Mathematics 3
5 Electrical Measuring Instrument 4 Electrical Measurement 4
6 Electrical Workshop 1 Electrical Workshop 2
7 Elements of Mechanical Engineering 2 Elements of Mechanical & Civil 2
Engineering
8 Professional Practices I 1 Professional Practices III 2
TOTAL CREDIT POINTS 25 25

Note:
• Electrical Machine I is covered in AICTE in Semester IV as “DC Machine & Transformer” while “Electrical Power
Generation” in the above AICTE list is covered in semester IV of WBSCTE syllabus.
• Programming in C is to inculcate logical reasoning / programming sense among the Engineering students. The contents of
Applied Mathematics have been taken care of in Engineering Mathematics of S2 and in Electrical Circuit & Network.
Semester IV

WBSCTE AICTE
Sr No Subject Credit Subject Credit
1 Electrical Machine II Points
5 DC Machine and Transformer Points4
2 Electrical Measurement & Control 4 Instrumentation 4
3 Transmission & Distribution of electric power 4 Transmission & Distribution of electric 3
4 Applied and Digital Electronics 4 power
Applied Electronics 4
5 Power Plant Engineering 4 Electrical Estimation and Costing 3
6 Computer aided Electrical Drawing 2 Electrical Drawing 2
7 Development of Life Skill -II 2 Development of Life Skill -II 3
8 Professional Practice - II 1 Professional Practice - II 1
TOTAL CREDIT POINTS 26 24

Note:
• Electrical Estimation and costing is included in WBSCTE syllabus in Semester VI as part of application of knowledge that
students gather in all other semester.
• Power Plant Engineering is a compensation of earlier semester.
• Machine II syllabus is in tune with AICTE “AC Machine” in semester V, while “DC Machine & Transformer” is already
covered in semester III under Electrical Machine I.
 Semester V:

WBSCTE AICTE
Sr Subject Credit Subject Credit
No1 Utilization, Traction , Heating and drives Points4 Utilization of electrical energy Points
4
2 Power Electronics and Drives 4 AC Machine 5
3 Switchgear & Protection 4 Switchgear & Protection 5
4. Elective I (Any One) 4 Elective I (Any One) 4
a)Illumination Engineering a) Electric Traction I
b)Heating , Ventilation and b) Computer Hardware Maintenance
Air conditioning c) Illumination Engineering
c)Energy Conservation & Audit
d) Electric Traction

5. Microprocessor & Microcontroller 4 Elective II(Any One) 4

a) Industrial Automation
b) Energy Conservation & Audit

6. Industrial Project & Entrepreneurship 3 Industrial Project & Entrepreneurship 2

Development Development

7. Professional Practice -III 2 Professional Practice -V 2

TOTAL CREDIT POINTS 25 26

Note:
• Microprocessor and Microcontroller is kept as compulsory paper in stead of optional paper (as in AICTE) keeping in view
of large scale application of controller in industries today.
• We have not considered elective II for the above reason.
• “Power Electronics and Drives” has been included in Semester VI of AICTE.
Semester VI:

WBSCTE AICTE
Sr Subject Credit Subject Credit
No1 Electrical Design Estimation & Costing Points
5 Power Electronics and Drives Points
4
2 Electrical Installation, Maintenance, Testing. 4 Testing & Maintenance of Electrical Machines 4

3 Industrial Project 3 Industrial Project 2

4 Industrial Management 3 Management 3
5 Elective II (Any One) 4 Elective III ( any one) 4
a)Industrial Automation a) Electric Traction II
b)Process Control & Instrumentation b) Maintenance & Repairs of Electrical
c)Control of Electrical Machine Equipments
d)Computer Hardware & Networking c) Microprocessor and micro controller

6 Professional Practice -IV 2 Professional Practice -VI 3

7 Electrical Workshop II 1 Heating, Ventilation & Air conditioning 4
8 General Viva voce 2
TOTAL CREDIT POINTS 24 24
Note:
• Electrical Workshop II has been introduced to take care of the need to teach maintenance, testing, troubleshooting of
electrical machines, equipments. This will help the students to work in maintenance or cater to service industries or make
their own business. So “Maintenance & repair of electrical equipments” – an elective in AICTE is made compulsory paper.
• “Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning” – a cross disciplinary subject needed for service industries, has been kept as
elective in Semester V.
• General viva voce is kept as to estimate students as well as to give them a test of what to expect in various interviews
ahead.
• “Process Control” and “Control of Electrical Machine” is introduced keeping in mind the demand from industries.
Credit Point distribution among different subjects in 3rd Semester:

Professional Practice
4%
Other branches
8%
Workshop
4%

Computer
related
12%
Electrical Papers
Electronics related 56%
16%

Credit Point distribution among different subjects in 4th Semester:

Professional
Practice
4%

Life Skill
Computer related 8%
8%

Electronics related
15%
Electrical Papers
65%

.
 Credit Point distribution among different subjects in 5th Semester:

Professional Practice
8%

Project &
Entrepreneurship
12%

Electrical Papers
32%
Electrical Elective
16%

Electronics related
32%

Credit Point distribution among different subjects in 6th Semester:

Professional Practice
8%
Electrical Viva
8%

Application of
Electrical
Project Engineering
13% 37%

Electrical Workshop
4%
Electrical Elective
17% Management
13%

.
Comparison of Lecture hours per week between WBSCTE proposed curriculum structure
and AICTE curriculum structure:

Lecture hrs per week

WBSCTE AICTE
Semester III 17 16
Semester IV 17 15
Semester V 16 14
Semester VI 14 15

Chart Title
20
19
18
17
16 16 16 16
15 15 15 Lecture hrs per week
14 14 14 WBSCTE
13
12 Lecture hrs per week
11 AICTE
10
III IV V VI

Semester Semester Semester Semester

.

Practical hrs per week

WBSCTE AICTE
Semester III 15 15
Semester IV 16 16
Semester V 16 13
Semester VI 18 17

19
18
17
16
15
14 Practical hrs per week
WBSCTE
13
Practical hrs per week
12
AICTE
11
10
III IV V VI

Semester Semester Semester Semester

.
Comparison of total theoretical and Practical marks between WBSCTE proposed curriculum
structure and AICTE curriculum structure

Total Marks
Theoretical
WBSCTE AICTE
Semester III 500 500
Semester IV 500 500
Semester V 500 500
Semester VI 400 500

600

500

400

300 Total Marks

200 Theoretical WBSCTE
Total Marks
100
Theoretical AICTE
0
III IV V VI

Semester Semester Semester Semester

.

Total Marks Practical

WBSCTE AICTE
Semester III 325 350
Semester IV 375 350
Semester V 400 275
Semester VI 400 325

450
400
350
300
250
200 Total Marks Practical
WBSCTE
150
Total Marks Practical
100
AICTE
50
0
III IV V VI

Semester Semester Semester Semester

.
Comparison of total marks between WBSCTE proposed curriculum structure and AICTE
curriculum structure

Total Marks
WBSCTE AICTE
Semester III 825 850
Semester IV 875 850
Semester V 900 775
Semester VI 800 825

920
900
880
860
840
820
800
Total Marks WBSCTE
780
Total Marks AICTE
760
740
720
700
III IV V VI

Semester Semester Semester Semester

.

Distribution of contact hours for the proposed syllabus:

Full Working Day:

1st 2nd 3rd Recess 4th 5th 6th
Period Period Period Period Period Period
10:30 11: 30 12:30 13:30 13:50 14:50 15:50
— — — — — — —
11:30 12:30 13:30 13:50 14:50 15:50 1650

Saturday:
1st 2nd 3rd
Period Period Period
10:30 11:30 12:30
— — —
11:30 12:30 13:30

Weekly contact hours = 33

Note:
• 1 contact hours per week for all semester has been kept aside for library studies / for interaction with
teachers off the class except in 4th Semester.
Some salient points of the new syllabus:

1. New subjects introduced:

(a) Elements of Mechanical l Engineering (semester III)
(b) Computer aided Electrical Drawing (semester IV)
(c) Power Electronics and Drives (semester V) – concept of chopper, converter, inverter introduced for the first time in
Polytechnics.
(d) Elective I : (semester V) “ Illumination Engineering”, “Heating Ventilation and Air conditioning”, “Energy Conservation
& Audit”, “Electric Traction”
(e) Industrial Project & Entrepreneurship Development (semester V) – Entrepreneurship newly introduced.
(f) Elective II: (semester VI) “Industrial Automation”, “Control of Electrical Machine”.
(g) Electrical Workshop II (semester VI)
(h) Development of Life skill - II (semester IV)
(i) Professional Practice I, II, III,IV ( semester III, IV, V, VI)

2. Some subjects whose syllabus was reviewed and reorganized to a good extent:
(a) “Basic Electronics” (semester III) and “Applied & Digital Electronics” (semester IV).
(b) “Electrical Measuring Instrument” (semester III)
(c) “Electrical Measurement & Control” (semester IV)
(d) “Power Plant Engineering” (semester IV)
(e) “Utilization, Traction , Heating and drives” (semester V)

3. Other subjects had otherwise some minor changes incorporated to overcome limitations of
previous syllabus e.g.
(a) “Electrical Circuit & Network” (semester III)- Coupled circuit and Fourier Series removed, while Pspice included (in
laboratory)
(b) “Electrical Machine I” (semester III) – Concept of braking in DC motor introduced.
(c) “Programming in C” (semester III) - reduced in size, only conceptual stage kept. Pointer, Structure and file handling
omitted.
(d) “Electrical Machine II” (semester IV) - Linear Induction motor and Induction generator included.
(e) “Switchgear & protection” (semester V) – concept of neutral earthing introduced.
(f) “Electrical Design Estimation & Costing” (semester VI) – Costing (as per schedule), concept of contract and tender
introduced. Dimension calculation of DC motor, Induction motor removed, Design of both small single phase and
medium size three phase transformer introduced.
(g) Project in semester V: students need to submit project proposal. Actual project to be done in semester VI.
(h) “Microprocessor & Microcontroller” (semester V): Microcontroller Basics, 8051 interrupts, timer/counters,
Application of microcontroller introduced in the theory paper.

4. Some subjects omitted completely:

(i) Environmental Engineering
(ii) Communication skill: This has been included in 1st year curriculum.
(iii) Electrical Engineering Materials.

5. New Concepts:
(i) Professional Practices in all semester. This will enhance technical knowledge of the budding engineers as
well as generate techno commercial knowledge among them. They will regularly visit market places /
industries etc. for such purpose. Guest lecture / seminars will need to be arranged. Also students will
participate in group discussion where they will learn to express themselves. Keeping in mind the well
spread out of polytechnics in various corners of the state, a wide array of alternative activities have been
suggested.

(ii) Concept of Grand viva changed. Now all faculty members will sit and judge students instead of only
external as it was in previous curriculum.
 (iii) Entrepreneurship: In order to give a thrust to entrepreneurship, this was conceived. Students need to
submit proposal for any entrepreneurship in their area. They can get knowledge from district industries
center for such project report.

Members of the Syllabus Committee for Diploma in Electrical Engineering

Sl No. Name of The Member Designation & Address Contact No.
1. Shri Swarup Kar Lecturer in Electrical Engineering, 9433689007 Convenor
North Calcutta Polytechnic, Kolkata
2. Dr. Sujoy Paul Lecturer in Electrical Engineering, 9432298909 Member
North Calcutta Polytechnic, Kolkata
3. Shri Arup Kr. Ghosh Lecturer in Electrical Engineering, 9434083905 Member
Bankura Government Polytechnic,
Kalpathar, Bankura
4. Shri Pinaki Ranjan Paul Lecturer in Electrical Engineering, 9433130215 Member
Central Calcutta Polytechnic, Kolkata
5. Dr. Tushar Kanti Ganguly Lecturer in Electrical Engineering, 9433377354 Member
Engineering Institute of Jr. Executive,
M.B. Road, Dalalpukur, Howrah
6. Dr. (Smt.) U.Kar Professor & Head, Curriculum 9831566357 Advisor
Development Centre, NITTTR,
Kolkata – 700 106
7. Prof. Nirmal Kumar Deb Professor, Department of Electrical 9830075137 Advisor
Engineering, Jadavpur University,
Kolkata
8. Prof. Debashis Ghosh Professor, Department of Electrical 9433205434 Advisor
Engineering, Bengal Engineering &
Science University, Shibpur, Howrah.
9. Shri Sanjoy Kr. Dey Manager, Siemens Ltd. , Sector V, 9051044110 Advisor
Salt Lake City, Kolkata - 91
10. Shri Chandra Shekhar Assistant Vice – President, 9748055866 Advisor
Chakraborty ABB, Kolkata
 W.B.S.C.T.E.
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR DIPLOMA COURSES
COURSE NAME: ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
COURSE CODE : EE
DURATION OF COURSE : 6 SEMESTER
SEMESTER: THIRD SEMESTER SCHEME : C

Sr.No. SUBJECT PERIODS EVALUATION SCHEME

Credits
SESSIONSAL EXAM PR
THEORY L T P ESE PR(I (EX
TA CT Total T.)
NT.)
1 Electrical Circuit & 03 01 02 10 20 30 70 25 25 5
Network
Electrical Machine I
2 03 __ 03 10 20 30 70 25 50 5

3 Basic Electronics 03 -- 02 10 20 30 70 25 25 4

Programming concept
4 02 -- 02 5 10 15 35 3
using C

5 Electrical Measuring 03 -- 02 10 20 30 70 25 25 4
Instrument
6 Electrical Workshop I -- -- 02 -- -- -- -- 25 25 1

Elements of Mechanical
7 02 5 10 15 35 2
Engineering

8 Professional Practices I -- -- 02 -- -- -- -- 50 1

Total 16 01 15 50 100 150 350 175 150 25

STUDENT CONTACT HOURS PER WEEK: 32

THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH

ABBREVIATIONS: CT- Class Test, TA - Teachers Assessment, L - Lecture, T - Tutorial, PR (INT.) – Practical (Internal)
PR(EXT.)- Practical(External), ESE - End Semester Exam.

TA: Attendance & surprise quizzes = 6 marks. Assignment & group discussion = 4 marks.
Total Marks : 825
Minimum passing for sessional marks is 40%, and for theory subject 40%.
.
 W.B.S.C.T.E.
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR DIPLOMA COURSES
COURSE NAME: ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
COURSE CODE : EE
DURATION OF COURSE : 6 SEMESTERS
SEMESTER: FOURTH SEMESTER SCHEME : C

Sr.No. SUBJECT PERIODS EVALUATION SCHEME

PR Credits
SESSIONSAL EXAM
THEORY L T P ESE PR(I (EX
TA CT Total
T.)
NT.)
Electrical Machine II
1 03 03 10 20 30 70 25 50 5
Electrical Measurement &
2 Control 03 -- 02 10 20 30 70 25 25 4

3 Transmission & 03 _ 02 10 20 30 70 25 25 4
Distribution of Power
Applied and Digital
4 03 -- 02 10 20 30 70 25 25 4
Electronics
5 Power Plant Engineering 04 -- 10 20 30 70 4

Computer aided Electrical

6 -- 03 -- -- -- -- 25 25 2
Drawing

7. Development of Life Skill - 01 -- 02 25 25 2

II

8. Professional Practice - II 02 50 1

Total 17 16 50 100 150 350 200 175 26

STUDENT CONTACT HOURS PER WEEK: 33 HRS

THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH

ABBREVIATIONS: CT- Class Test, TA - Teachers Assessment, L - Lecture, T - Tutorial, PR (INT.) – Practical (Internal)
PR(EXT.)- Practical(External), ESE - End Semester Exam.

TA: Attendance & surprise quizzes = 6 marks. Assignment & group discussion = 4 marks.
Total Marks : 875
Minimum passing for sessional marks is 40%, and for theory subject 40%.
 W.B.S.C.T.E.
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR DIPLOMA COURSES
COURSE NAME: ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
COURSE CODE : EE
DURATION OF COURSE : 6 SEMESTERS
SEMESTER: FIFTH SEMESTER SCHEME : C
Sr.No SUBJECT PERIODS EVALUATION SCHEME
PR Credits
SESSIONSAL EXAM
THEORY PR(I (EX
TA CT Total T.)
L T P ESE NT.)

Power Electronics and

1 Drives 03 02 10 20 30 70 25 25 4

2 Microprocessor & 03 -- 02 10 20 30 70 25 25 4
Microcontroller
Switchgear & Protection
3 03 02 10 20 30 70 25 50 4

4 Industrial Project & 01 -- 03 25 50 3

Entrepreneurship
Development
Utilization, Traction ,
5 03 02 10 20 30 70 25 25 4
Heating and drives

6 Elective I (Any One) 03 -- 02 10 20 30 70 25 25 4

Illumination Engineering
Heating , Ventilation and
Air conditioning
Energy Conservation &
Audit
Electric Traction

Professional Practice -III

7 03 50 2

Total 16 16 50 100 150 350 200 200 25

STUDENT CONTACT HOURS PER WEEK: 32 HRS

THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH

ABBREVIATIONS: CT- Class Test, TA - Teachers Assessment, L - Lecture, T - Tutorial, PR (INT.) – Practical (Internal)
PR(EXT.)- Practical(External), ESE - End Semester Exam.

TA: Attendance & surprise quizzes = 6 marks. Assignment & group discussion = 4 marks.
Total Marks : 900
Minimum passing for sessional marks is 40%, and for theory subject 40%.
 W.B.S.C.T.E.
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR DIPLOMA COURSES
COURSE NAME: ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
COURSE CODE : EE
DURATION OF COURSE : 6 SEMESTERS
SEMESTER: SIXTH SEMESTER SCHEME : C
Sr.No SUBJECT PERIODS EVALUATION SCHEME
PR Credits
SESSIONSAL EXAM
PR(I (EX Credits
TA CT Total T.)
THEORY L T P ESE NT.)
Electrical Design Credits
1 Estimation & Costing 04 03 10 20 30 70 25 25 5
Electrical Installation ,
2 04 10 20 30 70 4
Maintenance , Testing

3 Industrial Project 05 50 50 3
4. Electrical Workshop II 03 25 25 1

5. Industrial Management 03 10 20 30 70 3

6. Elective II (Any One) 03 -- 03 10 20 30 70 25 25 4

Industrial Automation

Process Control &

Instrumentation

Control of Electrical
Machine

Computer Hardware &

Networking

6 Professional Practice -IV 04 50 2

7 General Viva voce 100 2
Total 14 18 40 80 120 280 275 125 24
STUDENT CONTACT HOURS PER WEEK: 32 HRS
THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH

ABBREVIATIONS: CT- Class Test, TA - Teachers Assessment, L - Lecture, T - Tutorial, PR (INT.) – Practical (Internal)
PR(EXT.)- Practical(External), ESE - End Semester Exam.

TA: Attendance & surprise quizzes = 6 marks. Assignment & group discussion = 4 marks.
Total Marks : 800
Minimum passing for sessional marks is 40%, and for theory subject 40%.
 W.B.S.C.T.E.
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR DIPLOMA COURSES
COURSE NAME: ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
COURSE CODE : EE
DURATION OF COURSE : 6 SEMESTER
SEMESTER: THIRD SEMESTER SCHEME : C

Sr.No. SUBJECT PERIODS EVALUATION SCHEME

Credits
SESSIONSAL EXAM PR
THEORY L T P ESE PR(I (EX
TA CT Total T.)
NT.)
1 Electrical Circuit & 03 01 02 10 20 30 70 25 25 5
Network
Electrical Machine I
2 03 __ 03 10 20 30 70 25 50 5

3 Basic Electronics 03 -- 02 10 20 30 70 25 25 4

Programming concept
4 02 -- 02 5 10 15 35 3
using C

5 Electrical Measuring 03 -- 02 10 20 30 70 25 25 4
Instrument
6 Electrical Workshop I -- -- 02 -- -- -- -- 25 25 1

Elements of Mechanical
7 02 5 10 15 35 2
Engineering

8 Professional Practices I -- -- 02 -- -- -- -- 50 1

Total 16 01 15 50 100 150 350 175 150 25

STUDENT CONTACT HOURS PER WEEK: 32

THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH

ABBREVIATIONS: CT- Class Test, TA - Teachers Assessment, L - Lecture, T - Tutorial, PR (INT.) – Practical (Internal)
PR(EXT.)- Practical(External), ESE - End Semester Exam.

TA: Attendance & surprise quizzes = 6 marks. Assignment & Group Discussion = 4 marks.
Total Marks : 825
Minimum passing for sessional marks is 40%, and for theory subject 40%.
.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Subject: Electrical Circuit & Network

Course Code: EE/S3/CTN Semester: Third

Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks: 150

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 3 hrs./week Mid Semester Exam.: 20 Marks
Tutorial: 1 hrs./week Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks
Practical: 2 hrs./week End Semester Exam.: 70 Marks
Practical : 50 Marks
Credit: 5 (Five)
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. This subject finds utility in understanding the concepts in other electrical subjects such as Electrical
Power System, Electrical Measurement and Instrumentation, & Electrical Machines etc.
Objective:
Sl. No. The students will be able to:
1. Define the basic elements; electric circuit terminology; energy sources used in electrical circuit and
also AC waveform and its various quantities.
2. Interpret the response of R,L,C elements to AC supply.
3. Calculate various parameters of AC Circuits.
4. Analyze dc and ac circuits using Mesh and Node methods
5. Use Network Theorems for solutions of DC Networks
6. Interpret Transient Response
7. Use of Laplace Transform
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Series and parallel resistances, parallel & series cells
Contents (Theory) Hrs./Unit Marks
Unit: 1 Review of Basic Concepts of Electrical Circuit: 04 05
1.1 Electrical Circuit Elements R, L, C
1.2 Voltage and Current Source.
1.3 A.C. waveform and definition of various terms
associated with it.
1.4 Voltage and current response and impedance
diagram of pure R, L, and C to AC supply.
1.5 Phasor representation of alternating quantity.
Unit: 2 Single phase AC circuits & Resonance: 10+5(T) 15
2.0 Study of J operator.
2.1 Concept of complex impedance – Rectangular &
polar form.
2.2 Series AC circuits R-L, R-C, R-L-C circuits. : Impedance,
Reactance, Phasor diagram, Impedance Triangle, Power
Factor, Active power, Apparent power, Reactive power,
 Power triangle, complex power (Numerical).
2.3 Parallel AC circuits R-L, R-C and R-L-C circuits :
Admittance, Susceptance, solution by admittance
method, phasor diagram and complex Algebra method.
(Numerical)
2.4 Series resonance – Effects of varying inductance and
capacitance in series RLC circuit – Selectivity- ‘Q’ factor-
Resonance frequency – Bandwidth – Half power
frequencies (numerical).
2.5 Parallel resonance – Two branch parallel circuits, Q
factor- Resonance frequency-bandwidth (numerical)
2.6 Comparison of series and parallel resonance.
Unit: 3 Principles of circuit Analysis (AC and DC circuits): 06 +2(T) 10
3.1 Mesh Analysis (Numerical)
3.2 Node analysis with voltage & current source.
(Numerical)
Unit: 4 Network Theorems( Statement, procedure, areas of 08 + 2(T) 10
applications and limitations)
4.1 Source conversion/ideal voltage and current source
4.2 Superposition Theorem
4.3 Thevenin’s Theorem
4.4 Norton’s Theorem
4.5 Maximum Power Transfer Theorem (Numerical of all
theorems)
Unit: 5 Transient Analysis: 08 +2(T) 10
5.1 Introduction
5.2 Simple R-L Circuit supplied from a DC voltage source
5.3 Simple R-C circuit supplied from a DC voltage source.
5.4 Time Constant. (Numerical)
Unit 6 Laplace Transform: 08 +3(T) 10
6.1 Definition & Properties.
6.2 Laplace Transform of Unit Step, Impulse, Ramp,
Exponential, Sine, Cosine Function.
6.3 Initial value and Final Value Theorem.
6.4 Applications of Laplace Transformations for solving
differential equations describing simple electrical
circuits (Numerical)
Unit 7 Two port network : 04 + 2(T) 10
Open circuit Impedance and Short circuit Admittance
parameters, Transmission parameters and their Inter-
relations.(Simple Numerical)
Total 48 70
+16(T)
Contents (Practical)
Sl. No. Skills to be developed
1. Intellectual Skills: i) Interpret results
ii) Calculate values of various components for given circuits.
ii) Select Instruments
2. Motor Skills: i) Connect the instruments properly.
 ii) Take accurate readings.
iii) Draw phasor diagram and graphs.

List of Laboratory Experiments: (At least Eight experiments are to be performed)

Sl. No. Laboratory Experiments
1. To verify Kirchoff’s Current Law and Kirchoff’s Voltage Law.
2. To measure inductance of a choke using an external resistance in series with choke and by drawing
relevant phasor diagram. Verify the result with LCR meter and calculate Q factor.
3. To measure the current , voltage across each element of R-L-C series circuit and draw the phasor
diagram to calculate p.f.
4. To measure the current , voltage across each element of R-L-C parallel circuit and draw the
phasor diagram to calculate p.f.
5. To verify conditions for Series and Parallel Resonance.
6. To verify following network theorems applicable to D.C. circuit.
i) Superposition Theorem
ii) Thevenin’s Theorem
7. To verify following network theorems applicable to D.C. circuit.
i) Norton’s Theorem
ii) Maximum Power Transfer Theorem
8. To study the basics of PSpice and know the important commands.
9. To calculate network parameters of a simple d.c. circuit using Pspice.
10. To simulate the d.c. transient response of R-L circuit using PSpice.
Text Books

Sl No. Name of Authors Titles of the Book Name of Publisher

1. Mahmood Nahvi & Joseph Schaum’s outlines Electric McGrawhill Education (India)Pvt. Ltd.
A Edminister circuits

2. D Roy Choudhury Networks and Systems Wiley Eastern Limited

3. A.Chakraborty Circuit Theory (Analysis and Dhanpat Rai & Co.

Synthesis)

4. S.P. Eugene Xavier Electric Circuit Analysis New Age International Publishers

5. S P Ghosh & A K Network Analysis & Synthesis T.M.H. Education Pvt. Ltd.
Chakraborty

6. K.S. Syresh Kumar Electric Circuit and Networks Pearson Education

7. Ravish R Singh Network Analysis & Synthesis T.M.H. Education Pvt. Ltd.

8. Muhammad H. Rashid Introduction to Pspice using PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.

OrCad

9. P. Ramesh Babu Electric Circuit Analysis Scitech Publication (India) Ltd.

10. M.S. Sukhija, T.K. Nagsarkar Circuits and Network Oxford University Press
 E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORITICAL)
GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL

SET ANSWERE PER MARK SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS
D QUESTION S

A 1, 2, 3 11 FOUR FIVE, TAKING AT

LEAST TWO
B 4,5,6,7 12 TWENTY ONE 1 X 20 FIVE FROM EACH TEN 10 X 5
= 20 GROUP = 50

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been allotted in
each unit and set the paper accordingly so that all units get the importance as allotted.

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)
1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the Third
Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job – 15, Notebook – 10.
2. External Assessment of 25 marks shall be held at the end of the Third Semester on the entire syllabus. One
Experiment per student from any one of the above is to be performed. Experiment is to be set by lottery system.
Distribution of marks: On spot job – 15, Viva-voce – 10.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the course : Electrical Machine – I

Course Code : EE/S3/EMI Semester : Third

Duration : One Semester Maximum Marks : 175

Teaching scheme : Examination scheme :

Theory: 3 Hrs./ Week Mid Semester Exam: 20 Marks

Practical: 3 Hrs./ Week Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks

End Semester Exam: 70 Marks

Practical: 75 Marks

Credit: 5 (Five)

Aim:

Sl. No.

1. Students will be able to analyze the performance of DC motors and Transformers both
qualitatively and quantitatively.

2. These machines are used in different aspects in electrical power systems. So knowledge
gained by the students will be helpful in the study of different technological subjects related
with electrical machines & other electrical subjects.

3. The knowledge and skills achieved from this subject will be helpful in discharging duties in
industry and as R&D technician.

Objective:

Sl. No. Student will be able to:

1. Describe the constructional details & working principles of DC machines & Transformers.

2. Test DC machines & Transformers.

3. Evaluate the performance of DC machines & Transformers by conducting different tests.

4. Decide the suitability of DC machines & Transformers for particular purpose.

5. Write specifications of DC machines & Transformers as required.

6. Operate DC machines & Transformers as per requirement.

Pre-Requisite:

Sl. No.
 1. Basic electrical engineering.

2. Basic electronics engineering.

Contents (Theory): Hrs./Unit Marks

Unit : 1 1. GENERAL INTRODUCTION OF ROTATING MACHINE 02 04

Mechanism of Electro-Mechanical energy conversion for

generator & motor mode.

Unit : 2 2. D.C. Generator: 10 12

2.1 Working principles, Construction & Types of dc generator.

2.2 Function of Interpole & Compensating winding.

2.3 Armature winding types – Concept of Lap & Wave winding.

2.4 E.m.f equation, Methods of building up of e.m.f, Significance

of Critical resistance and Critical speed (Numerical).

2.5 Concept of flux distribution in DC machine.

2.6 Armature reaction in DC machine (Concept only).

2.7 Commutation method, Concept of reactance voltage.

2.8 Applications of different types of D.C. generator.

Unit : 3 3. D.C. Motor: 10 12

3.1 Working principles, Back e.m.f., Speed and Torque equation.

(Numerical)

3.2 Characteristics of Series, Shunt & Compound motors.

3.3 Methods of speed control of DC motors. (Numerical)

3.4 Starting methods of DC motor – 3-point & 4-point starter.

3.5 Losses and Efficiency (Numerical).

3.6 Braking methods of DC motor – Regenerative braking,

Counter current braking, Dynamic braking.

3.7 Applications of different types of DC motor.

Unit : 4 4. Single phase Transformer: 17 30

4.1 Principle of operation.

4.2 E.m.f. equation, Transformation ratio, KVA rating.

(Numerical)

4.3 Types of transformer, Core construction & different parts of

 transformer and their function.

4.4 Concept of ideal transformer.

4.5 Different types of cooling methods (in brief).

4.6 Performance under no-load condition with phasor diagram.

(Numerical)

4.7 Performance under load condition with phasor diagram.

(Numerical)

4.8 Equivalent circuit. (Numerical)

4.9 Per unit representation of impedance.

4.10 Voltage Regulation at upf, lagging pf & leading pf.

(Numerical)

4.11 Polarity test of transformer.

4.12 O.C. and S.C. tests – Estimation of losses & Equivalent

circuit parameters. (Numerical)

4.13 Losses, Efficiency, Maximum efficiency, All-day efficiency.

(Numerical)

4.14 Parallel operation of single phase transformers. (Numerical)

4.15 Tap-changing methods, Tap changers – Off load & On-load

type.

4.16 Principles of single-phase Auto transformer – step-up &

step-down, Comparison of weight, copper loss with 2-winding
transformer. (Numerical)

4.17 Applications of 2-winding transformer & Auto transformer.

Unit : 5 5. Three phase Transformer: 09 12

5.1 Types of three phase transformer.

5.2 Construction of 3-phase transformer – Core & different types

of Winding.

5.3 Connections of 3-phase transformer – Vector grouping

(classification & necessity).

5.4 Concept of Tertiary winding and its utility.

5.5 Three-phase Auto transformer – working principle,

connection diagram, Step-up & Step-down autotransformer.
(Numerical)

5.6 Comparison of Autotransformer with two-winding

 transformer, practical application of autotransformer.

5.7 Scott-connected transformer – working principle, connection

diagram, practical application.

5.8 Open delta connection – working principle, connection

diagram, practical application.

5.9 Applications of 3-phase transformer.

Total 48 70

Practical:

Skills to be developed:

Intellectual skills:

1. Analytical skills.

2. Identification skills.

Motor skills:

1. Measurement (of parameters) skills.

2. Connection (of machine terminals) skills.

List of Practical: (At least Eight experiments are to be performed)

1. To plot the O.C.C. of a D.C. generator & find the critical resistance.

2. To find the performance of a D.C. Series motor by conducting load test & draw the load
characteristics.

3. To find the performance of a D.C. shunt motor by conducting load test & draw the load characteristics.

4. To compute the efficiency of a D.C. motor by Swinburn’s test.

5. To control the speed of D.C. shunt motor above & below normal speed & draw the speed
characteristics.

6. To determine equivalent circuit parameters of single-phase transformer by performing O.C. test and
S.C. test.

7. To determine the regulation & efficiency of single-phase transformer by direct loading method.

8. To operate two single-phase transformers in parallel & find out the load sharing between them.

9. To perform heat run test of a single-phase transformer.

10. To compute the efficiency of a single-phase transformer by Back-to-Back test.

Text books:

Sl No. Titles of Book Name of Author Name of Publisher

1. Electrical Machines S.K.Bhattacharya T.M.H Publishing Co. Ltd.

2. Electrical Machinery Dr. S.K.Sen Khanna Publisher

3. Electrical Machines Nagrath & Kothari T.M.Hill

4. Electrical Machines Ashfaq Husain Dhanpat Rai & Co.

5. Electrical Machines J.B.Gupta S.K.Kataria & Sons.

6. Principles of Electrical P.C.Sen Wiley India

Machines and Power
Electronics

7. Electrical Machines-I K.Krishna Reddy Scitech Publication (India) Pvt.

Ltd.

8. Electrical Technology- Vol-II B.L.Thereja S.Chand

9. Principles of Electrical V.K.Mehta, Rohit Mehta S. Chand

Machines

10. Electrical Machinery P.S.Bhimbra Khanna Publisher

11. Electrical Machines M.N.Bandyopadhyay P.H.I. Pvt. Ltd.

12. Fundamentals of Electrical B.R.Gupta & V.Singhal New Age Publisher

Machines

13. Electrical Technology H.Cotton C.B.S. Publisher New Delhi

14. Electrical Machines Smarajit Ghosh Pearson

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORITICAL)
GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL

SET ANSWERE PER MARK SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS
D QUESTION S

A 1, 2, 3 09 FOUR FIVE, TAKING AT

LEAST TWO
B 4,5 13 TWENTY ONE 1 X 20 SIX FROM EACH TEN 10 X 5
= 20 GROUP = 50

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been allotted in
each unit and set the paper accordingly so that all units get the importance as allotted.
 E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)
1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the Third
Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job – 15, Notebook – 10.
2. External Assessment of 50 marks shall be held at the end of the Third Semester on the entire syllabus. One
Experiment per student from any one of the above is to be performed. Experiment is to be set by lottery system.
Distribution of marks: On spot job – 35, Viva-voce – 15.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the course : Basic Electronics

Course Code : EE/S3/BE Semester : Third

Duration : One Semester Maximum Marks : 150

Teaching scheme : Examination scheme :

Theory: 3 Hrs./ Week Mid Semester Exam: 20 Marks

Practical: 2 Hrs./ Week Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks

End Semester Exam: 70 Marks

Practical: 50 Marks

Credit: 4(Four)

Aim:

Sl. No.

1. This subject is the base of all advance electronics. It starts with semiconductor physics
and P-N junction which makes the student to follow the functioning of all semiconductor
based devices.

2. Understanding of the subject will provide skill to the students for trouble shooting & testing
of some basic electronic components and circuits.

Objective:

Sl. No. Student will be able to:

1. Describe the formation of P-N junction.

2. Draw the characteristics of basic components like diode, transistor etc.

3. Draw & describe the basic circuits of rectifier, filter, regulator & amplifier.

4. Test diode and transistors.

5. Read the data sheets of diode and transistors.

Pre-Requisite:

1. Knowledge of physics and P-N junction.

 Contents (Theory): Hrs./Unit Marks

Unit : 1 1. Diode: 10 14

1.1 Semiconductor Diode:

1.1.1 Fundamentals of semiconductor – Energy bands

(conduction & valence), Intrinsic & Extrinsic
semiconductor, Concept of P-N junction, Diffusion,
Barrier potential, Depletion region, Junction
capacitance.

1.1.2 Forward & Reverse biasing of P-N junction, Diode

symbol, Circuit diagram for characteristics of diode
(Forward & Reverse), Characteristics of diode.

1.1.3 Diode specifications – Forward voltage drop, reverse

saturation current, maximum forward current, power
dissipation, package view of diodes of different power
ratings.

1.2 Zener Diode:

1.2.1 Construction, Symbol, Circuit diagram for

characteristics of zener diode (Forward & Reverse),
Zener & Avalanche Breakdown.

1.2.2 Zener diode specifications – zener voltage, power

dissipation, break over current, dynamic resistance &
maximum reverse current.

1.3 Other Diodes:

Shottky diode, Photo diode – operating principles &

applications of each only.

Unit : 2 2. Rectifiers & Filters: 07 10

2.1 Need of rectifier, Types of rectifier - Half wave & full

wave rectifier (Bridge & Centre tapped).

2.2 Circuit operation of the rectifiers, Input & output

waveforms for voltage & current, Average value of
voltage & current (expression only), Ripple, Ripple
factor, Ripple frequency, form factor, PIV of diode
used, Rectifier efficiency.

2.3 Need of filters, Types of filter – a) Series inductor, b)

Shunt capacitor, c) LC filter, d) π filter.

2.4 Circuit operation of the filters, limitations &

advantages.
Unit : 3 3. Transistors: 10 14

3.1 Bipolar Junction Transistor (BJT):

3.1.1 Symbol of NPN & PNP types, Construction, Different

types of package, Operation of NPN and PNP
transistor – current flow, relation between different
currents.

3.1.2 Transistor amplifying action –

Transistor configurations – CB, CE, CC, circuit

diagram for input & output characteristics of each
configuration, Input & output characteristics.

Comparison between three configurations.

3.1.3 Transistor parameters – input & output resistance, α,

β and relation between them.

3.1.4 Transistor specification – VCE Sat, IC Max, VCEO, ICEO,

VCE Breakdown, α, β, Power dissipation.

3.2 Field effect transistor (JFET):

Symbol, Construction of JFET, Working principle and
V-I characteristics of JFET, pinch-off voltage, drain
résistance, transconductance, amplification factor and
their relationship.

3.3 Unijunction transistor (UJT):

Symbol, Construction, Working principle and
characteristics of UJT, Equivalent circuit, UJT as
relaxation oscillator, Applications.

Unit : 4 4. Biasing of BJT: 06 10

4.1 Need of biasing, concept of DC load line, selection of

Q point and stabilization.

4.2 Types of biasing circuits (concept only) –

a) Fixed biased circuit,

b) Base biased with emitter feedback,

c) Base biased with collector feedback,

d) Voltage divider biasing,

e) Emitter biased.

Unit : 5 5. Regulated Power Supply: 06 08

 5.1 Need of regulation, voltage regulation factor.

5.2 Concept of load regulation & line regulation.

5.3 Zener diode voltage regulator.

5.4 Linear regulators –

5.4.1 Basic block diagram of DC power supply.

5.4.2 Shunt and series regulator using transistor – circuit

diagram and operation.

5.4.3 Regulator IC’s- IC78xx, IC79xx, IC723 – their Pin

configuration, operation and practical applications.

Unit : 6 6. Small Signal Amplifiers: 09 14

6.1 Small signal amplifier using BJT.

6.2 Determination of current, Voltage & Power gain, phase

shift between input and output, Input and Output

resistance, Graphical analysis of amplification.

6.3 AC load line.

6.4 Function of input & output coupling capacitors, emitter

bypass capacitor.

6.5 Single stage CE amplifier with voltage divider bias –

operation with circuit diagram.

6.6 Frequency response of Single stage CE amplifier,

Bandwidth and its significance.

6.7 Need of Cascade (multistage) amplifiers, Gain of

amplifier.

6.8 Types of amplifier coupling – RC, Transformer & Direct

coupling.

Total 48 70

Practical:

Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:

1. Identification & selection of components.

2. Interpretation of circuits.

3. Understand working of basic instruments.

Motor Skills:

1. Ability to draw the circuit diagrams.

2. Ability to measure various parameters.

3. Ability to test the components using multimeter.

4. Follow standard test procedures.

List of Practicals: (No.1&2 and At least Six experiments are to be performed from the rest)

1. Identification & Checking methods of the following basic components – Resistor, Potentiometer,
Capacitor (polarised, Non-polarised), Choke coil, Diode, Zener diode, Transistor (NPN & PNP),
Thyristor, Diac, Triac, UJT, IGBT, MOSFET, JFET, OPAMP(IC741), IC78XX, IC79XX.

2. To be familiar with the following basic instruments: —

Digital Multimeter, Oscilloscope, Power supply (single / dual channel), Function generator, LCR
Meter.

3. To plot the forward & reverse characteristics of P-N junction diode.

4. To construct half-wave & full-wave rectifier circuit & draw input, output waveforms.

5. To Plot the characteristics of Zener diode.

6. To study the Zener diode as voltage regulator & calculate load regulation.

7. To plot the characteristics of FET.

8. To plot the characteristics of UJT.

9. To plot the input & output characteristics of a BJT in CE or CB mode.

10. To construct a single stage CE amplifier circuit on a bread board to find out the gain and observe

the input and output waveforms.

11. To construct a single stage CE amplifier circuit on a bread board to find out the gain at different
frequency and plot Gain vs. Frequency characteristics and also find out the Bandwidth.

12. To construct a ±12V power supply on bread board and observe the output waveform by CRO with
and without filter circuit. Also observe the output voltage using IC regulator 78XX & 79XX.
List of Text Books:

Sl. No. Title of the Books Name of Author Name of Publisher

1. Electronic Principles Albert Malvino & D.J.Bates T.M.Hill

2. Basic Electronics S.K.Mandal T.M.Hill

3. Electronic Devices & Circuits A.K.Maini, V.Agarwal Wiley India

4. Electronic Devices & Circuits S.Salivahanan, N.Suresh T.M.Hill

Kumar

5. Electronic Circuits & Systems Y.N.Bapat T.M.Hill

6. Electronic Devices & Circuits David J.Bell P.H.I. Pvt. Ltd.

7. Basic Electronics for S.Chowdhury Dhanpat Rai & Co.

Polytechnics

8. Electronics Engineering J.B.Gupta S.K.Kataria & Sons

9. Electronic Devices & Circuits P.John Paul New Age International

10. Electronic Devices & Circuits Chereku & Krishna Pearson Education

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORITICAL)
GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL

SET ANSWERE PER MARK SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS
D QUESTION S

A 1, 2, 3 12 FOUR FIVE, TAKING AT

LEAST TWO
B 4,5,6 11 TWENTY ONE 1 X 20 FIVE FROM EACH TEN 10 X 5
= 20 GROUP = 50

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been allotted in
each unit and set the paper accordingly so that all units get the importance as allotted.
 E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)
1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the Third
Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job – 15, Notebook – 10.
2. External Assessment of 25 marks shall be held at the end of the Third Semester on the entire syllabus. One
Experiment per student from any one of the above is to be performed. Experiment is to be set by lottery system.
Distribution of marks: On spot job – 15, Viva-voce – 10.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Course: Programming concept using C

Course Code: EE/S3/C Semester: Third
Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks: 50
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 2 hrs./week Mid Semester Exam.: 10 Marks
Practical: 2 hrs./week Assignment & Quiz: 05 Marks
End Semester Exam.: 35 Marks
Practical : Nil
Credit: 3 (Three)
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. Programming concept finds utility in understanding the subjects such as Microprocessor,
Microcontroller, PLC etc. It will also become helpful to understand various application Software
such as Matlab, Pspice etc.
Objective:
Sl. No. The students will be able to:
1. Define program and programming
2. understand compiler, interpreter, linker and loader function.
3. Understand algorithm and different ways of stating algorithms.
4. Understand the basic structure of a program in C
5. Explain data types, variables, constants, operators etc.
6. Understand the input and output streams that exist in C to carry out the input output task.
7. Illustrate decision type control construct and looping type control constructs in C.
8. Describe one dimensional array.
9. Understand what a function is and how its use benefits a program
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Basic units of computer system

Contents (Theory) Hrs./Unit Marks

Unit: 1 Introduction to Programming: Algorithms and 05 8
Flowcharts
1.1 Programs and Programming
1.2 Programming Languages
1.3 Compiler, Interpreter, Assembler, Loader, and Linker
1.4 Fourth Generation Languages
1.5 Structured Programming Concept
1.6 Algorithm – Features and its applications
1.7 Flow Chart – Features and its applications
Unit: 2 Overview of C Programming 02 3
2.1 Introduction of C Language
2.2 Basic Structure of C
2.3 Working steps of C compilation – Source Code-
 Object Code – Executable object code.
Unit: 3 Types, Operator & Expression 05 5
3.1 Introduction (Grammars/Syntax Rules)
3.2 Character Sets, Keywords, Identifiers, Constants,
Variables
3.3 Data types and sizes
3.4 Different operators & expressions
3.5 Type conversions.
Unit: 4 Managing Input & Output Operations 02 3
4.1 Some input as well as output functions : scanf(),
printf(), getchar(), putchar(),getch(),getche(), gets(),
puts().
Unit: 5 Control Flow (Decision Making) 06 6
5.1 Introduction
5.2 if…else, switch----case statement
5.3 Looping : for, while and do…..while statements
5.4 break, continue and goto statements.
5.5 Simple Program
Unit 6 Arrays 06 5
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Declaration and initialization of Array
6.3 Accessing of array elements and other allowed
operations.
6.4 Simple program with a one dimensional array
Unit 7 User defined Function 06 5
7.1 The concepts of user defined functions.
7.2 Using functions : i) Function Declaration, ii) Function
Definition, iii) Function Call
7.3 Simple program
Total 32 35
Contents (Practical)
Sl. No. Skills to be developed
1. Intellectual Skills: i) Improvement of Logical thinking capability
ii) Improvement of analytical thinking capability

2. Motor Skills: i) Operate various parts of computer properly.

ii) Problem solving skills.
iii) Draw Flow charts
List of Laboratory Experiments:
Sl. No.
Write algorithm, Draw Flow chart, and Write programming codes in C on following topics
1. To find the sum and identify the greater number between any two numbers.
2. To interchange the numeric values of two variables.
3. Take three sides of a triangle as input and check whether the triangle can be drawn or not. If
possible, classify the triangle as equilateral, isosceles, or scalene
4. To test whether the given character is vowel or not using “if…else” and “switch….case”
5. To find sum of the digits of an integer .
6. To find the roots of a quadratic equation.
 7. To check whether an input number is palindrome or not.
8. To find the G.C.D and L.C.M of two numbers.
9. To find the factorial of given number.
10. To find the sum of n natural numbers.
11 To accept 10 numbers and make the average of the numbers
12 To accept 10 elements and sort them in ascending or descending order.
13. To find the summation of three numbers using function.
14 To find the maximum between two numbers using function
Text Books

Sl No. Name of Authors Titles of the Book Name of Publisher

1. Pradip Dey and Manas Computer Fundamental and Oxford Higher Education
Ghosh Programming in C

2. T . Jeyapoovan A first course in Programming Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.

with C

3. K R Venugopal and S R Mastering C T.M.H. Publishing Company Ltd.

Prasad

4. Reema Theraja Introduction to C Programming Oxford University Press.

5. E. Balaguruswamy Programming in ANSI C T.M.H. Publishing Company Ltd.

6. Byron Gottfried Schaum’s Outlines Programming T.M.H.

with C

7. Ashok N. Kamthane Programming in C Pearson

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been allotted in
each unit and set the paper accordingly so that all units get the importance as allotted.

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORY)
GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL

SET ANSWERED PER MARK SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS
QUESTI S
ON

A 1, 2, 3 5 FOUR FIVE, TAKING AT

LEAST TWO
B 4,5,6,7 7 TEN ONE 1 X 10 FIVE FROM EACH FIVE 5X5=
= 10 GROUP 25
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Course: Electrical Measuring Instruments

Course Code: EE/S3/EMI Semester: THIRD
Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks: 150
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 3 hrs./week Mid Semester Exam.: 20 Marks
Tutorial: Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks
Practical: 2 hrs./week End Semester Exam.: 70 Marks
Practical : 50 Marks
Credit: 4 (Four)
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. This subject finds utility in understanding the concepts in other electrical subjects such as
Electrical Power System, Electrical Circuit Theory & Electrical Machines etc.
2. The Diploma holder has to work as Technical supervisor, maintenance engineer, production
engineer in industries, electrical power generation, transmission and distribution system,
traction installation system, machine operation etc.

3. For above job responsibilities he has to take the measurements of various electrical
quantities power & energy for testing, monitoring, maintenance, and controlling the process.
In addition to this he must know the calibration techniques and extension of meter ranges.
Therefore Electrical Measurement skills are very important. Accuracy of measurement is
one of the main parameters in industrial processes as ability of control depends upon ability
to measure.

Objective:
Sl. The students will be able to:
No.
1. Identify the measuring instruments used for measuring electrical quantities.
2. Classify measuring instruments based on construction, principle of operation and quantity to

be measured, types of errors.

3. Select appropriate measuring instrument with range for measurement of various electrical

quantities.

4. Calibrate various types of instruments as per IS..

Pre-Requisite:
Sl.
No.
1. Knowledge of current, voltage & power and their measurements.
Contents (Theory) Hrs./Unit Marks
Unit: 1 Name of the Topic :Fundamentals of Measurement 6 8
 1.1 Purpose of measurement and significance of
measurement.
1.2 Definition & brief explanations of:
Range, sensitivity, true & indicated value, Errors (including limiting
errors), Resolutions, Accuracy, Precision and instrument efficiency.

1.3 Classification of instruments:

Absolute and secondary instruments, Analog (electro-

mechanical and electronic) and digital instruments, secondary
Instruments - Indicating, integrating & recording instruments.

1.4 Basic Requirements for measurements:

Deflection torque and methods of production.

Controlling torque and controlling system (Spring Control &

Gravity control system)

Damping torque & different methods of damping

Balancing of moving parts.

[No mathematical deductions – only the final expression (if any)

to be mentioned]

Unit: 2 Name of the Topic: Measurement of Current and Voltage 7 10

2.1 Construction and principle of PMMC, MI &
Dynamometer type Instrument.

2.2 Production of torque :methods.

2.3 Principles of Voltage and Current measurement.
2.4 Different Methods of range extension of Ammeter and
Voltmeter & related problems.

2.6 Calibration of Ammeter and Voltmeter.

Unit: 3 Name of the Topic: Measurement of Electrical Power 9 15

3.1 Concept of power in A.C. Circuit

3.2 Principle and Construction of dynamometer type wattmeter.

3.3 Errors and their compensation.

3.4 Multiplying factor of wattmeter.

3.5 Measurements of power in 3 phase circuit for balanced

and unbalanced load by one wattmeter method, two wattmeter
method - problems

3.6 Effect of power factor variation on wattmeter readings in

two wattmeter method -problems

3.7 Measurement of reactive power in three phase balance

load by one wattmeter method and two wattmeter method.
 3.8 Digital Wattmeter : Construction, Principle of Operation

Unit: 4 Name of the Topic :Measurement of Electrical Energy 7 10

4.1 Concept of electrical energy.

4.2 Constructional feature & principle of working of single

phase and three-phase induction type energy meter.

4.3 Different types of errors and their compensation.

4.4 Calibration and Testing of energy meter.

4.5 Electronic energy meter : Basic circuit diagram and

principle of operation

4.6 Phantom loading |

Unit: 5 Name of the Topic : Measurement of Circuit Parameters 10 15

5.1 Classification of Resistance, Low, Medium and High.

5.2 Methods of Measurements of Low, Medium and High.

Resistance by Kelvin Double bridge, Wheatstone bridge and
Megger respectively--problems

5.3 Measurement of Earth resistance- Earth tester (Analog &

Digital)
5.4 Measurement of Inductance:---Maxwell’s inductance bridge
-- problems
5.5 Measurement of capacitance: Schering Bridge - Problems
Unit: 6 Name of the Topic : Constructional features and working 9 12
principles of other Instruments/Meters
6.1 Single phase and three phase Power Factor Meter( only
dynamometer type).

6.2 Digital Multimeter: Working principle with Block diagram.

6.3 Sychronoscope.
6.4 Clip-on-mmeter.
6.5 Instrument Transformers: Introduction and utility of using
Instrument transformers (in the light of measurement and
protection purposes)

6.6 CT
(i) CT used in HV installations- Multicore-secondary C.T (ii)
Reduction of errors (Mention the various methods briefly).
Accuracy class, Burden on CT, Specifications, Precautions in
the use of CT

6.7 PT or VT
Working principle, Errors (concept only), Accuracy class,
Burdens, Specifications, Precautions.

Total 48 70
Text Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Name of the Publisher
A.K. Sawhney Electric & Electronic Measurement Dhanpat Rai & Sons

and Instrumentation

Golding, Electrical Measurement & Wheeler

Widdies
measuring Instrument

N.V.Suryanaryan Electrical Measurement & S. Chand & Co.

measuring Instrument.
J.B. Gupta Electrical & Electronic S. K. Kataria Publication
Measurements
S.K.Singh Industrial Instrumentation & Tata McGraw Hill

Control
David A.Bell Electronic Instrumentation and OXFORD Higher Education
Measurements

P.Purkait, B. Electrical and Electronics Tata McGraw Hill

Biswas, S, Das, C. Measurements and
Koley Instrumentation

Reddy Electrical Measurement Scitech Publication (India) Ltd.

Contents (Practical)
Sl. Skills to be developed
No.
1. Intellectual Skills:
1. Identification of instruments
2. Selection of instruments and equipment for measurement
2. Motor Skills:
1. Accuracy in measurement
2. Making proper connections
Suggested list of Laboratory Experiments:
Sl. List of Practical:
No.
1. a) To measure Resistance, Voltage, Current, in A.C & D. C. Circuit using digital multimeter.

b) To measure A.C. Current by Clip-on ammeter.

2. To measure Low resistance by Kelvin’s Double Bridge.

3. To measure active and reactive power in three phase balanced load by two wattmeter

method and observe the effect of Power Factor variation on Wattmeter reading.

4. To calibrate single phase Energy meter using resistive and inductive loads.
5. To measure energy of three phase balanced load using Electronic Energy Meter.
 6. To measure an inductance by Maxwell’s bridge.
7. To measure an unknown capacitance by Schering Bridge.
8. To measure power factor of single phase and three phase load by PF meter and verify the
same through I, V and P measurement.
9. To measure current & voltages by low range ammeter & voltmeter respectively using CT
and PT.

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORITICAL)
GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL

SET ANSWERE PER MARK SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS
D QUESTION S

A 1, 2, 3 12 FOUR TWO

B 4,5,6 11 TWENTY ONE 1 X 20 FIVE THREE TEN 10 X 5

= 20 = 50

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been allotted in
each unit and set the paper accordingly so that all units get the importance as allotted.

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)
1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the Third
Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job – 15, Notebook – 10.
2. External Assessment of 25 marks shall be held at the end of the Third Semester on the entire syllabus. One
Experiment per student from any one of the above is to be performed. Experiment is to be set by lottery system.
Distribution of marks: On spot job – 15, Viva-voce – 10.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Course: Electrical Workshop

Course Code: EE/S3/WS Semester: THIRD

Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks: 50

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: Practical : 50
Marks
Tutorial:
Practical: 2 hrs./week
Credit: 1 (One)
Aim:
Sl.
No.
1. A technician should also have the practical skills regarding wiring, in order to provide
him/her the various ways, techniques of fault finding while working on the shop floor. These
skills will be developed when he/she actually performs the work.
Objective:
Sl.
No.
1. Identify various electrical accessories.
2. Draw & understand the wiring diagrams
3. Prepare schedule of material
4. Use methods of wiring
Pre-Requisite:
Sl.
No.
1. Studies of different types of wires, switches, circuits.
2. Protection for safety of electrical wiring installation as per I.S.
3. Protection against electric shock, thermal effect, over-current, over-voltage, under-voltage
and against a measure of isolation and switching of electrical circuits.

Contents (Practical)
Suggested list of Practicals/Exercises:
1. To study MCB, ELCB and RCCB and to know their applications.
2. To Mount and wire up the main board by batten/conduit wiring and connect Energy Meter,
MCB, ELCB, RCCB etc. as per IE rule.
3. To Study the constructional features and windings of different types of D.C. Machines.
4. To demonstrate the D.C. motor starters (3 pt. & 4 pt.starter).
5. To dismantle and assemble of a ceiling-fan/Table fan and study the specifications of major
components.
6. To test a battery for its charged and discharged condition and to make connections for
charging and obtain its capacity.
7. To demonstrate the connection of fire-alarm along with cable, sensors and symbolic display
(do’s and don’ts) and maintenance.
8. To measure insulation resistance using Megger.
9. To measure earth resistance using Earth Taster.
 EXAMINATION SCHEME
1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 50 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the Third
Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job – 15, Notebook – 10.
2. External Assessment of 25 marks shall be held at the end of the Third Semester on the entire syllabus. One
Experiment per student from any one of the above is to be performed. Experiment is to be set by lottery system.
Distribution of marks: On spot job – 15, Viva-voce – 10.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Course: Elements of Mechanical Engineering

Course Code: EE/S3/EMCE Semester: Third

Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks:

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 2 hrs/week Mid Semester Exam.: 10 Marks
Tutorial: Assignment & Quiz: 05 Marks
Practical: End Semester Exam.: 35 Marks
Credit: 2 (Two)
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. Diploma in Electrical Engineering passes outs, work as Maintenance Engineers in industry. They
have to look after maintenance of Mechanical Machines also. For completing these tasks they
need knowledge of Mechanical Machinery related to maintenance

Objective:
Sl. No.
1. • Supervise routine maintenance of Machinery such as Boilers, Turbines, Pumps, Steam

Turbines etc.
2. • Identify faults, mal functioning of machines and equipment
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Studies of applied mechanics & Engineering Drawing.
Contents (Theory) Hrs./Unit Marks
Unit: 1 Thermodynamics, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 08 8

1.1 Laws of Thermodynamics.

1.2 Comparison between Heat Engine, Heat Pump and
Refrigeration.
1.3 Definition of refrigeration, ton of refrigeration, COP,
enthalpy, entropy.
1.4 Vapour Compression System (Basic concept).
1.5 Vapour absorption system (Basic concept).
1.6 Comparison of Vapour Compression and Vapour
absorption system.
1.7 Working principle of Domestic Refrigerator.
1.8 Air Conditioning System & factors affecting the
human comfort.
1.9 Classification of Air conditioner and comparison
between Window Air Conditioning system and split
type air conditioning system.
1.10 Working principle of Room Air conditioner.
Unit: 2 Boilers, Steam Turbines, Steam Engines: 08 08

1.1 Layout of modern Steam Power Plant.

1.2 Definition and classification of Boiler and their
applications.
1.3 Working principle of Fire Tube (Cochran), water Tube
(Babcock & Willcox Boiler) and Modern High Pressure
Boiler.

1.4 Definition and classification of Steam Turbine.

1.5 Working Principle of impulse and reaction Turbine.

1.6 Major troubleshooting and remedial measures for

boiler & turbine.

Unit: 3 I.C. Engines: 05 7

2.1 Definition & classification.

2.2 Main parts of an I.C. Engine & their functions
2.2 Working Principle of 2 stroke & 4 stroke Petrol &
Diesel Engine, their differences and applications.
2.3 Major troubleshooting & remedial measures for I.C.
Engines.
Unit: 4 Air Compressors: 05 5

3.1 Definition, Classification & application of Air

Compressor.
3.2 Construction & Working Principle of Single stage
reciprocating Compressor.
3.3 Working Principle of centrifugal and Screw
Compressor.
3.4 Major troubleshooting & remedial measures for Air
Compressor.
Unit : 5 Hydrostatics & Pumps: 06 7
4.1 Atmospheric pr. , Absolute pr. & Gauge pressure.
4.2 Determination of pressure at a point, pressure
measuring instrument.
4.3 Classification of Pumps and their applications.
4.4 Working principle of Single acting & Double acting
Reciprocating pump.
4.5 Working principle of Centrifugal Pump.
4.6 Reason for malfunctioning & remedial measures for
Pumps.
Total 32 35
 Text Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
P.L. Ballaney A Course in Thermal Engineering Khanna Publishers
R. S. Khurmi A test book of Thermal Engineering S. Chand & Co. Ltd.
R. K. Rajput Thermal Engineering Laxmi Publication, New

Delhi
Patel, Karmchandani Heat Engine Vol. I & II Achrya publication

P.K. Nag Engineering Thermodynamics Tata McGraw Hill

P.Selvaraj, Basic Civil and Mechanical Engineering Scitech Publications (India)

M.Periyasamy,S.Selva Pvt Ltd.
kumar
T.J.Prabhu, Basic Mechanical Engineering Scitech Publications (India)
V.Jaiganesh Pvt Ltd.

EXAMINATION SCHEME
GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL

SET ANSWERED PER MARK SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS
QUESTI S
ON

A 1, 2 6 FOUR FIVE, TAKING AT

LEAST TWO
B 3,4,5 6 TEN ONE 1 X 10 FIVE FROM EACH FIVE 5X5=
= 10 GROUP 25

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been allotted in each unit and set the paper
accordingly so that all units get the required as allotted.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Course: Professional Practices I

Course Code: Semester: Third

EE/S3/PF1
Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks: 50
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: Mid Semester Exam.: Marks
Tutorial: Assignment & Quiz: Marks
Practical: 2 hrs / week End Semester Exam.: Marks
Practical : 50 Marks
Credit: 1 (One)
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. Most of the diploma holders join industries. Due to globalization and competition in the
industrial and service sectors the selection for the job is based on campus interviews or
competitive tests.

2. While selecting candidates a normal practice adopted is to see general confidence, ability
to communicate and attitude, in addition to basic technological concepts.

3 The purpose of introducing professional practices is to provide opportunity to students

to undergo activities which will enable them to develop confidence. Industrial visits,
expert lectures, seminars on technical topics and group discussion are planned in a
semester so that there will be increased participation of students in learning process.

Objective:
Sl. No. The student will be able to
1. Acquire information from different sources
2. Prepare notes for given topic
3. Present given topic in a seminar
4 Interact with peers to share thoughts
5 Prepare a report on industrial visit, expert lecture
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Desire to gain comparable knowledge and skills of various activities in various areas of
importance.

2. Eagerness to cohesively participate in group work and to share thoughts with group
members.
 3. Knowledge of basic electrical engineering.

Activities
Sr . No. Activities Hours
1. Industrial / Field Visit : 10
Structured Field visits be arranged and report of the same should be
submitted by the individual student, to form part of the term work.

Visits to any ONE from the list below:

i) Nearby Petrol Pump.(fuel, oil, product specifications)

ii)Automobile Service Station (Observation of Components /

aggregates)

iii) Telephone Exchange

iv) Food Processing industry (Lay out and machine)
v) Tea processing industry (Lay out and machine)
vi) Dairy Plant / Water Treatment Plant (Lay out and machine)
vii) Community health Centre (organization, modus-operandi, various
activities)
viii) Panchayet/ BDO office to understand swarojkar yojona / gram
sarak yojona scheme / Rural electrification and Report on a particular/
specific case.
2. Guest Lecture by professional / industrial expert: 6
Lectures by Professional / Industrial Expert to be organized from any
THREE of the following areas:

i) Free and open source software

ii) Software for drafting

iii) Non destructive testing

iv) Acoustics

v) Illumination / Lighting system.

vi)Common electricity rules & norms(do's and don'ts) for all

vii) Automobile pollution, norms of pollution control

viii) Fire Fighting / Safety Precautions and First aids.

 ix) Public health & Hygiene awareness.

x) Working around trucks - loading and unloading of engineering

machineries.

xi) Industrial hygiene.

xii) Special purpose wiring in chemical / hazardous industries.

xiii) Safe application of electrical energy in daily life.

xiv) Energy and environment

xv) Carbon Trading.

xvi) Topics related to Social Awareness such as - Traffic Control

System, Career opportunities, Communication in Industry, Yoga
Meditation, Aids awareness and health awareness.

Individual report of the above lecture should be submitted by the

students

3. Group Discussion: 10
The students should discuss in a group of six to eight students. Each
group to perform any TWO group discussions. Topics and time
duration of the group discussion to be decided by concerned teacher.
Concerned teacher may modulate the discussion so as to make the
discussion a fruitful one. At the end of each discussion each group will
write a brief report on the topic as discussed in the group discussion.
Some of the suggested areas are -

i) Sports

ii) Social networking - effects & utilities

iii) Current news item

iv) Discipline and house keeping

v) Use of plastic carry bag (social & domestic Hazard)

vi) Any other common topic related to electrical field as directed by

concerned teacher.
4. Students' Activities: 6
The students in a group of 3 to 4 will perform ANY ONE of the
following activities:

i) Collect and study IS code for Engineering Drawing.

ii) Specifications of Lubricants.

iii)Draw orthographic projections of a given simple machine element

using CAD software

EXAMINATION SCHEME (SESSIONAL)

1. Continuous internal assessment of 50 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the
third semester. Distribution of marks: Activities =20, Group Discussion = 10, field visit = 10,

guest
guest lecture attendance and report = 10
 W.B.S.C.T.E.
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR DIPLOMA COURSES
COURSE NAME: ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
COURSE CODE : EE
DURATION OF COURSE : 6 SEMESTERS
SEMESTER: FOURTH SEMESTER SCHEME : C

Sr.No. SUBJECT PERIODS EVALUATION SCHEME

PR Credits
SESSIONSAL EXAM
THEORY L T P ESE PR(I (EX
TA CT Total
T.)
NT.)
Electrical Machine II
1 03 03 10 20 30 70 25 50 5
Electrical Measurement &
2 Control 03 -- 02 10 20 30 70 25 25 4

3 Transmission & 03 _ 02 10 20 30 70 25 25 4
Distribution of Power
Applied and Digital
4 03 -- 02 10 20 30 70 25 25 4
Electronics
5 Power Plant Engineering 04 -- 10 20 30 70 4

Computer aided Electrical

6 -- 03 -- -- -- -- 25 25 2
Drawing

7. Development of Life Skill - 01 -- 02 25 25 2

II

8. Professional Practice - II 02 50 1

Total 17 16 50 100 150 350 200 175 26

STUDENT CONTACT HOURS PER WEEK: 33 HRS

THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH

ABBREVIATIONS: CT- Class Test, TA - Teachers Assessment, L - Lecture, T - Tutorial, PR (INT.) – Practical (Internal)
PR(EXT.)- Practical(External), ESE - End Semester Exam.

TA: Attendance & surprise quizzes = 6 marks. Assignment & group discussion = 4 marks.
Total Marks : 875
Minimum passing for sessional marks is 40%, and for theory subject 40%.

Page 1 of 31
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Subject : Electrical Machine – II

Course Code : EE/S4/EM II Semester : Fourth

Duration : One Semester Maximum Marks : 175
Teaching scheme : Examination scheme :
Theory: 3 Hrs./ Week Mid Semester Exam: 20 Marks
Practical: 3 Hrs./ Week Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks
End Semester Exam: 70 Marks
Practical: 75 Marks
Credit: 05

Aim:
Sl. No.
1. Students will be able to analyze the performance of 3-phase and single phase A.C motors
and 3-phase Alternators both qualitatively and quantitatively.
2. These machines are used widely in various Industries and Power plants. So knowledge
gained by the students will be helpful in their job in industry and power plants.

Objective:
Sl. No. Student will be able to:
1. Interpret the constructional details & working principles of A.C motors & generators.
2. Test A.C motors & generators.
3. Evaluate the performance of A.C machines by conducting different tests.
4. Decide the suitability of AC machines for particular purpose.
5. Write specifications of A.C motor & generators as required.
6. Operate AC motor & generators as per requirement.

Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Three phase & single phase A.C fundamentals, Electromagnetism.
2. Basic electronics engineering.

Contents (Theory): Hrs./Unit Marks

Unit : 1 1. Three-Phase Induction Motor: 14 24

1.1 Construction of 3-phase induction motor.
1.2 Production of rotating magnetic field.
1.3 Working principle of 3-phase induction motor.
1.4 Concept of Synchronous Speed & Slip.
1.5 Equation of rotor induced emf, current, frequency, reactance &
impedance under standstill and running condition. (Numerical)
1.6 Vector diagram (at no-load & running condition).
1.7 Concept of Equivalent circuit (at no-load, at blocked rotor and at
running condition).(No Numerical)
1.8 Derivation of Torque equation, Starting torque, Running torque,
Maximum torque and condition for maximum torque. (Numerical)
1.9 Torque- Slip characteristics, Effect of change in rotor circuit
resistance and supply voltage on Torque-Slip characteristics.
1.10 Power stages in 3-phase induction motor and their relation,
Losses, Efficiency. (Numerical)
1.11 Starting methods of 3-phase induction motor by–
a) Rotor resistance starter.
b) Direct -On-Line starter.
c) Autotransformer starter.
Page 2 of 31
 d) Star-Delta starter (Manual & Automatic).(Numerical for all
starter)
1.12 Speed control of 3-phase induction motor by –
a) Changing supply frequency.
b) Pole changing method.
c) Changing Rotor circuit resistance & stator reactance.
d) Changing supply voltage.
1.13 Braking of 3-phase induction motor by –
a) Plugging.
b) Rheostatic method.
c) Regenerative method.
1.14 Cogging & Crawling (simple idea)
1.15 Concept of Double cage rotor & Deep-bar rotor.
1.16 Motor enclosures and specification as per I.S Code.
1.17 Industrial applications of 3-phase induction motor.

Unit : 2 2. Alternator: 14 24
2.1 Construction of 3-phase alternator, Description of salient & non-
salient rotor.
2.2 Methods of excitation systems of 3-phase alternator by –
a) Static excitation.
b) Brushless excitation.
c) DC generator.
2.3 Advantages of Stationary armature and Rotating field system.
2.4 Armature winding – Single layer and multilayer, Concentrated and
Distributed (Concept only).
2.5 Derivation of E.M.F. equation of 3-phase alternator, Effect of Coil
span factor and Distribution factor on emf, Winding factor. (Numerical)
2.6 Factors affecting the terminal voltage of alternator –
a) Armature resistive drop
b) Leakage reactance drop.
c) Armature reaction at various p.f, concept of Synchronous
reactance.
2.7 Phasor diagrams of cylindrical rotor alternator at lagging, leading &
unity p.f. loads.
2.8 Voltage regulation of 3-phase alternator by – (Numerical)
a) Synchronous Impedance Method.
2.9 Open circuit characteristics, Short circuit characteristics of alternator
and determination of synchronous reactance.
2.10 Active & Reactive power equations in terms of load angle at steady
state for non-salient pole alternator.
2.11 Steady-state characteristics of Alternator –
a) Terminal voltage vs. Load current, at different p.f,
b) Field current vs. Load current at different p.f,
c) Active & Reactive Power vs. load angle (non-salient alternator).
2.12 Short circuit ratio (SCR) – concept & significance.
2.13 Method of control of Active & Reactive Power of an alternator.
2.14 Reasons & advantages of Parallel operation.
2.15 Synchronization of two or more alternators by -
a) Three lamps method.
b) Synchroscope.
2.16 Parallel operation of (i) an alternator & infinite bus and (ii) Between
two alternators & Load sharing between them.(Numerical)

Unit : 3 3. Synchronous Motor: 08 08

3.1 Construction and working principle.
3.2 Methods of starting by –
a) An auxiliary motor.
b) Damper winding.
Page 3 of 31
 3.3 Effect of variation of Load – Speed vs. Torque characteristics.
3.4 Effect of variation of excitation at infinite bus (over and under
excitation) – V curves & inverted V-curves.
3.5 Hunting, George’s phenomenon.
3.6 Applications of synchronous motor, Synchronous condenser.

Unit : 4 4. Single phase motors: 05 08

4.1 Double-revolving field theory.
4.2 Construction, Principle of operation and Applications of different
types of single-ph Induction motors –
a) Split phase (resistance) type.
b) Capacitor start type.
c) Capacitor run type.
d) Shaded pole motors.

Unit : 5 5. Special Machines: 07 06

5.1 Linear induction motor.
5.2 Induction generator.
5.3 A.C series motor.
5.4 Reluctance Motor.
Total 48 70
Practical:
Skills to be developed:

Intellectual skills:
1. Analytical skills.
2. Identification skills.

Motor skills:
1. Measurement (of parameters) skills.
2. Connection (of machine terminals) skills.

List of Practical: (At least Eight Experiments are to be performed)

1. a) To measure the slip of 3-phase induction motor by – (i) Stroboscopic method, (ii) Tachometer.
b) To reverse the direction of rotation of 3-phase induction motor.

2. To perform No-load test and Blocked-rotor test on 3-phase induction motor & draw the equivalent
circuit from the two tests.

3. To perform the load test on 3-phase induction motor and to study the performance
characteristics of the motor.

4. To control the speed of 3-phase Induction motor by– (i) Frequency changing method, (ii) Pole-
changing method.

5. To start a 3-phase Slip-ring induction motor by rotor resistance starter and determine the effect
of the rotor resistance on the torque-speed curves of an induction motor.

6. To observe the effect of excitation and speed on induced e.m.f of a 3-phase alternator and plot
the O.C.C. of the alternator.

7. To find the percentage regulation of 3-phase alternator by synchronous impedance method at

various power factor and load.

8. To synchronise two 3-phase alternator for parallel operation by - a) Three lamp method, b)
Synchroscope & to study the sharing of load between the alternators.

Page 4 of 31
 9. To list and explain various starting methods of 3-phase synchronous motor and applying any one
of them to start the synchronous motor. Plot V-curve & inverted V-curve of the same motor.

10. To study the effect of capacitor on the starting and running condition of a single-phase Induction
motor, and to determine the method of reversing the direction of rotation.

Text books:
Sl No. Titles of Book Name of Author Name of Publisher

1. Electrical Machines S.K.Bhattacharya T.M.H Publishing Co. Ltd.

2. Electrical Machinery Dr. S.K.Sen Khanna Publisher
3. Electrical Machines J.B.Gupta S.K.Kataria & Sons.
4. The performance and design M.G.Say C.B.S Publishers & Distributors
of Alternating Current
machines
5. Electrical Machinery P.S.Bhimbra Khanna Publisher
6. Electrical Technology- Vol-II B.L.Thereja S.Chand
7. Electrical Machines M.N.Bandyopadhyay P.H.I. Pvt. Ltd.
8. Electrical Machines Ashfaq Husain Dhanpat Rai & Co.
9. Principles of Electrical P.C.Sen Wiley India
Machines and Power
Electronics
10. Electrical Machines-I K.Krishna Reddy Scitech Publication (India) Pvt.
Ltd.
11. Electrical Machines Nagrath & Kothari T.M.Hill
12. Electrical Technology H.Cotton C.B.S. Publisher New Delhi
13. Electrical Machines S. Ghosh Pearson Publisher
14. Electrical Machines M.V.Deshpande PHI

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORITICAL)

GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL

SET ANSWERE PER MARK SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS
D QUESTION S

A 1, 4,5 12 FIVE FIVE, TAKING AT

LEAST TWO
B 2,3,6 11 TWENTY ONE 1 X 20 FOUR FROM EACH TEN 10 X 5
= 20 GROUP = 50

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been
allotted in each unit and set the paper accordingly so that all units get the
importance as allotted.

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)

1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the
Fourth Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job – 15, Notebook (Drawing) – 10.
2. External Assessment of 50 marks shall be held at the end of the Fourth Semester on the entire
syllabus. One Experiment per student from any one of the above is to be performed. Experiment is to be
set by lottery system. Distribution of marks: On spot job – 35, Viva-voce – 10.

Page 5 of 31
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata – 700 013.

Name of the Course: Electrical Measurement & Control

Course Code: EE/S4/EMC Semester: Fourth

Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks: 150

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 3 hrs./week Mid Semester Exam.: 20 Marks
Tutorial: hrs./week Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks
Practical: 2 hrs./week End Semester Exam.: 70 Marks
Practical : 50 Marks
Credit: 4(Four)
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. Electrical power system, Electrical machine control, Industrial process control and many other
systems such as Biomedical, environmental, defence etc. nowadays use sophisticated
instruments and their related systems for fast, accurate and reliable measurements,
operations and control.
2. Being Electrical Diploma Holders has a role of supervisor, Maintenance engineer and to
assist in carrying out testing and R & D work in electrical, Industrial, Electronics and
communication field.
3 He must understand the basics, facts, concepts and principles of various modern Instruments
and control system.
Objective:
Sl. No. The students will be able to:
1. Identify the components of Instrumentation system for processing given Input to get desired
Output.
2. Identify appropriate transducers/sensors for given application and to know how to use them.
3. Identify basic signal conditioning circuit components for Instrumentation system in Industrial
process, Electrical power system, Electrical machine operation, Measurement and control.
4. Identify the digital instruments and display devices for various applications.
5. Understand basic control system theory, stability concept
6. Understand basics of P, PI, PD system and their application in real system.
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Basic knowledge of Applied Electronics, Circuit theory, Electrical machines.

Page 6 of 31
 Contents (Theory) Hrs./Unit Marks
Unit: 1 Transducers: 15 20
1.1 Concept of Transducers
1.2 Classification of Transducers
Primary and Secondary Transducers, Electrical and Mechanical
Transducers, Analog and Digital Transducers, Active and passive
Transducers
1.3 Construction, working principle and application (with diagram &
explanation) of following transducers:
1.3.1 RTD, Thermistor, Thermocouple.
1.3.2 Potentiometer (various types)
1.3.3 strain gauge (No derivation only formula)
Types of strain gauges, Bridge circuit for strain gauge, application in load
& Torque measurement
1.3.4 Bourden tube, Bellows, Diaphragm.
1.3.5 LVDT and RVDT, measurement for displacement.
1.3.6 Capacitive transducers, Application in pressure measurement.
1.3.7 Piezoelectric transducer, load cell.
1.3.8 Contacting and non contacting tachometer, speed measurement
1.3.9 Electromagnetic and turbine flow meter.

Unit: 2 Signal conditioning: 06 10

2.1 Concept of signal conditioning.
2.2 Block diagram of AC and DC signal conditioning and working.
2.3. V to I converter, I to V converter, V to F converter.
2.4 Instrumentation Amplifier.
2.5 Filters - Types and frequency response (No derivation) and circuits.
2.6 Multiplexing – Fundamentals, different types.

Unit: 3 Digital instruments and Display Devices 07 10

3.1 Digital display devices (LED, seven segment only)
3.2 Concept of 3 ½ ,4 ½ digit.
3.3 Digital voltmeter- Integrating type, Successive approximation.
3.4 Digital frequency meter.
3.5 C.R.O. – Block diagram representation & operation, applications
(observation & measurement of voltage, current, phase difference &
frequency)
Unit: 4 Pilot Devices 05 10
4.1 Pilot Devices - Definition of pilot devices, Function of pilot devices.
List of different pilot devices.
4.2 – Construction, working and applications of:
Push Button, Limit Switch, Float Switch, Electromagnetic Relay, Pressure
switch, Thermostats plugging switch, Proximity switch.

Page 7 of 31
Unit: 5 Control System: 15 20

5.1 Introduction to control system, classification of control system,

Feedback control system
5.2 Properties of control system: idea on stability, steady state and
transient error. (no mathematical deduction)
5.3 Control system components: Synchro, D.C Servomotor, A.C. Servo
motor, A.C. Tachometer (only basic operating principle & construction
and diagram, no deduction)
5.4 Concept of transfer function, poles and zeroes, transfer function of
first & second order system (no deduction), time response characteristics
of first and second order system to unit step excitation (no deduction).
5.5 Block diagram representation of control system, Transfer function
from Block diagram reduction technique, Signal flow graph. Application of
Mason gain formula (maximum two non touching loops).
5.6 Stability concept: characteristic equation, Deciding stability from pole
zero concept, Routh criteria. (Numerical)
5.7 Control action of a system with ON/OFF, P, PI, PD, PID controller,
Practical application of these controllers (with block diagram only).

48 70
Total

Contents (Practical)

Sl. No. Skills to be developed

1. Intellectual Skills: i) Interpret results
ii) Calculate values of various components for given circuits.
ii) Select Instruments
2. Motor Skills: i) Connect the instruments properly.
ii) Take accurate readings.
iii) Draw phasor diagram and graphs.

List of Laboratory Experiments:

Sl. No. Laboratory Experiments: (At least eight experiments are to be performed)

1. To measure Linear displacement by LVDT & plot characteristics.

2. To measure displacement by Strain gauge & plot characteristics.

3. To measure temperature by pt-100, thermistor and thermocouple along with simple

resistance bridge.

4. To plot characteristics of potentiometer and observe the loading effect on output of

potentiometer.

5. To study the following signal conditioning circuits and observe and plot the output
(i) V to I Converter, (ii) I to V Converter, (iii) V to F Converter using Op-AMP 741.

6. To measure angular speed by contact type, non- contact type tachometer, Digital
Tachometer, Proximity sensor.

7. To plot frequency response of Active filters (any two):- I) Low pass filter II)High pass filter
III) Band pass filter Iv) Band stop filters.

Page 8 of 31
 8. To study the principle of operation and connection of pilot devices like – Push Button Switch,
Limit Switch, Selector switch, Pressure switch, Float switch.

9. To measure voltage, current and Phase difference and Frequency using CRO.

10. To study open loop control of any physical control system and study of closed loop control of
the same system using P, PI and PID controller.

11. To study the position control system using servomotor.

12. To study the operation of an instrumentation amplifier using OPAMP.

Text Books

Sl No. Name of Authors Titles of the Book Name of Publisher

1. A.K.Sawhney Electrical and Electronics Measurement Dhanpat Rai & Co.

and Instrumentation
2. H.S.Kalsi Electronic Instrumentation Tata McGraw Hill
3. D.Patranabis Principles of Industrial Instrumentation Tata McGraw Hill
4. A.K.Sawhney Process control & instrumentation Dhanpat Rai & Co.

5. Donald P. Eckman Industrial Instrumentation Wiley Eastern Ltd.

6. B.C.Kuo Automated Control Systems Wiley India
7. Nagrath Gopal Control System Engineering New Age International

8. R. Anandanatarajan, Control System Engineering Scitech Publication (India) ltd.

P.Ramesh Babu
9. S.K. Bhattachrya Control of Electrical Machines New Age International
Brijinder Singh
10. K.Lal Kishore Electronic Measurement and Pearson
Instrumentation
11. M.Gopal Control Systems Principles and Design McGraw Hill Education (India)
Pvt.Ltd

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORITICAL)

GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

ANSWER QUESTIONS
TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL
SET ANSWER PER MARKS SET ANSWERE PER MARKS
ED QUESTIO D QUESTION
N
A 1 7 FOUR FIVE, TAKING
TWENTY ONE 1 X 20 AT LEAST TEN 10 X 5 =
B 2,3,4 6 = 20 THRE ONE FROM 50
E EACH GROUP
C 5 7 FOUR

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been
allotted in each unit and set the paper accordingly so that all units get the
importance as allotted.

Page 9 of 31
 E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)

1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers

throughout the Fourth Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job - 15, Notebook
- 10.
2. External Assessment of 25 marks shall be held at the end of the Fourth Semester on the
entire syllabus. One Experiment per student from any one of the above is to be performed.
Experiment is to be set by lottery system. Distribution of marks: On spot job - 15, Viva-
voce - 10.

Page 10 of 31
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Subject: Transmission and Distribution of Power

Subject Code: EE/S4/TDP Semester: FOURTH

Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks: 150

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 3 Hrs./Week Mid Semester Exam.: 20 Marks
Tutorial: nil Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks
Practical: 2 Hrs./Week End Semester Exam.: 70 Marks
Credit: 04 Practical Exam.: 50 Marks
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. Electrical diploma pass outs should know systems for electrical energy transmission &
distribution. They also will be able to identify various components & their functions.
2. They will be able to measure system performance. They will be able to deal with various
aspects of transmission and distribution system at different stages including erection and
maintenance. Hence he should be well acquainted with the materials required and the
methods employed for erection and maintenance.

3. On completion the study of transmission & distribution, he/she will be

able to work as technician/supervisor in power industry, manufacturing industry & public
utilities.
Objective:
Sl. Student will be able to:
No.
1. Interpret various types of transmission & distribution systems.
2. Identify various components & Know their functions.
3. Calculate voltage regulation & efficiency of transmission system.
4. Calculate voltage drop of distribution system.
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Basic Electrical Engineering.
2. Electrical Power Generation
Contents (Theory) Hrs./Unit Marks
Unit: 1 Basics Of Transmission: 04 4
1.1 Layout of a Power System by single line concept.
1.2 Concept of Primary & Secondary transmission &
distribution.
1.3 Advantages and limitations of using high voltage for
power transmission.
1.4 Comparison between AC & DC power transmission
systems.
1.5 Kelvin’s laws for the economic choice of conductor
size – related problem.
Unit: 2 Transmission Line Components: 12 16
2.1 Main components of Overhead lines (names &
functions only).
2.2 Types of conductors-Copper, Aluminum & state
their trade names.
2.3 Solid, Stranded & bundled conductors.
Page 11 of 31
 2.4 types of supports – RCC/PCC poles, steel tower
2.5 Comparison between single circuit and double circuit
design
2.6 conception of ground wire.
2.7 Line insulators – requirements, types, and field
of
applications.
2.8 failure of insulators, creepage distance (definition &
significance only)
2.9 Distribution of potential over a string of three
suspension insulators. --- Problems.
2.10 Concept of string efficiency, Methods of
improving string efficiency. ---- Problems.
2.11 Corona – corona formation, advantages &
disadvantages, factors affecting corona, important
terms related to corona.
2.12 Calculation of Span length & sag
Calculation , effect of wind pressure, temperature and
ice deposition----- Problems.
2.13 Stringing chart and its uses.
2.14 Spacing of conductors, length of span,
Relevant I.E. Rules.
Unit: 3 Tansmission Line Parameters: 03 3
3.1 R,L & C of 1-ph & 3-ph transmission line & their
effects on line.( No deduction and Problems)
3.2 Skin effect, proximity effect & Ferranti effect.
3.3 Concept of transposition of conductors &
necessity.
Unit: 4 Underground Cables: 04 7
4.1 Classification of cables and Comparison with
overhead lines.
4.2 Cable construction.
4.3 Description of (i) PVC, (ii) PILC (iii) FRLS (Fire
Retardant Low Smoke), (iv) XLPE cables & (v) Gas
filled (SF6) cables
4.4 Cable Rating and De-rating factor.
4.5 Cable laying
Unit:5 Performance Of Transmission Line: 09 15
5.1 Classification of transmission lines.
5.2 Losses, Efficiency & Regulation of line.
5.3 Performance of single phase short transmission
line(Numerical based on it )
5.4 Effect of load power factor on performance.
Power Factor Improvement Using Static condenser and
Synchronous condenser – related problems.
5.5 Medium transmission lines-End condenser,
Nominal T & Nominal Pi Network with vector
diagram.---- no problem.
Unit:6 Extra High Voltage Transmission: 03 5
6.1 EHVAC Transmission, Reasons for adoption &
limitations.
6.2 Regional Grid System (Conception only).
6.3 Concept about FACTS and its applications.
6.4 HVDC Transmission – Advantages, Limitations.
6.5 Discussion on few HVDC system in Indian
scenario.

Page 12 of 31
Unit:7 Components of Distribution System: 08 12
7.1 Introduction.
7.2 Classification of distribution system.
7.3 A.C distribution.
7.4 Connection schemes of distribution system.
7.5 Requirements of Distribution systems.
7.6 Design consideration.
7.7 A.C. distribution calculations.
7.8 Methods of solving A.C.-1 phase & 3 Ø -phase
connection ( balanced ) distribution system.
( Numericals based on 1-ph & 3-ph balanced
distribution system)
Unit:8 Substations: 05 8
8.1 Introduction.
8.2 Classification of indoor & outdoor sub-stations.
8.3 Advantages & Disadvantages.
8.4 Selection & location of site.
8.5 Main connection schemes.
8.6 Equipments and circuit element of substations –
their symbols & function.
8.6.1 Bus bar’s material, types in detail.
8.6.2 Connection diagram and layout of sub-stations
with proper notation.

Total 48 70
Contents (Practical)
Sl. No. Skills to be developed
1. Intellectual Skills:
1.1 Identification & selection of components.
1.2 Making proper connections
2. Motor Skills:
2.1 Ability to measure various parameters.
2.2 Ability to follow standard test procedures.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS : (At least Eight Experiments are to be performed)
3.1 To demonstrate the improvement of P.f. using static condenser.
3.2 To demonstrate various system faults by D.C. network analyzer.
3.3 To study active and reactive power flow through transmission lines.
3.4 To study the supply system of 6.6 KV/400V sub-station to a housing complex using
slides/model.
3.5 To study various types of turbine used in Power station using slides/models.

3.6 To study different types of excitation system for alternator using slides/models.
3.7 To study different kinds of insulators (Insulators are required to be available in
laboratory)
3.8 To study PILC, PVC, FRLS and XLPE cables. (Cables are required to be available in
laboratory)
3.9 To measure Solar Radiation with the help of Pyranometer.
3.10 To demonstrate the photo voltaic system used in street lighting – PV module, CCU,
Battery, CFL.
3.11 To study power generation by wind power – using model / slides.

Page 13 of 31
Text Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
V. K. Mehta Principles of power system S. Chand & Company

SoniGupta-Bhatnagar A Course in electrical power Dhanpat Rai

J. B. Gupta Transmission & distribution S.K. Kataria & Sons.
of electrical energy
Nagsarkar & Sukhija Power System Analysis Oxford University Press
Tarlok Singh. Transmission & Distribution of S.K. Kataria & Sons.
Power
Dr. K.Uma Rao Power System Operation and Wiley-India
Control
A. T. Starr Generation, Transmission and Pitman
Utilization of Electric Power
C.L.Wadhwa. Electrical Power System Wiley Eastern Ltd

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORITICAL)
GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL

SET ANSWERE PER MARK SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS
D QUESTION S

A 1, 2, 3,4 12 FOUR FIVE taking at

least THREE
B 5,6,7,8 12 TWENTY ONE 1 X 20 FIVE from each TEN 10 X 5
= 20 Group = 50

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been
allotted in each unit and set the paper accordingly so that all units get the
importance as allotted.

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)
1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the
Fourth Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job – 15, Notebook – 10.
2. External Assessment of 25 marks shall be held at the end of the Fifth Semester on the entire syllabus.
One Experiment per student from any one of the above is to be performed. Experiment is to be set by
lottery system. Distribution of marks: On spot job – 15, Viva-voce – 10.

Page 14 of 31
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the course : Applied and Digital Electronics

Course Code : EE/S4/ADE Semester : Fourth

Duration : One Semester Maximum Marks : 150

Teaching scheme : Examination scheme :

Theory: 3 Hrs./ Week Mid Semester Exam: 20 Marks

Practical: 2 Hrs./ Week Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks

End Semester Exam: 70 Marks

Practical: 50 Marks

Credit: 04

Aim:

Sl. No.

1. It intends to teach the operating principles and applications of different types of Amplifiers
and Oscillators.

2. The subject also includes the Basic Digital logic circuits and their applications, D/A & A/D
converters etc.

2. Understanding of the subject will provide skill to the students for trouble shooting & testing of
some basic Amplifier circuits, Oscillator circuits and Digital logic circuits.

Objective:

Sl. No. Student will be able to:

1. Illustrate the Amplifier circuits and Oscillator circuits.

2. Describe the Digital logic circuits, Flip-flop, Counter, Register, D/A & A/D converter.

3. Test the Amplifier circuits, Oscillator circuits and Digital logic circuits.

Pre-Requisite:

1. Knowledge of Basic Electronics.

2. Knowledge of Analog & Digital Electronics.

Page 15 of 31
 Contents (Theory): Hrs./Unit Marks

Unit : 1 1. Amplifiers: 10 16

1. Power Amplifiers:

1.1.1 Classification of power amplifiers – Class-A, Class-B,

Class-AB, Class-C operation, Advantage & disadvantages of
these amplifiers.

1.1.2 a) Operation of Class-A Push-pull amplifier.

b) Operation of Class-B Push-pull amplifier.

c) Operation of Class-AB Push-pull amplifier.

1.2 FET Amplifier:

1.2.1 Biasing methods of FET.

1.2.2 Common-Source amplifier - working principle &

applications.

1.2.3 Introduction to MOSFET – Types of MOSFET,

construction, working principle and applications.

1.2.4 CMOS – construction and application.

frequency.

1.3 Operational Amplifier:

1.3.1 Basic differential amplifier circuit using BJT.

1.3.2 Pin diagram of OPAMP IC741& functions of each pin.

Definition of offset voltage, input bias current, input offset
current, differential mode gain, CMRR, slew rate

1.3.3 OPAMP as Non-inverting and Inverting amplifier, Adder,

Subtractor, Integrator, Differentiator, Unity Gain Buffer, Schmitt
Trigger, Zero Crossing Detector.

1.3.4 Instrumentation amplifier – Operating principle using

OPAMP, Applications.

Unit : 2 2. Feedback Amplifiers & Oscillators: 08 14

2.1 Theory of Positive & Negative feedback.

2.2 Types of negative feedback amplifiers –shunt-voltage,

series-voltage, shunt-current, series-current feedback.

2.3 Introduction to oscillator, Block diagram of sine wave

oscillator, requirement of oscillation, Barkhausen criterion.

2.4 Wien bridge oscillator, Colpitt oscillator – operating principle,

frequency of oscillation.

Page 16 of 31
Unit : 3 3. Boolean Algebra & Combinational Logic Circuits: 08 14

3.1 Number Systems – Decimal, Binary, Octal, Hexadecimal,

BCD number system & their inter-conversion.

3.2 Symbolic representation & Truth tables for logic gates -

NOT, OR, AND, NAND, NOR, XNOR, XOR.

3.3 Rules & laws of Boolean algebra, Demorgan’s Theorems.

3.4 Max. term & Min. term, Simplification of Boolean expression

using karnaugh map (upto 4 variable).

3.5 Realisation of Boolean expression with Logic gates.

3.6 Half adder, Full adder, Half subtractor, Full subtractor, Parity
Generator and checker, Digital comparator

3.7 Code converter, Encoder, Decoder, Multiplexer,

Demultiplexer

Unit : 4 4. Sequential Logic Circuits: 10 14

4.1 Flip-flops – RS, D, T, JK, JK Master Slave Flip Flops using

basic gates, preset and clear signals.

4.2 Counters - Asynchronous & Synchronous Counter, Mod-N

counter, Up Down Counter, Ring counter,

4.3 Registers - Shift register, Serial in Serial out, Serial in

Parallel out, Parallel in serial out, Parallel in Parallel out.

Unit : 5 5. Data Converters & Memory Devices: 12 12

5.1 D/A Converter: Basic concepts, Weighted Resistor D/A

converter, R-2R Ladder D/A converter.

5.2 A/D Converter: Successive approximation method, Dual

slope method.

5.3 Concept of - Static Memory & Dynamic Memory, SDRAM,

DDR RAM, PROM, EEROM, EPROM.

5.4 Comparison of Logic families – DTL,TTL and ECL Gates

Total 48 70

Practical:

Skills to be developed:

Intellectual Skills:

1. To locate the faults in circuits.

Page 17 of 31
2. Interpretation of circuits & corresponding waveforms.

Motor Skills:

1. Ability to draw the circuit diagrams.

2. Ability to interpret the circuits.

List of practicals:

1. Applied Electronics: (At least Three Experiments are to be performed) :

1.1 To study RC phase shift oscillator and find out frequency of oscillation.

1.2 To study Colpitt’s oscillator and find out frequency of oscillation.

1.3 To plot frequency response of FET amplifier.

1.4 To construct Adder, Subtractor, Unity gain buffer circuit using OPAMP.

2. Digital Electronics: (At least Five Experiments are to be performed)

2.1 To realize OR, AND, NOT and XOR gates using Universal gates.

2.2 To realize Half Adder / Full Adder/ Full Subtractor.

2.3 To verify the function of SR, D, JK and T Flip-flops.

2.4 To implement Encoder and Decoder circuit.

2.5 To implement Multiplexer and Demultiplexer circuit.

2.6 To construct binary Asynchronous or Synchronous counter.

2.7 To construct controlled shift register & verify SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO operation.

2.8 To demonstrate D/A converter using trainer kit.

2.9 To demonstrate A/D converter using trainer kit.

List of Text Books:

Sl. No. Name of Author Title of the Books Name of Publisher

1. Albert Malvino & D.J.Bates Electronic Principles T.M.Hill

2. Y.N.Bapat Electronic Circuits & Systems T.M.Hill

3. R.S.Sedha Applied Electronics S.Chand & Co.

4. Allen Mottershed Electronic Devices & Circuits P.H.I. Pvt. Ltd.

5. J.B.Gupta Electronics Engineering S.K.Kataria & Sons.

6. P.John Paul Electronic Devices & Circuits New Age International

Page 18 of 31
7. Chereku & Krishna Electronic Devices & Circuits Pearson Education

8. Malvino & Leach Digital Principles & Applications T.M.Hill

9. Jain Modern Digital Electronics T.M.Hill

10. V.Kumar Digital Technology New Age Publisher

11. S.P. Bali 2000 solved problems in Digital T.M.H

Electronics

12 M. Moris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design Pearson

13 Khan & Khan Digital Logic Design Scitech Publication

(India) Ltd.

14. G.K. Karate Digital Electronics Oxford University Press

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORITICAL)

GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL

SET ANSWERE PER MARK SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS
D QUESTION S

A 1, 2,3 12 FIVE FIVE, TAKING AT

LEAST TWO
B 4,5 11 TWENTY ONE 1 X 20 FOUR FROM EACH TEN 10 X 5
= 20 GROUP = 50

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been
allotted in each unit and set the paper accordingly so that all units get the
importance as allotted.

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)

1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the
Fourth Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job – 15, Notebook (Drawing) – 10.
2. External Assessment of 25 marks shall be held at the end of the Fourth Semester on the entire
syllabus. One Experiment per student from any one of the above is to be performed. Experiment is to be
set by lottery system. Distribution of marks: On spot job – 15, Viva-voce – 10.

Page 19 of 31
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Course: Computer aided Electrical Drawing

Course Code: EE/S4/ED Semester: Fourth

Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks: 50

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: Practical : 50 Marks
Tutorial:
Practical: 03 hrs/week
Credit: 02
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. Students will be able to be able to know various commands of AutoCAD.
2. Electrical Drawing indicates the symbolic representation and position of components. It
also shows the power flow through them for a given systems. Ability to draw, read and
understand the drawing will facilitate the visualization of the complete installation which
makes it easy to troubleshooting, maintenance of the system.
Objective:
Sl. No. The students will be able to,
1. Read electrical drawing for any system to understand the working of the system and its
components.
2. Find the important points in the circuit diagrams or layout for troubleshooting and
maintenance.
3. Use graphic software to draw the circuit for various types of electrical systems.
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Basic Electrical Engineering

Sl. No. Skills to be developed

1. Intellectual Skills: i) Analytical Skill
ii) Identification skill
2. Motor Skills: i) Operate various parts of computer properly.
ii) Problem solving skill.

Contents
Sl. No.
1. CAD : Necessity and its application in Engineering Field
2. Awareness of commands : Limit, zoom, pan, line, circle, polyline, multiline, arc,
text, dimension, hatch, layer, offset, trim, extend, erase, scale, dist, area, fillet, chamfer,
array, block, attribute etc.
3. To draw a sheet of a sample figure (to be provided by the subject teacher) using different
edit/modify option of CAD
4. To draw a sheet of electrical symbols for representation of Electrical machines,
Equipments, accessories, switching and protection equipment as per IS 2032 using
CAD.

Page 20 of 31
 5. To draw electrical wiring with accessories on a single storied building (3 BHK) plan,
showing Energy meter, Main switch, Distribution Board, Light points, Socket outlets using
CAD.
6. A three phase induction motor is to be started and stopped using star delta starter.
Draw i) Schematic diagram for the control circuit, ii) power circuit, iii) Complete wiring
diagram using CAD.
7. A three phase induction motor is to be started and stopped direct on line (D.O.L.) from
different locations through push buttons such that the motor can be started from one
location and stopped from other location or vice versa.
Draw i) Schematic diagram for the control circuit, ii) Complete wiring diagram (showing
overload and short circuit protection) using CAD.

Text Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
Sham Tickoo & AutoCAD Electrical 2010 for Pearson
Shafali Pandita Engineers
Goutam Pohit & Machine Drawing with Auto CAD Pearson
Goutam Ghosh
Surjit Singh Electrical Engineering Drawing S.K.Kataria & Sons
(Part I & Part II)
Onstolt AutoCad 2012 and Autocad LT Wiley India
2012
K. Venugopal, Computer aided drafting & Scitech Publication
V.Prabhu Raja modelling (India) Pvt. Ltd.

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)

1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the
Fourth Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job – 15, Notebook (Drawing) – 10.
2. External Assessment of 25 marks shall be held at the end of the Fourth Semester on the entire
syllabus. One Sheet per student from any one of the above is to be drawn. Sheet is to be set by lottery
system. Distribution of marks: On spot job – 15, Viva-voce – 10.

Page 21 of 31
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Course: Power Plant Engineering

Course Code: EE/S4/PPE Semester: Fourth

Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks:

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 4 Hrs/Week Mid Semester Exam.: 20 Marks
Tutorial: Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks
Practical: End Semester Exam.: 70 Marks
Credit: 04
Aim:
Sl.
No.
1. This is a core technology subject. The knowledge of the principle of generation of electricity,
methods of generation of electricity & recent trends in generation of electricity is essential
for Diploma Engineer.
2. This subject will provide the basis for further studies in transmission, distribution and power
system operation. Also the subject will provide the knowledge about the recent trends in
non conventional energy sources & their working principles.
Objective:
Sl. The student will be able to:
No.
1. Explain the working of different power plants
2. Identify different components of various systems in generating stations
3. Select suitable sites for different power stations
4. Define the terms used in economics of power generation and explain their relation
5. Select alternative energy sources for given conditions
6. Explain the working of wind mills and solar systems
7. Explain working of domestic & commercial D. G. Set
8. Explain working of Gas Turbine
Pre-Requisite:
Sl.
No.
1. Energy conversion
Contents Hrs./Uni Mark
t s
Unit: 1 02 3
1.1 Basics of Power Generation
1.1 Importance of electrical power in day today life
1.2 Different forms of energy
1.3 Comparison of sources of energy
1.4 Power crisis in India and Future Trend
1.5 Overview of method of electrical power
generation

Unit: 2 Thermal Power Stations 08 8

2.1 List of thermal power stations in the state with
their capacities
2.2 Selection of site for thermal power stations.
2.3 Layout and working of thermal power station

Page 22 of 31
 with block diagram.
2.4 Operation of following components:
2.4.1 Boiler
2.4.2 Economizer.
2.4.3 Air pre heater
2.4.4 Super-heaters & re-heaters.
2.4.5 Steam prime movers.
2.4.6 Condensers.
2.4.7 Spray ponds & cooling towers.
2.5 Quality of fuel and its effect on quality of power
generation.
2.6 Merits and demerits of Thermal Power Plants.
2.7 Simple Problems.
Unit: 3 Nuclear Power Stations 06 7
3.1 Selection of site for Nuclear Power plants.
3.2 Nuclear fission process
3.3 Block diagram and working of Nuclear Power
station.
3.4 Construction and working of nuclear reactor.
3. 5 Fuels used in Nuclear Power Station
3. 6 Merits and demerits of Nuclear Power Plants
3. 7 List of Nuclear power stations in state &
county with their capacities.
Unit: 4 Hydro Power Stations 06 7
4.1 Selection of site and classification of Hydro-
electric Power Plants
4.2 Layout and working of Hydro Power Station.
4.3 Types of Turbines & generators used
4.4 Pumped storage Power Plant
4.5 Merits and demerits of Hydro Power Station
4.6 List of Hydro Power stations with their
capacities & number of units in the state.
4.7 Simple Problem.
Unit: 5 Diesel Electric Power Stations 06 5
5.1 Selection of site for Diesel Electric Power
Station.
5.2 Elements of diesel Electric power plants and
their working.
5.3 Operation, maintenance & trouble shooting
chart of diesel Electric plant.
5.4 Merits, demerits and applications of diesel
electric power stations
5.5 Performance and thermal efficiency of Diesel
Electric Power Plant.
Unit :6 Gas Turbine Power Plants 03 5
6.1 Selection of site for Gas Turbine Power Station.
6.2 Fuels for gas turbine
6.3 Elements of simple gas turbine power plants
6.4 Merits, demerits and application Gas turbine
power plants.
UNIT:7 Non-Conventional Energy Sources 20 20
7.1 Types of non-conventional energy sources.
7.2 Solar Energy
7.2.1 Potential of solar energy.
7.2.2 Solar collector (Flat Plate Collector &
Concentrating Collector )
7.2.3 Comparison of performances of
Page 23 of 31
 different collectors.
7.2.4 Solar water heater.
7.2.5 Solar Thermal Power Plant - System
block diagram with description & efficiency.
7.2.6 Photovoltaic cell : Principle of
operation, Types, conversion efficiency, V-I
characteristics.
7.2.8 Solar Cell Materials.
7.2.9 Photovoltaic system of power
generation – Solar PV arrays, solar cell
connecting arrangements, storage batteries,
inverters, advantages & disadvantages.
7.2.11 Limitation of using solar energy
systems.
7.3 Wind Energy.
6.3.1 Selection of site for wind mills
6.3.2 Principle of electricity generation with
the help of wind energy
6.3.3 Block diagram and working of Wind
energy plant and its applications
6.3.4 List of major wind farms in the state
with their approximate capacities

7.4 Brief idea and application of

i) Bio Mass and bio gas energy.
ii) Geothermal Energy.

Unit: 8 Economics Of Power Generation 08 08

8.1 Terms commonly used in system operation:
connected load, firm power, cold reserve, hot
reserve, spinning reserve.
8.2 Terms used in system operation such as Load-
curve, load duration curve, integrated duration
curve. (Simple numerical based on plotting above
curves.)
8.3 Factors affecting the cost of Generation:
Average demand, Maximum demand, plant
capacity factor & plant use factor, Diversity factor&
load factor.
(Simple numericals based on above)
Unit : 9 Interconnected Power Systems 05 07
9.1 Advantages of Interconnection.
9.2 Base load & peak loads, load allocation among
various types of power stations
9.3 Load sharing and transfer of load between
power stations.
9.4 Inter connection of power stations at state and
national level
64 70
Total

Text Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
J.B.Gupta A course in Power System S.K.Kataria & Sons
Umesh Rathore Energy Management S.K.Katharia & Sons
Dr. R.KSingal Non-conventional Energy S.K.Katharia & Sons

Page 24 of 31
 Resources
Dr. S. L. Uppal Electrical Power Khanna Publishers.
Soni – Gupta - A course in Electrical Power Dhanpatrai & Sons
Bhatnagar
Prof. G. D. Rai Non conventional Energy sources Khanna, New Delhi
A.K.Raja,M. Introduction to Non conventional Scitech Publication
Energy sources
Dwibedi & (India) Pvt. Ltd.
A.P.Srivastava
Prof. Arrora and A course in Power Plant
Dr. V. M. Dhanpatrai & Sons
Domkundwar Engineering
K.K. Ramalingam Power Plant Engineering Scitech Publication
(India) Pvt. Ltd.
S P Sukhatme Solar Energy Tata Mc Grawhill
Publishing co. Ltd.
Godfrey Boyle Renewable Energy Oxford University Press
P.K.Nag Power Plant Engineering T.M.H.

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORITICAL)
GROU UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
P QUESTIONS

TO TO BE MARKS TOTA TO TO BE MARKS TOTA

BE ANSWER PER L BE ANSWER PER L
SET ED QUESTI MARK SET ED QUESTIO MARK
ON S N S

A 1, 2, 12 FIVE FIVE, TAKING

3,4,5,6 AT LEAST
TWENTY ONE 1 X 20 TWO FROM TEN 10 X 5
B 7,8,9 11 = 20 FOU EACH = 50
R GROUP

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been allotted in each unit
and set the paper accordingly so that all units get the importance as allotted.

Page 25 of 31
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Course: Development of Life Skills - II

Course Code: EE/S4/DLSII Semester: FOURTH

Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks: 50

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 01 hrs / week Internal Sessional: 25
Tutorial: External Sessional : 25
Practical: 02 hrs / week
Credit:
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. In today’s competitive world, the nature of organizations is changing at very rapid
speed. In this situation the responsibility of diploma holder is not unique. He will be a
part of a team in the organization. As such the individual skills are not sufficient to
work at his best.
2. This subject will develop the student as an effective member of the team. It will
develop the abilities and skills to perform at highest degree of quality as an individual
as well as a member of core group or team.
3. Such skills will enhance his capabilities in the field of searching, assimilating
information , managing the given task, handling people effectively ,solving challenging
problems .
Objective:
Sl. No. The students will be able to:
1. • Developing working in teams.
2. • Apply problem solving skills for a given situation.
3. • Use effective presentation techniques.
4. • Apply techniques of effective time management.
5. • Apply task management techniques for given projects.
6. • Enhance leadership traits.
7. • Resolve conflict by appropriate method.
8. • Survive self in today’s competitive world.
9. • Face interview without fear.
10. • Follow moral and ethics.
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Team Work and Presentation Skills
2. Positive attitude and thirst of learning
Contents Hrs./Unit Marks
Unit - 1 Interpersonal Relation
Importance, Interpersonal conflicts, Resolution of conflicts, Developing 5
effective interpersonal skills - communication and conversational skills,
Human Relation Skills (People Skills)

Page 26 of 31
Unit - 2 Problem Solving
I) Steps in Problem Solving (Who? What? Where? When? Why?
How? How much?)
1. Identify, understand and clarify the problem
2. Information gathering related to problem 8
3. Evaluate the evidence
4. Consider feasible options and their implications
5. Choose and implement the best alternative
6. Review
II) Problem Solving Technique
1. Trial and Error, 2. Brain Storming 3. Thinking outside the Box
Unit - 3 Presentation Skills
Concept, Purpose of effective presentations,

Components of Effective Presentations :

understanding the topic,
selecting the right information,
organising the process interestingly,
Good attractive beginning,
Summarising and concluding, 8
adding impact to the ending,

Use of audio‐visual aids - OHP, LCD projector, White board,

Non‐verbal communication :
Posture, Gestures, Eye-contact and facial expression,
Voice and Language - Volume, pitch, Inflection, Speed, Pause,
Pronunciation,
Articulation, Language
Handling questions - Respond, Answer, Check, Encourage, Return to
presentation

Evaluating the presentation - Before the presentation, During the

presentation, After the presentation

Unit - 4 Looking for a Job 5
Identifying different sources announcing Job vacancies,
Skim, scan and read advertisements in detail,
write efficacious CVs,
write covering letters to accompany CVs,
write Job Application Letters - in response to advertisements and
self-applications
Unit - 5 Job Interviews 10
Prepare for Interviews :
Intelligently anticipating possible questions and framing appropriate
answers,
Do's and don'ts of an interview (both verbal and non-verbal),
Group Discussion:
Use of Non-verbal behaviour in Group Discussion,
Appropriate use of language in group interaction,
Do's and don'ts for a successful Group Discussion
Unit - 6 Non-verbal - graphic communication 6
Non - verbal codes: A - Kinesics, B - Proxemics, C- Haptics, D - Vocalics,
Page 27 of 31
 E- Physical appearance, F- Chronemics, G - Artifacts
Aspects of Body Language

Unit - 7 Formal Written Skills: 6

Memos, E-mails, Netiquettes.
Business correspondence - Letter of enquiry, Letter of Placing Orders,
Letter of Complaint

Total 48

Sessional Activities
Sl. No. Skills to be developed
Unit - 1 Case Studies:
1. from books
Interpersonal 2. from real life situations
Relation 3. from students' experiences
Group discussions on the above and step by step write of any one or more of these in the sessional
copies
Case Studies:
1. from books
Unit - II 2. from real life situations
3. from students' experiences
Problem Group discussions on the above and step by step write of any one or more of these in the sessional
Solving copies
Unit - III Prepare a Presentation (with the help of a Powerpoint) on a Particular topic. The students may
refer to the Sessional activity (sl. No. 8) of the Computer Fundamental syllabus of Semester 1.
Presentation For engineering subject-oriented technical topics the co-operation of a subject teacher may be
sought. Attach handout of PPT in the sessional copy
Skills
Unit - IV Write an effective CV and covering letter for it.
Looking for Write a Job Application letter in reponse to an advertisement and a Self Application Letter for a job.
a job
Unit - V Write down the anticipated possible questions for personal interview (HR) along with their
Job appropriate responses
Interviews Face mock interviews. The co-operation of HR personnels of industries may be sought if possible
& Group Videos of Mock Group Discussions and Interviews may be shown
Discussions
Unit - 7 write a memo,
Formal write an effective official e-mail,
Written write a letter of enquiry, letter of placing orders, letter of complaint
Skills
Text Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
K. R.Laksminarayanan Managing Soft Skills Scitech Publications (India)
& T. Murugaval Pvt. Ltd.
Barun K. Mitra Personality Development and Soft Oxford University Press
Skills

Note : For any modification please refer www.webscte.org/syllabus.html of

“Development of Life Skill-II”

Page 28 of 31
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Subject : Professional Practices II

Course Code: EE/S4/PFII Semester: Fourth

Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks: 50

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: Mid Semester Exam.: Marks
Tutorial: Assignment & Quiz: Marks
Practical: 2 hrs / week End Semester Exam.: Marks
Practical : 50 Marks
Credit: 1
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. Most of the diploma holders join industries. Due to globalization and competition in the
industrial and service sectors the selection for the job is based on campus interviews or
competitive tests.
2. While selecting candidates a normal practice adopted is to see general confidence, ability
to communicate and attitude, in addition to basic technological concepts.
3 The purpose of introducing professional practices is to provide opportunity to students to
undergo activities which will enable them to develop confidence. Industrial visits, expert
lectures, seminars on technical topics and group discussion are planned in a semester so
that there will be increased participation of students in learning process.
Objective:
Sl. No. The student will be able to
1. Acquire information from different sources
2. Prepare notes for given topic
3. Present given topic in a seminar
4 Interact with peers to share thoughts
5 Prepare a report on industrial visit, expert lecture
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Desire to gain comparable knowledge and skills of various activities in various areas of
importance.
2. Eagerness to cohesively participate in group work and to share thoughts with group members.
3. Knowledge of electrical engineering upto 4th semester.
Activities
Sr . No. Activities Hours
1. Industrial / Field Visit : 06
Structured Field visits be arranged and report of the same should be
submitted by the individual student, to form part of the term work.
Visits to any ONE (not already visited in 3rd semester) from the list
below:

i) Electrical machine manufacturing industry

ii) Multistoried building for power distribution
Page 29 of 31
 iii) Load dispatch center
iv) Transformer repair workshop.
v) Foundry (to see furnaces and oven)
vi) Food Processing industry (overall technical and other activities)
vii) An industry automation in manufacturing
viii) District Industries Centre (to know administrative set up,
activities, various schemes etc)
ix) Any loco shed
x)Signaling system of a railway station
xi) Any captive power plant.
xii) Motor rewinding in a motor rewinding shop
2. Guest Lecture by professional / industrial expert: 4
Lectures by Professional / Industrial Expert to be organized from any
TWO of the following areas:

i) Modern concept of lighting / illumination

ii) Viability of electric traction in 21st Century
iii) Modern techniques in Power Generation
iv) Role of power factor improvement as a tool in reducing cost of
generation
v) Digital metering
vi) Hydro power generation
vii) Functioning of Electricity regulatory Commission.
viii)Introduction and application areas for MEMS (Micro
Electromechanical System)
ix) Interview techniques
x)Free and open source software
xi) Cyber crime & Cyber laws
xii)Social networking – effects & utilities
xiii) Ethical Hacking.
xiv) Role of micro, small and mediun enterprise. In Indian economy.

Individual report of the above lecture should be submitted by the

students.
3. Seminar: 12
Any one seminar on the topics suggested below:

Students (Group of 4 to 5 students) have to search / collect

information about the topic through literature survey/ internet
search / visit and discussion with expert or concerned persons

1. Water Supply scheme / Problems of drinking water in rural area

2. Schemes of power generation in coming five years
3. Impact of load shedding on rural population
4. Parallel computing
5. Distributed processing
6. Embedded system
7. Computer security
8. Bio – technology

Page 30 of 31
 9. Multimedia techniques.
10. Magnetic levitation system

4. Students’ Activities / mini project:(any one) 10

i) Collect information from market regarding technical specification,

identification no, their meaning, manufacturers' names and cost of
electronic devices like diode, zener diode, transistors, JFET, MOSFET,
ic 555, ic 741, digital ics (All items studied upto 4th semester).
Submit the report along with power point presentation. Students are
encouraged to use open software

ii) Collect information from market regarding specification and cost

of items (at least four each) used in electrical wiring for Domestic,
commercial and industrial use. They will submit individual report on
the same. Students are encouraged to use open software.

iii) make a market survey of all transducers available (studied in

fourth semester) their specifications, manufacturers' names, cost
etc. Prepare a power point presentation. Students are encouraged to
use open software for such purpose.

EXAMINATION SCHEME (SESSIONAL)

1. Continuous internal assessment of 50 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the fourth
semester. Distribution of marks: Student’s activities/mini Project = 20, seminar = 10, field visit = 10, guest
lecture attendance and report = 10

Page 31 of 31
 W.B.S.C.T.E.
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR DIPLOMA COURSES
COURSE NAME: ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
COURSE CODE : EE
DURATION OF COURSE : 6 SEMESTERS
SEMESTER: FIFTH SEMESTER SCHEME : C
Sr.No SUBJECT PERIODS EVALUATION SCHEME
PR Credits
SESSIONSAL EXAM
THEORY PR(I (EX
TA CT Total T.)
L T P ESE NT.)

Power Electronics and

1 Drives 03 02 10 20 30 70 25 25 4

2 Microprocessor & 03 -- 02 10 20 30 70 25 25 4
Microcontroller
Switchgear & Protection
3 03 02 10 20 30 70 25 50 4

4 Industrial Project & 01 -- 03 25 50 3

Entrepreneurship
Development
Utilization, Traction ,
5 03 02 10 20 30 70 25 25 4
Heating and drives
6 Elective I (Any One) 03 -- 02 10 20 30 70 25 25 4
Illumination Engineering
Heating , Ventilation and
Air conditioning
Energy Conservation &
Audit
Electric Traction

Professional Practice -III

7 03 25 25 2
Total 16 16 50 100 150 350 175 225 25

STUDENT CONTACT HOURS PER WEEK: 32 HRS

THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH

ABBREVIATIONS: CT- Class Test, TA - Teachers Assessment, L - Lecture, T - Tutorial, PR (INT.) – Practical (Internal)
PR(EXT.)- Practical(External), ESE - End Semester Exam
TA: Attendance & surprise quizzes = 6 marks. Assignment & group discussion = 4 marks.
Total Marks : 900
Minimum passing for sessional marks is 40%, and for theory subject 40%.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Subject : Power Electronics & Drives

Subject Code: EE/S5/PED Semester : Fifth
Duration : One Semester Maximum Marks : 150
Teaching scheme : Examination scheme :
Theory: 3 Hrs./ Week Mid Semester Exam: 20 Marks
Practical: 2 Hrs./ Week Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks
End Semester Exam: 70 Marks
Practical: 50 Marks
Credit: 04
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. The field of Electrical Engineering is generally segmented into three major areas –
Electronics, Power & Control.
2. This subject is the combination of these three areas. Nowadays all the industrial drives to
run a machine and to control it as per requirement are based on Power Electronics.
2. Understanding of the subject will provide skill to the students for trouble shooting & testing of
Power semiconductor devices, Solid state DC & AC motor drives.

Objective:
Sl. No. Student will be able to:
1. Describe the Power semiconductor devices & draw their characteristics.
2. Describe the Inverter, Converter & Chopper circuits.
3. Explain the operation of the DC motor & AC motor drives

Pre-Requisite:
1. Knowledge of Applied Electronics.
2. Knowledge of DC & AC Motor operation to run their drives.

Contents (Theory): Hrs./Unit Marks

Unit : 1 10 14
1. POWER SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES:
1.1 THYRISTOR (SCR)
1.1.1 Construction, operation & symbol.
1.1.2 V-I characteristics of SCR (Holding current, Latching
current, Breakover voltage).
1.1.3 Turn on methods - Voltage triggering, Gate triggering,
dv/dt triggering.
1.1.4 Turn off methods – Current reduction, AC line
commutation, Forced commutation.
1.1.5 Thyristor specifications – voltage rating, current rating,
power rating, dv/dt, di/dt, Gate current, temperature.
1.1.6 Utility of Snubber circuit , Freewheeling diode.
1.1.7 DIAC, TRIAC, SCS – Principle of operation, characteristics
& application.
1.1.8 IGBT - Principle of operation, characteristics & application.

Unit : 2 2. Switching & Timer Circuits : 10 14

2.1 Simple transistor timer using R-C as timing element.
2.2 Classification of multi-vibrators.
2.3 Study of Astable, Monostable & Bistable multivibrator
 circuits using OPAMP.
2.4 Internal block diagram, Pin diagram and operating of IC 555.
2.5 Study of Astable, Monostable & Bistable multivibrator
circuits using IC 555 timer.

Unit : 3 3. Converter and Inverter: 10 16

3.1 AC to DC Converter :
3.1.1 Single phase fully controlled Half Wave Converter
- with resistive load,
- with R-L load
3.1.2 Single phase fully controlled Full Wave Converter
- with resistive load,
- with R-L load
3.1.3 Three phase fully controlled Bridge Converter
- with RL load
3.1.4 Cycloconverter – Principle of operation of Single phase &
Three phase cycloconverter, Basic circuit diagram, Input &
Output waveforms.
3.2 Inverter :
3.2.1 Classification of Single phase & Three phase Inverter –
Line commutated & Forced commutated Inverters, Series,
Parallel, Bridge Inverter
3.2.2 Operation of basic Series Inverter.
3.2.3 Operation of basic Parallel Inverter.
3.2.4 Operation of Single phase Bridge Inverter -
a) Half Bridge Inverter
b) Full Bridge Inverter
3.2.5 Pulse Width Modulated Inverter –
a) Single pulse width Modulated Inverter.
b) Multiple pulse width Modulated Inverter.
c) Sinusoidal pulse width Modulated Inverter.

Unit : 4 4. DC Chopper: 08 12
4.1 Principles of chopper.
4.2 Classification –
a) Step-up & Step-down chopper
b) Second quadrant, Two quadrant & Four quadrant
operation.
4.3 Type-A, B, C, D chopper – Operating Principle.
4.4 Commutations methods for choppers –
Auxiliary commutation, Load commutation.
4.5 Jones chopper.

Unit : 5 5. DC & AC Drives : 10 14

5.1 Speed control of separately excited DC motor by single
phase fully controlled converter.
5.2 Speed control of separately excited DC motor with three
phase fully controlled converter.
5.3 Speed control of DC series motor with chopper control.
5.4 Speed control of DC servomotor.
5.5 Speed control of Three phase Induction motor with variable
frequency PWM VSI.
5.6 Speed control of Three phase Induction motor with variable
voltage variable frequency control.
5.7 Speed control of AC servomotor.
5.8 Static VAR compensation system - Principle of operation &
 Block diagram.
5.9 Uninterrupted power supply – Principle of operation & Block
diagram of On load & Off load type UPS.

Total 48 70

Practical:
Skills to be developed:

Intellectual Skills:
1. Ability to select appropriate devices & instruments.
2. Ability to test & troubleshoot.

Motor Skills:
1. Ability to draw the circuit diagrams.
2. Ability to interpret the circuits and waveforms.

List of Practical: (At least Eight Experiments are to be performed)

1. To fabricate an op-amp integrator, determine its amplitude, phase relation with input, duration of
output pulse compared to input for a square wave input.
2. To fabricate an op-amp differentiator, determine its amplitude, phase relation with input duration of
output pulse compared to input for a triangular input.
3. To identify the terminals of Thyristor and plot V-I characteristics of Thyristor.
4. To fabricate with IC-555 -
(a) Astable multivibrator & to determine duration of high pulse, low pulse and duty cycle.
(b) Monostable multivibrator & to determine the duration of high and low pulses triggered condition with
different R-C values.
(c) A Pulse Width Modulation circuit to observe the variation of duration of high pulse with the various
values of control voltage at control input terminal of IC-555.
5. To study fully controlled full wave rectifier using SCR.
6. To study DC chopper circuit using SCR.
7. To study series inverter using SCR.
8. To perform speed control of DC series motor using SCR.
9. To perform speed control of 3-phase Induction motor using PWM inverter. Interpret speed-torque
characteristics. Use variable voltage variable frequency drive.
10. To study the operation and circuit diagram of Uninterrupted Power Supply unit.

List of Text Books:

Sl. No. Name of Author Title of the Books Name of Publisher

1. M.D.Singh, Power Electronics T.M.Hill.

K.B.Kanchandani
2. Mohan, Undeland, Riobbins Power Electronics Wiley India
3. S.N.Singh Power Electronics Dhanpat Rai & Co.
4. V. Subrahmanyam Electric Drives – concepts & T.M.Hill
applications
5. Albert Malvino & D.J.Bates Electronic Principles T.M.Hill
6. V.R.Moorthi Power Electronics Oxford
7. G.K.Dubey Fundamentals of Electric drives Narosa Publishing House
8. M.H.Rashid Power Electronics P.H.I. Ltd
9. K.Haribabu Power Electronics Scitech Publisher
 E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORITICAL)
GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL

SET ANSWERE PER MARK SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS
D QUESTION S

A 1, 2 11 FOUR FIVE, TAKING AT

LEAST TWO
B 3,4,5 12 TWENTY ONE 1 X 20 FIVE FROM EACH TEN 10 X 5
= 20 GROUP = 50

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been allotted in
each unit and set the paper accordingly so that all units get the importance as allotted.

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)
1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the Fifth
Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job – 15, Notebook – 10.
2. External Assessment of 25 marks shall be held at the end of the Fifth Semester on the entire syllabus. One
Experiment per student from any one of the above is to be performed. Experiment is to be set by lottery system.
Distribution of marks: On spot job – 15, Viva-voce – 10.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Subject: Microprocessor and microcontroller

Subject Code : EE/S5/MPMC Semester: FIFTH

Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks: 150

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 3 Hrs/Week Mid Semester Exam.: 20 Marks
Tutorial: Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks
Practical: 2 Hrs/Week End Semester Exam.: 70 Marks
Credit: 04 Practical : 50 Marks
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. Today microprocessors and microcontrollers have become an integral part of all automatic
and semi automatic machines. Therefore there is a growing need of engineers / technicians in
this field. Hence, it is necessary to study microcontroller basics, hardware and its programming.
2. This subject covers microprocessor 8085 and microcontroller 8051 architecture, its
instruction set, programming and applications. After completing this subject the student can
write and execute programs for microcontroller and microprocessor based applications.
Objective:
Sl. No. The student will be able to
1. Describe architecture and operation of microprocessor 8085
2. Develop assembly language programs using instruction set of 8085
3. Describe architecture and operation of microcontroller 8051
4. Develop assembly language programs using instruction set of 8051
5. Design and develop microcontroller based systems
6. Explain various applications of microcontrollers
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Knowledge of digital electronics
Contents (Theory) Hrs./Unit Marks
Unit: 1 Microprocessor Basics 8 12
1.1 Generation and evolution of 4 bit microprocessor to
latest microprocessor
1.2 Basic Architecture of 8-bit Microprocessor
1.2.1 Hardware features of Intel – 8085 functional
Blocks, bus structure.
1.2.2 Arithmetic Logic Unit
1.2.3 Registers (General purpose & Special Purpose)
1.2.4 Interrupts
1.2.5 Pin description.
1.3 Timing cycles of 8085 – Machine cycle, Opcode fetch
cycle, execution cycle, instruction cycle.
Unit: 2 Microprocessor Programming 8 13
2.1 Instruction set of Intel 8085
2.2 Addressing modes
2.3 Introducing to branch and subroutine
2.4 Simple Program such as Addition, Subtraction, Multi-
byte addition, Multiplication of two numbers,
BCD to Hex conversion, Hex to BCD conversion etc.
2.5 Interrupt & Interrupt Service Routine
Unit: 3 Application of microprocessor 8 10
3.1 Review of A/D and D/A converter
3.2 Interfacing – parallel ( 8255)
3.3 Measurement of voltage, current, frequency.
3.4 Generation of square, triangular and staircase
waveform.
3.5 Over current Relay operation .
3.6 Speed control of D.C. motor
Unit : 4 Microcontroller Basics 7 10
4.1 Introduction and applications
4.2 Comparison between microcontrollers and
microprocessors
4.3 Evolution of microcontrollers
4.4 Architecture of 8051
4.4.1 Block diagram of 8051 microcontroller
4.4.2 Registers in 8051
4.4.3 General purpose or working registers
4.4.4 Stack Pointer and Program counter
4.4.5 Special function registers (SFR)
4.4.6 Program Status word
4.4.7 Data pointer (DPTR)
4.4.8 Timer resisters
4.4.9 Ports
4.4.10 Control registers
Unit: 5 8051 addressing modes and instructions 6 10
5.1 8051 addressing modes
5.2 8051 instruction set
5.5 8051 Simple Program such as Addition, Subtraction,
Multi-byte addition, Multiplication of two numbers,
BCD to Hex conversion, Hex to BCD conversion, Hex to
ASCII conversion etc.
Unit : 6 8051 interrupts, timer/counters 6 7
6.1 Interrupts in 8051
6.2 Initializing 8051 interrupts
6.3 Interrupt priorities
6.4 Timers and counters, timer counter modes
Unit: 7 Application of microcontroller 5 8
7.1 Measurement of voltage, current, frequency.
7.2 Generation of square, triangular and staircase
waveform.
7.3 Over current Relay operation .
7.4 Speed control of D.C. motor.
 Total 48 70
Text Books:
Sl. No. Name of Authors Title of the Book Name of the Publisher
1. Ramesh Gaonkar Microprocessor Architecture, Wiley Eastern Ltd.
Programming, and Applications with
the 8085
2. B. Ram Fundamentals of Microprocessor & Danpat Rai Publication
Microcontroller
3. Kenneth J Ayala, 8051 microcontrollers architecture, Penram International
Programming and Applications Publishing (I) Pvt. Ltd.
4. Nagoorkani Microprocessor & Microcontroller
T.M.Hill ,India
5. N. Senthil Kumar Microprocessors and Microcontrollers OXFORD University Press
M.Sarvanan
S.Jeevananthan
6. Subhashis Maitra Microprocessor and microcontroller J.B. Books and Learning
7. Naresh Grover Microprocessor – Comprehensive Dhanpat Rai & Co.
studies
8. Biju Azeez Microprocessor interfacing & Scitech Publication
Microcontroller
Contents (Practical)
Sl. No. Skills to be developed
1. Intellectual Skills: i) Logical development
ii) Programming skills
2.
Motor Skills: i) Data entry, Error Correction and Execution of assembly language programms
ii) Connection Skills
Suggested list of Laboratory Experiments:
Sl. No. Minimum 10 Experiments to be conducted from between Sl no. 1-17
I. 1. Introduction of 8085 Microprocessor and 8051Microcontroller Kit
2. To develop and execute the following using 8085 Microprocessor / 8051 Microcontroller (At
least Eight programs)
i) Addition, Subtraction of two numbers.
ii) Multi-byte addition.
iii) Multiplication of two numbers.
iv) Finding the maximum value in an array.
v) Arranging the given data in Ascending order.
vi) BCD to Hex conversion.
vii) Hex to BCD conversion.
viii) Hex to ASCII conversion.
ix) ASCII to Binary conversion.
x) Square Root of a given data.
xi) Least Common Multiple of two numbers.
xii) Greatest Common Divisor of two numbers.
xiii) Program using interrupt.
II. To develop, Run & Test Program for the following using 8085 Microprocessor / 8051
microcontroller: (At least Four applications)
1. Measurement of dc voltage and currents using suitable potential divider circuit and shunt
along with an A/D converter.
 2. Measurement of ac voltage, current, frequency and phase angle difference (either between
two voltages or between voltage and current) using suitable PT, CT, Zero crossing
detectors, A/D converters etc.
3. Generation of square, triangular, staircase wave form using D/A converter.
4. Over voltage/under voltage or over current/under current relay circuit using suitable
hardware circuit.
5. Control of a D.C. motor at different speed and to note speed vs. Load characteristics at
open loop condition.
6. Operation of a stepper motor with a fixed number of steps and to determine the angular
displacement per step by measuring the total angular rotation.
7. Operation of a stepper motor continuously at different speed.
8. Control of Traffic light.

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORITICAL)
GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL

SET ANSWERE PER MARK SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS
D QUESTION S

A 1, 2, 3 12 FOUR FIVE, TAKING AT

LEAST TWO
B 4,5,6,7 11 TWENTY ONE 1 X 20 FIVE FROM EACH TEN 10 X 5
= 20 GROUP = 50

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been allotted in
each unit and set the paper accordingly so that all units get the importance as allotted.

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)
3. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the Fifth
Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job – 15, Notebook – 10.
4. External Assessment of 25 marks shall be held at the end of the Fifth Semester on the entire syllabus. One
Experiment per student from any one of the above is to be performed. Experiment is to be set by lottery system.
Distribution of marks: On spot job – 15, Viva-voce – 10.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Subject : Switchgear and Protection

Subject Code: EE/S5/SWGRP Semester: FIFTH

Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks: 175

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 3 Hrs./Week Mid Semester Exam.: 20 Marks
Tutorial: nil Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks
Practical: 3 Hrs./Week End Semester Exam.: 70 Marks
Credit: 04 Practical Exam.: 75 Marks
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. To study the principles, concepts & procedural aspects of switchgear & protection.
2. To Identify various components of switchgear & protection
systems.

3. To Identify faults & know how to repair the switchgear.

Objective:
Sl. No. The student will be able to:
1. Explain the principles, concepts & procedural aspects of switchgear & protection.
2. Identify the various components of switchgear & protection systems.
3. Select switchgear & protection system as per specification
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Power system
2. Fundamentals of AC, DC Machines

Contents (Theory) Hrs./Unit Marks

Unit: 1 Fundamental: 06 10
1.1Necessity & functions of protective system.
1.2 Normal & abnormal conditions.
1.3 Types of faults & their causes.
1.4 Use of current limiting reactors & their
arrangements.
1.5 Short-circuit KVA calculations for symmetrical faults –
problems.

Unit: 2 Circuit interrupting devices: 11 18

2.1 Basic fuse terminology: fuse element, rated
current, fusing current, fusing factor, prospective
current, cut-off current, arcing time, rupturing
capacity, total operating time. Fuse Characteristics
2.1.1 HRC fuses – construction, types, working,
characteristics, selection and applications
2.2 Isolators- vertical break, horizontal break &
pentograph type
 2.3 Arc formation process, methods of arc extinction,
related terms.
2.4 Circuit breakers- Concept, Classification, Working
principle, Construction, Specification & Applications of
2.4.1 E.H.V/H.V – Minimum oil circuit breakers
(M.O.C.B.), Air Blast Circuit Breaker (A.B.C.B),Sulpher
Hexa Fluoride circuit breaker (SF6). vacuum
circuit breaker.
2.4.2 L.V.- Air circuit breakers (ACB),miniature circuit
breakers ( M C B ) , Moulded case circuit breakers
( M C C B ) , Earth leakage circuit breaker ( E L C B or R
C CB ), Comparison of fuse & MCCB
2.5 Selection of MCCB for motor.
2.6 Selection and rating of circuit breakers - breaking
capacity, making capacity, rated operating duty, rated
voltage.
2.7 Elementary idea of Auto-reclosing.
Unit: 3 Protective Relaying: 15 18
3.1 Zones of protection, primary & back-up
protection, Essential qualities of protection,
classification of protective schemes, basic relay
terminology.
3.2 CT & PT used in protection: Requirements,
Basic circuit diagram, working principle & application
of CVT and CCVT.
3.3 Operating principles and construction (in brief)
of: Electromagnetic relays, thermal relays, static
relays (with merits and demerits), and
Microprocessor based relays, Auxiliary switch Flags
– conception only.

3.4 Over current relay--- Time-current

characteristics of definite time, instantaneous, inverse
time and IDMT Relays.

Use of very inverse-type O/C relay and extremely

inverse type O/C relay.

Time-setting, current-setting, PSM – problems.

3.5 Directional Relay - Introduction,

Characteristics : Constant product characteristics,

Polar characteristics, Concept of dead zone.
3.6 Distance Protection Scheme : Area of
applications, Impedance relays, Reactance relay, MHO
relay : operating characteristics, effect of arc
resistance on their characteristics.

3.7 Differential Relay : Introduction, Current

differential protection for an internal fault – fed from
single & both end.

Voltage balance differential protection – Schematic

diagram & operation (in brief). Mention the position
 of operating coil and the restraining coil for both the
cases.
3.8 Static over current relays
3.9 µP based over current relays.

Unit: 4 Equipment Protection: 11 16

4.1 Generator protection – Percentage differential
stator protection, brief idea of: - rotor protection due
to loss of excitation, protection against rotor
overheating because of unbalance in load, over-
speed protection, protection against motoring and
field suppression.
4.2 Transformer protection - Percentage
differential protection – problems, Buchholz Relay,
rate of rise of pressure relay, over-fluxing protection,
O/C protection.
4.3 Protection of Motor: Abnormalities & faults.
Short circuit protection, Overload protection, Single
phase preventer.
4.4 Protection of Busbar & transmission line

Unit:5 Over voltage Protection: 05 8

5.1 Causes of over voltages.
5.2 Lighting phenomena & over voltage due to
lightning.
5.3 Protection of transmission line & substation from
direct stroke.
5.4 Types of lightning arresters & surge absorbers &
their Construction & principle of operation.
5.5 Protection against traveling waves.
5.6 Insulation co-ordination.

Total 48 70
Contents (Practical)
Sl. No. Skills to be developed
1. Intellectual Skills:
1. Identify different types of circuit breakers
2. Test the different types of relays.
3. Idea about simulation.

2. Motor Skills:
1. Simulate circuit configuration.
2. Set the relays for various tests.
3. List of Practical: (3.1 and 3.2 are compulsory & any Five from the rest)
3.1 To demonstrate HRC fuse, MCB & ELCB and explain the functions of various components.
3.2 To Identify the components of following types of circuit breakers with their specifications
(through visits , video or model ).:
I) Low tension air circuit breaker.( including protective devices )
II) Minimum oil circuit breaker ( M O C B )
III) Air Blast circuit breaker ( ABCB)
IV) Sulpher - Hexa fluoride circuit breaker ( S F 6 )
V) Vacuum circuit breaker.
 3.3 To Plot the inverse characteristics of Induction type/ Micrprocessor Based – (i) O/C
relay, (ii) E/F relay using Relay Testing Kit.
3.4 To test percentage Differential Protection of Transformer Using Transformer
Differential Relay (Electromagnetic/Microprocessor based).
3.5 To demonstrate the operation of single phasing preventer by creating single phasing
fault for a given 3-ph induction motor with D.O.L. starter.
3.6 To test Directional Over Current Relay (DOCR) by Relay Testing Kit.
3.7 To simulate Alternator Protection using any simulator
3.8 To simulate the operation of Distance Relay using any simulator
3.9 To prepare a report on specifications of lightning arresters of different
manufacturers through Brochures / Literature
Text Books:
Name of Authors Title of the book Edition Name of the Publisher
J.B.Gupta Switchgear & Protection S.K.Katharia & Sons
C.L.Wadhwa Electrical Power System Wiley Eastern Ltd.
Badriram & Power System Protection & TMH, New Delhi
Vishwakarma P.N. Switchgear
B. Bhalja, Protection and Switchgear Oxford University Press
R.P.Maheshwari &
N.G. Chothani
V.K. Mehta & R. Principles of Power system S.Chand & Co. Ltd.
Mehta
B. Ravindranath, M Power System Protection and Wiley Eastern Ltd.
Chandar Switchgear
Raghuraman Protection & Switchgear Scitech Publication (India)
Pvt. Ltd.

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORITICAL)
GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL

SET ANSWERE PER MARK SET ANSWERE QUESTION MARKS
D QUESTION S D

A 1, 2 8 THREE TWO

B 3,4 12 TWENTY ONE 1 X 20 THREE TWO TEN 10 X 5

= 20 = 50
C 5,6 4 TWO ONE

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been allotted in
each unit and set the paper accordingly so that all units get the importance as allotted.

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)
1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the Fifth
Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job – 15, Notebook – 10.
2. External Assessment of 50 marks shall be held at the end of the Fifth Semester on the entire syllabus. One
Experiment per student from any one of the above is to be performed. Experiment is to be set by lottery system.
Distribution of marks: On spot job – 35, Viva-voce – 15.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the subject: INDUSTRIAL PROJECT AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT

Subject Code: EE/S5/IPED Semester: S5
Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks: 75
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 1 Hrs/week Mid Semester Exam.: Marks
Tutorial: Assignment & Quiz: Marks
Practical: 3 Hrs/week End Semester Exam.: Marks
Credit: 03 Practical : 7 5 Marks
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. It is intended to provide opportunity for students to develop understanding of the interrelationship
between different courses learnt in the entire diploma programme and to apply the knowledge gained
in a way that enables them to develop & demonstrate higher order skills.
Objective:
Sl. No. The student will be able to:
1. Generate creative ability by developing something which has Engineering relevance
2. Handle real life problems that a diploma-holder may encounter as a professional
3. Identify entrepreneurship opportunity
4. Develop entrepreneurial values and attitude
5. Use the information to prepare project report for business venture
6. Develop awareness about enterprise management
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Knowledge of subjects up to 4th Semester of Electrical Engineering.
PART A: Industrial Project

Following activities related to project are required to be dealt with, during this semester

1. Form project batches (Max. 6 students per batch)

2. Each project batch should select topic / problem / work by consulting the guide & / or industry.

(One from Group 1 and another from Group 2)

3. Each project batch should prepare action plan of project activities & submit the same to respective

guide.

4. At the end of semester, each project batch should submit the action plan and abstract of the project

along with list of materials required if project involves fabrication or other facilities required in other

kinds of project.

5. Action Plan should be part of the project report.

Actual work of project should be done in sixth semester.
Group Projects
1 (1) Design and Estimation of electrification of a
modern multistoried building along with the
required sub-station complying I.E. Rules.
(2) Design of Rural Electrification Scheme for small
Village, Colony.
(3) Energy Conservation and Audit.
(4) Substation Model (Scaled)
(5) Wind Turbine Model (Scaled)
( 6) Pole Mounted Substation Model (Scaled)
(7) Conduct load survey to ascertain the total
load requirements of a locality /
polytechnic.
(8) Any other items as may be assigned by the
teacher concerned.
2 (1) Rewinding of Three Phase/Single Phase
Induction Motor.
(2) Rewinding of Single Phase Transformer.
(3) Fabrication of Inverter up to 1000 VA.
(4) Fabrication of Battery Charger.
(5) Fabrication of Small Wind Energy System for
Battery Charging.
(6) Fabrication of Solar Panel System for Battery
Charging.
(7)Fabrication of Water level controller.
(8)Fabrication of DC motor speed control
circuit by SCRs.
(9) Microprocessor/ Micro controller Based
Projects.
(10) Simulation Projects using Matlab.
(11) Any other items as may be assigned by the
teacher concerned.
Part B: Entrepreneurship Development

Following activities related to Entrepreneurship Development is required to be dealt with, during

this semester:

1. Students should be taught about the basic idea of following aspects Entrepreneurship

Development :

Chapter Contents
1. Entrepreneurship, Creativity & Opportunities 03 Hrs
1.1) Concept, Classification & Characteristics of Entrepreneur

1.2) Creativity and Risk taking.

1.2.1) Concept of Creativity & Qualities of Creative person.
1.2.2) Risk Situation, Types of risk & risk takers.

1.3) Intrapreneuring and Entrepreneurship.

 1.4) Business Idea: Methods and techniques to generate business idea.

1.5) Transforming Ideas in to opportunities : Transformation involves Assessment of idea &

Feasibility of opportunity
1.6) SWOT Analysis

2. Information And Support Systems 05 Hrs

2.1) Industrial Policy reform in West Bengal

2.2) Financial assistance schemes of SIDBI (Small Industries Development Bank of India)

2.3 ) Financial assistance scheme of NSIC (National Small Industries Corporation)

2.4) Guidance/Assistance available from following organizations:

i) National Research Development Corporation (NRDC)

ii) Small Industries Service Institute(SISI)

iii) State Financial Corporation (SFC)

iv) District Industries Centre (DICs)

v) Chambers of Commerce and Industry and Industrial Association
3. Forming of Business Organization 02 Hrs
3.1) Market Survey
3.2) Advantages and Disadvantages of following types organizations:
a) Sole Proprietorship
b) Partnership
c) Joint stock company i) Private Limited Company
ii) Public Limited Company

3.3) Assess yourself-are you an entrepreneur ?

4. Project Report Preparation 06 Hrs

4.1 ) Project Report and its utility

4.2 ) Preparation of Project Report of any one business. Following statements are required to

be prepared:

i) Calculation of working capital requirement.

ii) Cost of Production.

iii) Profitability Statement.

iv) Cash Flow statement.

v) Mean of Financing.

vi) Land and site Development

 vii) Building

viii) Plant and Machinery

ix) Preliminary and Pre-operative Expenses

x) Manpower Estimates Staff and Labour

xi) Administrative Overheads.

xii) Miscellaneous Assets.

xiii) Calculation of Depreciation.

xiv) Interest Calculation.

xvi) Project Implementation Schedule.

2. At the end of the semester every student has to prepare Project Report of a business model as

mentioned above in chapter 4.

Text Books:
Name of Authors Titles of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
J.S. Saini A Handbook of Aapga Publication
B.S.Rathore Entrepreneurship
Raj Shankar Entrepreneurship TMH
Theory & Practice

Alpana Trehan Entrepreneurship Dreamtech Press

M.Schaper, T Entrepreneurship Wiley

Volery, P Weber, And Small Business
K Lewis

J.B.Patel A Manual on How to

Prepare a Project
D.G.Allampally
Report
A Manual on Business EDI STUDY MATERIAL
J.B.Patel Opportunity
S.S.Modi Identification & Ahmadabad (Near Village Bhat , Via
Selection Ahmadabad Airport & Indira Bridge), P.O.
National Derectory of Bhat 382428 , Gujrat,India
S.B.Sareen Entrepreneur P.H. (079) 3969163, 3969153
H. Anil Kumar Motivator & Resource E-mail :
Persons. ediindia@sancharnet.in/olpe@ediindia.org
New Initiatives in Website : http://www.ediindia.org
Gautam Jain
Entrepreneurship
Debmuni Gupta
Education & Training
P.C.Jain A Handbook of New
Enterpreneurs
 Video cassette
Sl no. Subject Source
1. Five success Stories of First Generation EDI STUDY MATERIAL
Entrepreneurs Ahmadabad (Near Village Bhat , Via
2. Ahmadabad Airport
Assessing Entrepreneurial
& Indira Bridge), P.O. Bhat 382428 ,
Competencies Gujrat,India
3. Business Opportunity Selection and P.H. (079) 3969163, 3969153
Guidance E-mail :
4. Planning for completion & Growth ediindia@sancharnet.in/olpe@ediin
5. Problem solving-An Entrepreneur skill dia.org
Website : http://www.ediindia.org

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)
1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the Fifth
Semester.
2. External Assessment of 50 marks shall be held at the end of the Fifth Semester. Distribution of marks: On the
basis of Action plan of Project and Project Report of Entrepreneurship Development – 35, Viva-voce – 15.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Course: Utilization, Traction, Heating and Drives

Course Code: EE/S5/UTHD Semester: Fourth

Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks: 150

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 3 hrs./week Mid Semester Exam.: 20 Marks
Tutorial: hrs./week Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks
Practical: 2 hrs./week End Semester Exam.: 70 Marks
Practical : 50 Marks
Credit: 5 (Five)
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. To understand basic areas of utilization of electrical energy e.g. illumination, motor drives etc.
2. To study various methods of electric heating
3. To understand basics of electric traction.
4. To understand cost of electrical energy and conservation of electrical energy.
Objective:
Sl. No. The students will be able to:
1. Explain working of various sources of light and flood lighting
2. Compare different methods of electric heating
3. Select electric drives for specific applications.
4. Explain concept of electric traction system.
5. Apply various measures for economic aspects of utilizing electrical energy.
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Electrical Technology and Electrical Machines.
Contents (Theory) Hrs./Un Marks
it
Unit: 1 Illumination: 10 18

1.1. Definitions of Terms Used in Illumination:

Light, Luminous Flux, Luminous Intensity, Lumen, Candle Power, Illumination,

Lux or Meter Candle, Mean Horizontal Candle Power (MHCP), Mean Spherical
Candle Power (MSCP), Mean Hemi-spherical Candle Power (MHSCP),
Reduction Factor, Lamp Efficiency, Specific Consumption, Glare, Space-Height
Ratio, Utilization Factor, Maintenance Factor, Depreciation Factor, Colour
Renderng Index, Waste Light Factor, Absorption Factor, Reflection Factor,
Solid Angle, Beam Angle

1.2. Laws of Illumination:

- Law of Inverse Squares
- Lambert's Cosine Law. (No Numerical)
1.3 Types, basic principle, Details Specifications and application of following
sources of light:
- Incandescent Lamps.
 - Halogen Lamps.
- Low Pressure Mercury Vapour Lamps (Fluorescent Tube).
- High Pressure Mercury Vapour Lamps.
- Sodium Vapour Lamps.
- Compact Fluorescent Lamps (C.F.L.)
- Metal Halide Lamps
- LED Lamps
- Neon Signs.

Unit 2 Electric Heating and Welding: 14 20

Electric Heating

2.1. Advantages of Electric Heating.

2.2. Classification of Electric Heating Methods:
2.2.1. Resistance Heating:(Construction, Operation and application)
- Direct Resistance Heating: Salt Bath Furnace.
- Indirect Resistance Heating: Resistance Ovens,
Requirements of Heating Element Material, Name of some common heating
element materials, Causes of Failure of Heating Elements, Methods of
Temperature Control.
2.2.2. Arc Heating: (Construction, Operation and application)
- Direct Arc Furnace:
- Indirect Arc Furnace.
2.2.3. Induction Heating: (Construction & Operation and application)
- Core Type Induction Furnaces: Ajax Wyatt Furnace.
- Coreless Induction Furnace.
2.2.4. Dielectric Heating:
- Principle of Dielectric Heating.
- Advantages of Dielectric Heating
- Limitations of Dielectric Heating.
- Applications of Dielectric Heating.
Power supply requirement and simple numerical of above heating methods. (No
deduction of any formula)

Electric Welding:
2.3. Methods of Electric Welding
2.3.1. Resistance Welding:
- Principle of Resistance Welding.
- Advantages of Resistance Welding.
- Types of Resistance Welding - (Only List)
Spot Welding Machine.
2.3.2. Electric Arc Welding:
- Formation and Characteristics of Electric Arc.
- Effect of Arc Length.
- Arc Blow.
Electrodes for Metal Arc Welding, V-I Characteristics required for of Arc Welding.
2.3.3. Arc Welding Machines:
- DC Welding Machines - MG Set, AC Rectified Welding Unit.
- AC Welding Machines - Welding Transformer.

Unit 3 Electric Drives: 8 10

3.1 – Introduction.
- Drives - Mechanical Drive and Electric Drive.
- Advantages and Disadvantages of Electric Drive.
- Factors Governing Selection of Electric Motors.
-Comparative discussion between the various Electric drive duties - continuous,
 short-time & intermittent.
3.2. Requirements of various types of common loads such as - Hoist, Elevator,
Conveyor, Rolling mills, Centrifugal pumps, Punches, Shears etc.
- Selection of motors in respect of types, size and rating for above loads on the
basis of mechanical characteristics, speed control, reversibility, working
environment and cost.

Unit 4 Electric Traction: 10 15

4.1. Introduction:
- History of electric traction
- Various systems of traction.
- Electric traction Vs other traction systems
- Electric Traction as viable transport strategy for 21st Century
-Choice of traction system: Diesel-electric or Electric.

4.2 Electric Traction:

-Different systems of track electrification (Block diagram) DC, AC, Composite.
Advantage & disadvantages of each.
-analysis of single phase 25 KV AC system and DC system.

4.3. Traction Mechanics:

- Units Used in Traction Mechanics.
- Types of Services.
- Speed Time Curve.
- Simplified Speed Time Curve (No Derivation)
- Average Speed and Schedule Speed.
- Factors Affecting The Schedule Speed.
- Tractive Effort
- Specific Energy Consumption
- Factors Affecting Specific Energy Consumption.
- (Simple Numerical on Simplified Speed Time Curves and Specific Energy
Consumption)

4.4. Mechanics of train movement, Adhesion & coefficient of Adhesion, concept

of weight transfer, effect of unsprung mass and wheel diameter.

4.5. Traction Motors:

- Desirable Characteristics of Traction Motors, Special features of traction motor.
- Suitability of DC Series Motor for Traction.
- Suitability of Three Phase Induction Motor for Traction.

Unit 5 Economic Aspects of Utilising Electrical Energy: 6 7

5.1 - Economic Aspects of Utilising Electrical Energy.

5.2 - Costing of Electrical Energy: Fixed Charges, Semi Fixed Charges and
running Charges.
5.3 - Formulation of Electrical Tariffs.
5.4 - Various Types of Tariffs: Tariffs in force for Domestic, Commercial and
Industrial Consum
5.5 - Energy Conservation: Importance and need of Energy Conservation,
Measures for Energy Conservation in (i) Electric Drives (ii) Electric Traction (iii)
Electric Heating (iv) Refrigeration and Air Conditioning (v) Illumination.
Total 48 70
 Contents (Practical)

Skills to be developed
Intellectual Skills: i) Interpret results
ii) Calculate values of various components for given circuits.
ii) Select Instruments

Motor Skills: i) Connect the instruments properly.

ii) Take accurate readings.
iii) Draw related graphs.
List of Laboratory Experiments:
Sl. No. List of Practical: (At least Eight Experiments are to be performed)
1. To determine Illumination of a surface for a Drawing Room by means of lux meter.
2 To determine candle power of a lamp in comparison to standard C.P. of lamp by optical bench
method.
3 To verify the Inverse Square Law and compare the difference in output luminescence of
incandescent, fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps.
4 To Study of Sodium vapour lamp, Mercury vapour lamp, CFL with their connections and the
technical specification.
5 To study of torques/Armature current, Speed/Armature current & Torque/Speed characteristics
for D.C. series motor using mechanical loading. (Either braking arrangement or using D.C.
Gen).
6 To study of different current collectors used for drawing current from O.H. system for traction
(using models and block diagram).

7 To calculate the Total Cost in a (i) Residential and (ii) Commercial or Industrial Bill.
8. To study of Electric Arc Welding using welding transformer.
9. To study of the principle of Induction Heating using an induction heater.
10. To Study Electricity Act 2003 : Energy Audit, role of energy manager, energy auditor and prepare
power point presentation/report.

Text Books:
Name of Authors Titles of the Book Name of Publisher
Sl No.

1 H. Partab Modern Electric Traction Dhanpat Rai & Sons

2 C.L. Wadhawa Generation Distribution and New Age

Utilization of Electrical
Energy
3 J. Upadhyay J. Upadhyay Allied Publishers Ltd.
S. N. Mahendra S. N. Mahendra

4. A.T.Starr Generation, transmission and

utilization of Electrical power
5. J.B.Gupta Utilization of Electric Power & S.K.Kataria & Sons
Electric Traction
 EX A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORITICAL)

GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL

SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS

A 1, 5 TWO FIVE, TAKING AT

TWENTY ONE 1 X 20 = LEAST ONE FROM TEN 10 X 5 =
B 2 5 20 THREE EACH GROUP 50
C 3,5 5 THREE

D 4 5 TWO

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been allotted in
each unit and set the paper accordingly so that all units get the importance as allotted.

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)
1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the Fifth
Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job - 15, Notebook - 10.
2. External Assessment of 25 marks shall be held at the end of the Fifth Semester on the entire syllabus. One
Experiment per student from any one of the above is to be performed. Experiment is to be set by lottery system.
Distribution of marks: On spot job - 15, Viva-voce - 10.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.
\

Name of the course : Illumination Engineering

(Elective)

Course Code : EE/S5/ILE (EL) Semester : Fifth

Duration : One Semester Maximum Marks : 150

Teaching scheme : Examination scheme :

Theory: 3 Hrs./ Week Mid Semester Exam: 20 Marks

Practical: 2 Hrs./ Week Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks

End Semester Exam: 70 Marks

Practical: 50 Marks

Credit:

Aim:

Sl. No.

1. To measure the level of illumination.

2. To study various types of lamps.

3. To design illumination schemes for various applications in residential, commercial &

industrial locations.

Objective:

Sl. No. Student will be able to:

1. Measure the level of illumination.

2. Differentiate between various types of lamps.

3. Identify & list of various lighting accessories and components.

4. Design a control circuit for illumination.

5. Design and execute illumination schemes for various applications in Residential,

Commercial & Industrial locations.
Pre-Requisite:

1. Knowledge of Optics and light sources.

2. Wiring, switching and control circuits.

Contents (Theory): Hrs./Unit Marks

Unit : 1 1. Fundamentals of Light : 07 10

1.1 Electromagnetic radiation & Light.

1.2 Electromagnetic spectrum – Ultraviolet, Visible, Infrared

spectrum.

1.3 Human eye as an optical system – basic concept.

1.4 Spectral sensitivity of human eye – Photopic, Scotopic,

Mesopic vision.

1.5 Visual characteristics – Brightness, Contrast, Glare, Flicker.

1.6 Visual performance - Visibility level, Contrast rendering factor.

1.7 Colorimetry – Visual basis, Source colour, Object colour.

1.8 Colorimetric instrument – Colorimetry of light source and

materials, Colour rendering index.

Unit : 2 2. Measurements: 07 12

2.1 Photometry – Basic concept, Fundamentals of detector.

2.2 Photometric measurements – Methods to measure Luminous

intensity, Luminous flux, Luminance, Illuminance.

2.3 Application of Polar Photometer & Goniophotometer.

2.4 Luxmeter – Working principle & Application.

2.5 CIE standard source of illuminant.

2.6 Radiation of energy – Black body radiation, Full radiator,

Thermal radiation, Radiation from incandescent lamps.

Unit : 3 3. Lamps & Accessories : 10 12

3.1 Lamp materials – glass, filament, phosphor coating, ceramics,

electrodes, gases, capping cement etc.

3.2 Theory & basic properties of low & high pressure gas
discharge.
 3.3 Theory of operation, Life, Characteristics and Application of -

a) High & Low pressure sodium vapour.

b) High & Low pressure mercury vapour.

c) Metal halide.

d) Fluorescent lamp.

e) LED.

f) LASER.

3.4 Optical fiber – its construction as light guide, characteristics,

application in lighting.

3.5 Luminaire – Types of luminaire, Design consideration, Indian

standard recommendation.

Unit : 4 4. Illumination Control & Control circuits : 08 12

4.1 Purpose of lighting control – Energy conservation.

4.2 Electromagnetic & Electronic ballast – Operation &

comparison in light control.

4.3 Ignitor – its function in lamps.

4.4 Control circuits & operation of –

a) Fluorescent lamp circuit.

b) Low pressure sodium vapour lamp circuit.

c) High pressure sodium vapour lamp circuit.

Unit : 5 5. Interior Lighting : 10 12

5.1 National standards of interior lighting calculation.

5.2 Lighting calculations of interior lighting. (Numerical)

5.3 Design considerations for interior lighting of -

(a) Residential complex.

(b) Commercial complex.

(c) Industrial premises.

5.4 Design with Lighting design software.

5.5 Daylighting – Sky luminance pattern, Daylight factor,

estimation of average daylight factor, window design
considerations for maximum daylighting, Application of daylight in
 interior lighting.

5.6 Use of photocell, occupancy sensor in lighting controls.

5.7 Concept of Isolux contour in lighting design.

Unit : 6 6. Exterior Lighting : 06 12

6.1 Lighting calculations of exterior lighting. (Numerical)

6.2 Calculation of lighting & design considerations for exterior

lighting of -

(a) Road lighting.

(b) Flood lighting – Industrial complex, Commercial complex,

Sports complex.

6.3 National & CIE standards of exterior lighting calculation.

Total 48 70

Practical:

Skills to be developed:

Intellectual Skills:

1. To select appropriate equipment.

2. Apply different lighting designing skills.

Motor Skills:

1. Ability to draw the circuit diagrams.

2. Ability to measure illuminance properly.

List of practical: (At least Eight Experiments are to be performed)

1. To measure illuminance (daylight & artificial light) at different points of a classroom by

Luxmeter & draw – (i) Variation of Illuminance characteristics with distance and (ii) Isolux plot.

2. To study the technical data of different types of lamps available in the market & draw their
connection diagram.

3. To study the different lighting accessories, ignitor & electronic ballasts required for different
types of lamps – Sodium vapour, Mercury vapour, Metal halide, CFL, Fluorescent lamp.

4. To study the different luminaries available in the market for various types of lamps with their
technical specifications, their design consideration, Indian standard recommendation.
 5. To study of – (i) Photocell, (ii) Occupancy sensor in artificial lighting control.

6. To design an illumination scheme of a conference hall of medium size.

7. To design an illumination scheme for a workshop in your institute.

8. To design an illumination scheme for a playground of medium size.

9. To design an illumination scheme for a shopping complex of medium size.

10. To visit a standard lamp manufacturing industry and make a report on lamp manufacturing
process.

11. A case study of optimum lighting design with lighting design software.

List of Text Books:

Sl. No. Name of Author Title of the Books Name of Publisher

1. Jack L. Lindsey Applied Illumination Engineering The Fairmont Press Inc.

2. R.H. Simons, Robert Light Engineering : Applied Architectural Press

Bean calculations

3. Casimer M Decusatis Handbook of Applied Springer

Photometry

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORITICAL)
GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL

SET ANSWERE PER MARK SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS
D QUESTION S

A 1, 2, 3 12 FOUR FIVE, TAKING AT

LEAST TWO
B 4,5,6, 11 TWENTY ONE 1 X 20 FIVE FROM EACH TEN 10 X 5
= 20 GROUP = 50

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been allotted in
each unit and set the paper accordingly so that all units get the importance as allotted.

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)
1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the Fifth
Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job – 15, Notebook – 10.
2. External Assessment of 25 marks shall be held at the end of the Fifth Semester on the entire syllabus. One
Experiment per student from any one of the above is to be performed. Experiment is to be set by lottery system.
Distribution of marks: On spot job – 15, Viva-voce – 10.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Subject: Energy Conservation and Audit (Elective)

Subject Code: EE/S5/ECA(EL) Semester: Fifth
Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks: 150
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 3 hrs/ week Mid Semester Exam.: 20 Marks
Tutorial: Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks
Practical: 2 hrs/week End Semester Exam.: 70 Marks
Credit: 04 Practical : 50 Marks
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. To study causes for limited growth of conventional energy sources and limitations of non
conventional sources of energy
2. To study methods of energy conservation for different load conditions
3. To Select appropriate tariff system and methods for reducing electricity consumption and
energy saving.
Objective:
Sl. No. The students will be able to:
1. List causes for limited growth of conventional energy sources and limitations of non
conventional sources of energy.
2. Suggest methods of energy conservation for different load conditions.
3. Select appropriate tariff system and methods for reducing electricity consumption and
energy saving.
4. Apply Tools for energy audit and recommend measures for energy conservation.
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Utilization of Electrical Energy
2. Knowledge of energy sources
Contents (Theory) Hrs./Unit Marks
Unit: 1 Energy
Review of various energy sources, Need of energy 04 08
conservation and energy audit.
Unit: 2 Energy Conservation: 12 18
Lighting energy: methods/Techniques of efficient
lighting .
Heating: methods/Techniques of energy Saving in
Furnaces, Ovens and Boilers.
Cooling: methods/Techniques of Energy Saving in
Ventilating systems and Air Conditioners
Motive power, Energy Efficient Motors, and Efficient
use of energy in motors with the help of voltage
reducers, automatic star/ delta converters .
Power factor improvement devices and soft
starters/Variable Frequency Drives.
Amorphous Core Transformers
Cogeneration -Types and Advantages.
Unit : 3 Tariff and Energy Conservation in Industries:
Energy cost and Recent WBSEB tariffs, Application of 06 08
Tariff System to reduce Energy bill, Energy
conservation by improving load factor and power
factor.

Unit : 4 Energy Conservation In Transmission and

Distribution Systems: 08 08
Reactive power compensation, demand side
management, system voltage optimization and phase
current balancing, Losses in transmission and
distribution system and its minimization
Unit : 5 Energy and the Environment:
Environment and social concerns related to energy 04 08
utilization, The green house effect, Global Warming
and its effect , Pollution, Acid Rains, Global Energy
and environment Management.
Unit : 6 Energy Audit:
Procedure of Energy audit, ABC analysis, Energy
Flow Diagram and its importance, Measurements in 14 20
energy audit and various measuring instruments,
Questionnaires for the energy audit, internal
energy audit checklist, Equipment used for energy
conservation, Calculation of payback period for
energy conservation equipment. IE rules and
regulations for energy audit, Electricity act 2003
( Numerical).

Total 48 70
Contents (Practical)
Sl. No. Skills to be developed
1. Intellectual Skills:

1. Identify different methods used for energy conservation.

2. Understand the importance of energy conservation.
3. Select proper tariff for given industry/institute.
4. Collect technical information regarding electricity act.

2. Motor Skills:

1. Prepare energy audit report.

2. Write visit report.
3. Use different methods of energy conservation.
4. Use of energy saving devices.

Suggested list of Experiments/Reports:

Sl. No. Laboratory Experiments
1.
To save energy by using electronic ballast as compared to conventional choke.
2. To Collect the Standard tariff rates and suggest suitable tariff for given
industry/Lab/Institute/Commercial establishment.
3. To make a survey of one establishment to identify different methods used for energy
 conservation.
4. To prepare Energy audit report for Industry/workshop/ Institute .
5. To search on the website of power ministry and collect the information regarding role of
energy manager, energy auditor and prepare power point presentation/report.
6. To list energy saving equipments for domestic and commercial applications
7. To list the different equipments used in energy auditing
Text Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
Siemens Power Factor Correction New Age Vol.38 2005
T.Gonen Electric Power Distribution Tata McGraw Hill
System Engg.
M.J. Steinburg and Economy Loading of Power John Willey and sons
T.H. Smith plant and Electric system
Generation Distribution and
C.L. Wadhawa Utilization of Electrical New Age 2004
Energy
Steven R. Patrick, Energy conservation Guide book Fairmont Press
Dale R. Patric
Stephen W. Fardo
Giovanni Petrecca Industrial Energy Management: Kluwer Academic
Principles and applications Publisher

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORITICAL)
GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL

SET ANSWERE PER MARK SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS
D QUESTION S

A 1, 2, 3 12 FOUR FIVE, TAKING AT

LEAST TWO
B 4,5,6, 11 TWENTY ONE 1 X 20 FIVE FROM EACH TEN 10 X 5
= 20 GROUP = 50

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been allotted in
each unit and set the paper accordingly so that all units get the importance as allotted.

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)
1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the Fifth
Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job – 15, Notebook – 10.
2. External Assessment of 50 marks shall be held at the end of the Fifth Semester. Distribution of marks: On the
basis of Experiment/Reports – 15, Viva-voce – 10.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Subject: HEATING, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING (Elective)

Subject Code: EE/S5/HVAC (EL) Semester : FIFTH
Duration : One Semester Maximum Marks : 150
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory : 03 hrs/week Mid Semester Exam: 20 Marks
Tutorial: -- hrs/week Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks
Practical : 02 hrs/week End Semester Exam: 70 Marks
Credit: 04 Practical : 50 Marks
Aim :-
S.No
1. This is a technology subject which is an elective subject for third year diploma in Electrical
Engineering. Presently the need of Heating Ventilation and Air conditioning (HVAC) is increasing
with the growth in IT sector, commercial establishments, hospitals, hotels etc. Therefore there is a
growing need of engineers / technicians in this field. Hence, technicians/supervisors from electrical
engineering branch are also expected to have some basic knowledge of HVAC systems.
2. This subject covers installation, testing and maintenance of Heating Ventilation and Air
conditioning systems. After completing this subject the student can carry out installation, testing and
maintenance of HVAC equipment efficiently and effectively. He can work as service engineer or
get self employed.
3. Student can work with building management system (BMS).
Objective :-
S.No The student will be able to:-
1. Install HVAC equipment.
2. Test the equipment for its performance evaluation.
3. Carryout routine and preventive maintenance of HVAC system.
4. Troubleshoot and repair HVAC equipment.
5. Calculate heat load and approximate capacity of the equipment using thumb rule.
6. Select appropriate equipment.
Pre-Requisite:-
S.No
1. Basics of electronic instrumentation
Content (Theory) Hrs/Unit Marks
Unit : 1 Introduction 02 04
1.1 Laws of thermodynamics
1.2 Comparison between heat engine, heat pump and refrigeration
1.3 Definitions of refrigeration, ton of refrigeration, COP, enthalpy, entropy
Unit : 2 Types of refrigeration systems
2.1 Vapour compression system – components used in vapour
compression system, operation of vapour compression system, its
representation on P – H and T – S diagrams, effect of superheating and
under cooling of refrigerant. 04 04
2.2 Vapour absorption system – components used in vapour absorption
system, its operation, its merits and demerits compared to vapour
compression system
2.3 Air refrigeration system – components used in air refrigeration system,
its operation and applications

Unit : 3 Refrigerants and Lubrication

3.1 Classification of refrigerants
3.2 Types of refrigerants presently in use
3.3 Desirable properties of refrigerants (Physical, chemical,
thermodynamic)
3.4 Applications of important refrigerants 06 06
3.5 Eco-friendly refrigerants
3.6 Properties of lubricants
3.7 Lubricants and refrigerant compatibility
3.8 Foaming of oil and crankcase electric heater
3.9 Effect of lubricant flood back to compressor
3.10 Additives used in lubricants
3.11Necessity of oil separator

Unit : 4 Components of vapour compression system

4.1 Various types of compressors – reciprocating (hermetic, semi sealed,
open), rotary (centrifugal, lobe type, screw type, blade type),
applications of each type
4.2 Various types of condensers (air cooled, water cooled, evaporative),
applications
4.3 Types of cooling towers – natural draft, forced draft
4.4 Types of evaporators – direct expansion type, flooded type, shell and 12 16
coil type, double tube type, plate surface type
4.5 Throttling devices – hand expansion valve, constant pressure
expansion valve, thermostatic expansion valve, high side float valve,
capillary tube, electronic expansion valve
4.6 Accessories – receiver, oil separator, drier, strainer, solenoid valve
Note – schematic diagram and brief description only of the above
components
4.7 Applications of refrigeration – Ice plant, water cooler, refrigerator, milk
dairy, cold storage, breweries, superconductors, transport
refrigeration and air conditioning
Unit : 5 Airconditioning
5.1 Psychrometry – Definition, psychrometric properties of air, use of
psychrometric chart 05 10
5.2 Representation of simple air conditioning process on psychrometric
chart.
5.3 Sling psychrometer
 5.4 Air conditioning systems (Schematic layout, working and application of
each of the following)
• Central air conditioning system – direct expansion type, chilled
water type
• Package type air conditioning system
• Unitary air conditioning system, split type system
• Evaporative cooling
5.5 Applications of airconditioning – comfort airconditioning, industrial
Air conditioning, transport air conditioning
Unit : 6 Components in air supply and distribution system
6.1 Fans and blowers (centrifugal, axial flow) – schematic diagram and
applications
6.2 Filters – (Dry, viscous, wet, electronic type) – schematic diagram and
applications 04 06
6.3 Different types of humidifiers and dehumidifiers
6.4 Grills and registers
6.5 Duct system – heat gain or loss in ducts
6.6 Causes of pressure loss through air ducts
6.7 Different methods of duct designing
Unit : 7 Thermal insulation
7.1 Desirable properties of insulating materials for airconditioning
purpose 02 04
7.2 Different types of insulating materials used for airconditioning
7.3 Selection of insulating materials for walls, ceiling, floor, air ducts,
chilled water pipes
Unit : 8 Controls used in airconditioning
8.1 High pressure and low pressure cutouts, overload protector,
thermostat, 03 06
oil safety switch, fusible plug, pressure equalizer
8.2 Microprocessor based controls and variable frequency drive
8.3 Fluid flow control devices
(simple sketch and wiring diagram is expected)
Unit : 9 Heat load
9.1 Definitions – SHF, RSHF, EFSHF
9.2 Factors responsible for heat load 03 06
9.3 Conditions of airconditioning and representation of comfort zone on
psychrometric chart
9.4 Determination of capacity of airconditioning unit by referring tables
only (no calculations)
Unit : 10 Heating and ventilation
10.1 Plain heating, electric heating, steam heating, hot water heating, solar
heating
10.2 Heating with humidification and heating with dehumidification
10.3 Natural ventilation 07 08
10.4 Mechanical ventilation – 1) Air extraction system 2) Air supply
system,
combined supply and extraction system
10.5 Air distribution system – perimeter system, extended plenum system,
upward flow system, downward flow system, ejector system
1o.6 Return duct system (only schematic diagrams and brief description of
the above system)
Total 48 70
 Contents (Practical)
Sl. No. Skills to be developed
1. Intellectual Skills: 1. Interpret results
2. Write specifications

2. Motor Skills: . 1. Conduct trial

2. Read drawing and identify components
3. Carry out Welding

Sl. No. list of Experiments/Reports (Any eight)

1. To carryout trial on vapour compression test rig for finding its performance.
2. To dismantle and assemble open type and hermetic type compressors, to draw freehand
sketches of various parts and to write specifications of compressors.
3. To carryout copper tube welding
4. To study and draw block diagram of control panel wiring with respect to L.P. / H.P. cutouts, oil
pressure cutout, thermostat, humidistat, solenoid valve
5. To troubleshoot the air-conditioning plant in relation to a) High condenser pressure b) Low
cooling effect c) Reduced volume of supply of air d) compressor not starting
6. To prepare maintenance schedule of central air conditioning plant – weekly, quarterly, half
yearly, yearly
7. To demonstrate and study of various tools used in refrigeration such as – tube cutter, bending
tools, flaring tool (block and yoke type), swaging tool, brazing tool, blow lamp etc.
8. To demonstrate purging, gas charging, leak testing and pump down of the refrigeration
system
9. To visit to air conditioned hotel or theater to study control panel and various controls, starting
and stopping system, air supply and air return system. Write a detailed report.
10. To visit to cold storage to study different components of vapour compression system,
temperature and humidity conditions required for different food items. Write a detailed report.
11. To prepare a report (use internet) based on the following points to purchase an air
conditioner:
i)Manufactures, ii)Technical specifications, iii) Features offered by different manufacturers,
iv) Price range.
Then select the air conditioner which you would like to purchase. Give justification for your
selection in short.
Note: For visits professional practices periods may be utilized.
Text Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
P. N. Basic Refrigeration and Tata Mcgraw Hill, New
Anathanarayanan Air-conditioning
Delhi
M. Adithan, S.C. Practical Refrigeration New Age International
Laroyia, and Air-conditioning
(P) Ltd.
 E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORITICAL)
GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL

SET ANSWERE PER MARK SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS
D QUESTION S

A 1, 2, 3,4 11 FOUR FIVE, TAKING AT

LEAST TWO
B 5,6,7,8,9 12 TWENTY ONE 1 X 20 FIVE FROM EACH TEN 10 X 5
,10 = 20 GROUP = 50

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been allotted in
each unit and set the paper accordingly so that all units get the importance as allotted.

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)
1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the Fifth
Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job – 15, Notebook – 10.
2. External Assessment of 50 marks shall be held at the end of the Fifth Semester. Distribution of marks: On the
basis of Experiment/Reports – 15, Viva-voce – 10.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Subject : Electric Traction (Elective)

Subject Code: EE/S5/ET(EL) Semester: Fifth

Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks: 150

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 3 hrs./week Mid Semester Exam.: 20 Marks
Tutorial: hrs./week Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks
Practical: 2 hrs./week End Semester Exam.: 70 Marks
Practical : 50 Marks
Credit: 04
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. One of the practical applications of electricity, which enters into the everyday life of many of us, is
its use in service of mass transport – the electric propulsions of vehicles – electric trains, trolley
buses, tram cars and in the latest developments such as metro and sky bus.
2. In view of the growing importance and technological developments, which have come about in this
area in the recent past; for Electrical Engineering students, it is desirable to study the course dealing
with electric traction.
Objective:
Sl. No. The students will be able to:
1. Identify and explain use of components of the power supply arrangements for electric traction.
2. Maintain different overhead equipments.
3. Differentiate the various types of current collecting systems and current collecting gears based on
utility.
4. Differentiate the various types of current collecting systems.
5. Explain special requirements of train lighting and various systems of train lighting.
6. Describe the recent trends in Electric traction, such as LEM propelled traction
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Utilization, traction & Heating in 4th Semester.
2. A.C and D.C. Motors and Power Supply
Contents (Theory) Hrs./Unit Marks

Unit: 1 1.1 - Nomenclature used For Electric Locomotives 12 18

1.2 - Types of Electric Locomotives by Nomenclature.
1.3 – AC Locomotive:
1.3.1 - Equipments of AC Electric Locomotive:
- Power Circuit Equipments and Auxiliary Circuit Equipments.

1.3.2- Equipments in Power Circuit and their Functions:

- Power Circuit Diagram of AC Locomotive: Pantograph, Circuit breaker, Tap

Changer, Traction Transformer, Rectifier, Smoothing, Choke, Traction Motor.

1.3.3 - Equipments in Auxiliary Circuit & their Functions:
Head Light, Flasher Light, Horn, Marker Light, Batteries, Arno Converter, Blowers,
Exhausters, Compressors, Selsyn transformer.
Unit 2 2.1 – Constituents of Supply System: 08 10
Substations, Feeding Posts, Feeding and Sectioning Arrangements, Sectioning and
Paralleling Post, Sub sectioning and Paralleling Post, Sub sectioning Post,
Elementary Section, Miscellaneous Equipments at Control Post or Switching
Stations.
 2.2 – List of Major Equipments at Substation.
2.3 – Location and spacing of substation.
Unit 3 Overhead Equipments: 09 12
3.1 – Overhead Equipments (OHE).
3.2 – Principles of Design of OHE: Composition of OHE, Height of Contact Wire,
Contact Wire Gradient, Encumbrances, Span Length.
3.3 – Automatic Weight Tension and Temp. Compensation.
3.4 – Uninsulated Overlaps.
3.5 – Insulated Overlaps.
3.6 – Neutral Section.
3,7 – Section Insulator.
3.8 – Isolator.
3.9 – Polygonal OHE: Single Catenary Construction, Compound Catenary
Construction, Stitched Catenary Construction, Modified Y Compound Catenary.
3.10 – Effect of Speed on OHE.
(No derivation and No numerals)
Unit 4 Current Collecting Equipments: 06 10
4.1 – Introduction.
4.2 – Systems of Supplying Power in Electric Traction: Overhead System, Third
Rail or Conductor Rail System.
4.3 – Current Collectors for Overhead System:
- Trolley Collector or Pole Collector, Bow Collector, Pentograph Collector.

3.4 – Types of Pentographs: Diamond Pentograph and Faiveley Type.

3.5 – Methods of raising and lowering of Pentograph
Unit 5 Train Lighting: 05 8
5.1 – Systems of Train Lighting.
5.2 – Special Requirements of Train Lighting.
5.3 – Method of obtaining Unidirectional Polarity.
5.4 – Method of obtaining Constant Output.
5.5 – Single Battery System.
5.6 – Double Battery Parallel Block System.
Unit 6 LEM Propelled Traction: 08 12
6.1 – Introduction.
6.2 – Linear Electric Motor (LEM)
6.3 – Linear Induction Based Traction System:
- Moving Primary Fixed Secondary Single Sided LIM.

- Moving Secondary Fixed Primary Single Sided LIM.

- Moving Primary Fixed Secondary Double Sided LIM.
6.4 – Strengths/Weaknesses of LIM Propelled Railway Traction:
- Strengths of LIM Propelled Railway Traction System.

- Weaknesses of LIM Propelled Railway Traction System.

6.5 – LIM Propelled Underground Metro Rail System:
- Factors Influencing Adoption of LIM for Metro Rail.
- International Scenario.

6.6 – Wheel Less Traction: Levitation Schemes, Present Scenario.

Total 48 70
 Contents (Practical)

List of Practical Work:

Sl. No. Nature of work (students are expected to identify and explain function of each item related to their
work)
1. To study of Electric AC Locomotives.
2 To study of Different types of Relays, Contactors used in AC Locomotive
3 To prepare drawing (on half Imperial sheet) for Power Circuit of any type of Electric Locomotive
4 To prepare drawing (on half Imperial sheet) for Protection of Electric Locomotive.
5 To prepare drawing on half Imperial sheet for Traction Substation Layout or Feeding Post
6 To prepare drawing on half Imperial sheet for Pentagonal OHE Catenary, Different Catenary
according to speed limit, Cantilever assembly, OHE Supporting structure, Pantograph, Cross section
of Contact Wire.
7 To visit to Traction Substation (for substation layout and OHE) and writing a report. Also write a
report on OHE maintenance schedule.
8 To visit to Railway Station (for signaling and train lighting) and writing a report
9 Mini Project:
Collection of information using Internet on any two topics related to electric traction and
submission of printouts

Name of Authors Titles of the Book Name of Publisher

Sl No.
1 H. Partab Modern Electric Traction Dhanpat Rai & Sons

2 J. Upadhyay Electric Traction Allied Publishers Ltd.

S. N. Mahendra
3 Andreas Steimel Electric Traction –Motive Oldenbourg-indstrieverlag
Power and Energy supply

EX A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORITICAL)
GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL

SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS

A 1, 5 TWO FIVE, TAKING AT

TWENTY ONE 1 X 20 = LEAST ONE FROM TEN 10 X 5 =
B 2,3 7 20 FOUR EACH GROUP 50
C 4,5 5 TWO

D 6 3 TWO

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been allotted in
each unit and set the paper accordingly so that all units get the importance as allotted.

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)
2. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the Fifth
Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job - 15, Notebook - 10.
3. External Assessment of 25 marks shall be held at the end of the Fifth Semester on the Practical work done
throughout the semester. Distribution of marks: Mini Project work - 5, Sessional work – 5, Viva-voce - 15.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Subject: Professional Practices III

Subject Code: EE/S5/PFIII Semester: Fifth

Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks: 50
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: Mid Semester Exam.: Marks
Tutorial: Assignment & Quiz: Marks
Practical: 3 hrs / week End Semester Exam.: Marks
Practical : 50 Marks
Credit: 2
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. To acquire information from different sources
2. To present a given topic in a seminar, discuss in a group discussion
3 To prepare report on industrial visit, expert lecture.
Objective:
Sl. No. The student will be able to
1. Acquire information from different sources
2. Prepare notes for given topic
3. Present given topic in a seminar
4 Interact with peers to share thoughts
5 Prepare a report on industrial visit, expert lecture
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Survey of different electrical industries
Activities
Sr . No. Activities Hours
1. Industrial / Field Visit : 12
Structured Field visits be arranged and report of the same should be
submitted by the individual student, to form part of the term work.
Visits to any one from the list below (should not have completed in earlier
semester):

i) A thermal power generating station

ii) A Hydel power generating station
iii) A Wind mill and / or Hybrid power station of wind and solar
iv) An electrical substation
v) A switchgear manufacturing / repair industry
vi) An Electrical machine manufacturing industry
vii) A large industry to study protection system
viii) Any Industry having Automation for manufacturing processes
 ix) A transformer repair Workshop
x) Industry of power electronics devices
xi) Maintenance department of a large industry.
xii) A Loco shed
xiii) Railway / metro railway signaling system
xiv) Transmission tower project area
xv) Any contemporary industry under MSME sector to understand detail of
operation and starting of a new venture.
xvi) Any other technical field area as may be found suitable alternative to
above list.

2. Guest Lecture by professional / industrial expert: 4

Lectures by Professional / Industrial Expert to be organized from any TWO
of the following areas (not covered in earlier semesters):

i) Modern trends in AC machine

ii) Automotive wiring and lighting
iii) Modern techniques in Power Generation
iv) New trends in power electronics devices
v)TQM
vi)Recent modification in IE rules
vii)Role of power factor improvement as a tool in reducing cost of
generation
viii) Digital metering
ix) Hydro power generation
x) Functioning of Electricity regulatory Commission.
xi)Introduction and application areas for MEMS (Micro Electromechanical
System)
xii) Interview techniques
xiii)Career opportunities for diploma engineers
xiv) Cyber crime & Cyber laws
xv)Social networking – effects & utilities
xvi) Ethical Hacking.
xvii) Industrial Dispute and Labour Laws
xviii)Entrepreneurship development and oppurtunities
xix) Role of micro, small and mediun enterprise. In Indian economy.

Individual report of the above lecture should be submitted by the

students.
3. Seminar / Poster presentation: 12
Students should either present in seminar or prepare poster on ANY ONE
topic as suggested below (should not be already done in earlier semester):

Students (Group of 4 to 5 students) have to search / collect information

about the topic through literature survey/ internet search / visit and
discussion with expert or concerned persons
 1. Magnetic Levitation system
2. Recent development in electrically operated vehicles for mass
development
3. Alternative fuel and energy options
4. Schemes of power generation in coming five years
5. Impact of load shedding on rural population
6. Embedded system
7. Computer security
8. Bio – technology
9. Scheme for setting up a new venture in MSME sector
10. Comparative study of Metro railway in Kolkata and Delhi
11. Brushless commutation of DC motors
12. Any other topic of present techno economic relevance as may be
decided by concerned teacher.
4. Group Discussion 12
The students should discuss in a group of six to eight students. Each group
to perform any TWO group discussions. Topics and time duration of the
group discussion to be decided by concerned teacher. Concerned teacher
may modulate the discussion so as to make the discussion a fruitful one. At
the end of each discussion each group will write a brief report on the topic
as discussed in the group discussion. Some of the suggested topics are –

i) Role of Electrical Engineer in Disaster management

ii) CNG Vs LPG as fuel
iii) Load shedding and remedial measures
iv) Rain water harvesting
v) Trends in energy conservation
vi) Safety in day to day life
vii) Energy saving in the institute
vii) Pollution control
viii) Any other common topic related to electrical field as directed by
concerned teacher.
5. Students’ Activities / mini project (any one): 8
i) Develop a website for your institute
ii) Animation project using c, c++, VB

ii) Prepare a report in open software Latex. Report should include text,
table, figure, mathematical expression, heading etc. all features of a
report.

iii) Make a list of all items required to assemble an updated version of

personal computer. Write technical specification, manufacturers' names,
cost of all the parts and prepare a comparative analysis to arrive at a
decision for final combination of items. Also make such list for required
external hardware/devices. Prepare a powerpoint presentation alongwith
the report. Students are encouraged to use open softwares for such
purpose.
 iv) The students in a group of 3 to 4 will collect information from market
regarding specification, cost, frame size of motors produced by different
manufacturers as available in the market for household pump motors,
industrial motors etc. They will submit individual report on the same.

EXAMINATION SCHEME (SESSIONAL)

1. Continuous internal assessment of 50 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the
Fifth semester. Distribution of marks: Activities =20, Group Discussion = 10, field visit = 10,

guest lecture attendance and report = 10

 W.B.S.C.T.E.
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR DIPLOMA COURSES
COURSE NAME: ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
COURSE CODE : EE
DURATION OF COURSE : 6 SEMESTERS
SEMESTER: SIXTH SEMESTER SCHEME : C
Sr.No SUBJECT PERIODS EVALUATION SCHEME
PR Credits
SESSIONSAL EXAM
PR(I (EX Credits
TA CT Total T.)
THEORY L T P ESE NT.)
Electrical Design Credits
1 Estimation & Costing 04 03 10 20 30 70 25 25 5
Electrical Installation ,
2 04 10 20 30 70 4
Maintenance , Testing

3 Industrial Project 05 50 50 3

4. Electrical Workshop II 03 25 25 1

4 Industrial Management 03 10 20 30 70 3

5 Elective II (Any One) 03 -- 03 10 20 30 70 25 25 4

Industrial Automation

Process Control

Control of Electrical
Machine

Computer Hardware &

Networking

6 Professional Practice -IV 04 50 2

7 General Viva voce 100 2
Total 14 18 40 80 120 280 275 125 24
STUDENT CONTACT HOURS PER WEEK: 32 HRS
THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH

ABBREVIATIONS: CT- Class Test, TA - Teachers Assessment, L - Lecture, T - Tutorial, PR (INT.) – Practical (Internal)
PR(EXT.)- Practical(External), ESE - End Semester Exam.

TA: Attendance & surprise quizzes = 6 marks. Assignment & group discussion = 4 marks.
Total Marks : 800
Minimum passing for sessional marks is 40%, and for theory subject 40%.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Subject: Electrical Design, Estimation & Costing

Subject Code: EE/S6/EDEC Semester: S6

Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks: 150
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 4 Hrs/Week Mid Semester Exam.: 20 Marks
Tutorial: Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks
Practical: 3 Hrs/week End Semester Exam.: 70 Marks
Credit: 5 Practical : 50 Marks
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. Electrical Diploma holders have to work as Technicians & Supervisors for Electrical
Installations of various companies, commercial and Industrial electrification schemes and
prepares estimates for these schemes.
2. Knowledge of electrical engineering drawing, IE rules, NEC, different types of electrical
Installation their design considerations equips the students with the capability to design and
prepare working drawing of different Installation projects.
3. Understanding of the methods and procedure of estimating the material is also required
Objective:
Sl. No. Student will be able to:
1. State IE rules, NEC related to Electrical Installation and testing
2. Interpret the Electrical Engineering Drawing
3. State and describe the basic terms, general rules, circuit design procedure, wiring design and
design considerations of Residential Electrical Installations,
4. Explain the sequence to be followed in carrying out the estimate of Residential Electrical
Installations.
5. Design of main dimensions of rotating machines.
6. Design of core and winding of a 3-phase transformer up to 200KVA
7. Understand the concept of contracts, contractors, tender and tender document and its
related procedures.

Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Basic Electrical Engineering
2. Engineering Graphics
Contents (Theory) Hrs./Unit Marks
Unit: 1 Standard Norms and Specifications: 04 06
Importance of Design-Estimation-Costing of
electrical equipments & installations, Concept of I.E.
Rules, Importance of Standards & Specifications for
electrical installation and equipments.
Indian Electricity Rules (1956):
Rule 28 : Voltage level definitions.
Rule 30: Service lines & apparatus on consumer
 premises.
Rule 31: Cut-out on consumer’s premises.
Rule46: Periodical inspection & testing of
consumer’s installation.
Rule 47: Testing of consumer’s installation.
Rule 54: Declared voltage of supply to consumer.
Rule 55: Declared frequency of supply to consumer.
Rule 56: Sealing of meters & cut-outs.
Rule 77: Clearances above ground of the lowest
conductor.
Rule 79: Clearances between conductors & trolley
wires.
Rule 87: Lines crossing or approaching each other.
Rule 88: Guarding.

Unit: 2 Design of Lighting circuits: 04 06

Illumination level required for various applications,
Factors considered for good lighting design,
Determination of number of lamps & selection of
lamp type, Design for placement of lamps in a room
for proper & uniform illumination. (Numerical)
Unit: 3 Service Connection 06 08
3.1 Concept of service connection.
3.2 Types of service connection & their features.
3.3 Methods of Installation of service connection.
3.4 Estimation of under ground & overhead
domestic service connections. (Numerical)
Unit: 4 Residential Building Electrification 10 10
4.1 General rules guidelines for wiring of
Residential Installation and positioning of
equipments.
4.2 Principles of circuit design in lighting and
power circuits.
4.3 Procedures for designing the circuits and
deciding the number of sub- circuits.
4.4 Method of drawing single line diagram &
wiring diagram
4.5 Selection of type of wiring and rating of wires &
cables.
4.6 Selection of rating of main switch, distributions
board, protective switchgear ELCB, MCB and wiring
accessories.
4.7 Earthing of Residential Installation.
4.8 Sequence to be followed for preparing
Estimation of wiring.
4.9 Preparation of detailed estimates and costing as
per PWD schedule of electrification of Residential
Installation. (Numerical)
Unit: 5 Electrification of commercial Installation 12 12
5.1 Concept of commercial Installation.
5.2 Differentiate between electrification of
Residential and commercial Installation (shopping
 mall, Office complex)
5.3 Fundamental considerations for planning of an
electrical Installation system for shopping
mall/office complex.
5.4 Design considerations of electrical Installation
system for air conditioned shopping mall/office
complex.
5.4.1 Load calculations & selection of accessories for
connection.
5.4.2 Deciding the size of cables, busbar and busbar
chambers.
5.4.3 Mounting arrangements and positioning of
switchboards, distribution boards main switch etc.
5.4.4 Earthing of the electrical Installation
5.5 Selection of type wiring system & layout.
5.6 Sequence to be followed to estimate of wiring.
5.7 Preparation of detailed estimate and costing as
per PWD schedule of electrification of shopping
mall/office complex.
Unit: 6 Electrification of factory unit Installation 10 10
6.1 Important guidelines about power wiring and
Motor wiring.
6.2 Design consideration of Electrical Installation
in small Industry/Factory/workshop.
6.2.1. Motor current calculations.
6.2.2. Selection and rating of wire, cable size.
6.2.3 Deciding fuse rating, starter, distribution
boards main switch etc.
6.2.4. Deciding the cable route, determination of
length of wire, cable, conduit, earth wire, and
earthing.
6.3 Sequence to be followed to prepare estimate.
6.4 Preparations of detailed estimate and costing
as per present market rate of small factory
unit/workshop.
Unit: 7 Design of Electrical Transformer: 10 10

a) Single phase transformer up to 1 KVA-

Core Design, Selection of stamping, winding design,
window area calculation. (Numerical)
b) 3-phase transformer up to 250 KVA -
Basic design principles and approaches,
Specification, Magnetic circuit, Output equations
and Output Co-efficient, Core construction and
design, Window design, Winding design, Size of
tank, Winding temperature rise, Insulation classes,
Cooling methods. (Numericals)
Unit: 8 Contracts, Tenders and Execution 08 08
8.1 Concept of contracts and Tenders
8.1.1 Contracts, types of contracts, contractors.
8.1.2 Valid Contracts, Contract documents.
8.1.3 Tender and tender notices.
8.1.4 Procedure for submission and opening
 tenders.
8.1.5 Comparative statements, criteria for selecting
contractors, General conditions in order form.
8.2 Principles of Execution of works
8.2.1 Administrative approval, Technical sanctions.
8.2.2. Billing of executed work.
Total 64 70
Contents (Practical)
Sl. No. Skills to be developed
1. Intellectual Skills: i) Analytical Skill
ii) Identification skill
2. Motor Skills: i) Operate various parts of computer properly.
ii) Problem solving skill.
Suggested list of Laboratory Experiments:
Sl. No. Laboratory Experiments
1. A newly constructed workshop is required to be fitted with a 10 H.P. Squirel cage induction motor.
I) Draw Installation plan showing location of main control board, motor control board,
motor etc, (using CAD)

ii) Draw single line wiring diagram. (using CAD)

iii) Draw wiring diagram starting from energy meter upto electric motor. (using CAD)

2. Draw Single line diagram and layout plan of 11KV indoor Substation (using CAD)
3. Draw Sectional Drawing of different types of cables, overhead conductors (using CAD)
4. Draw Sectional Drawing of different types of insulators (using CAD)
5. Draw Core construction, H.T. & L.T. winding, other accessories of 3 phase transformer (using CAD).
6. Draw pole, yoke , field coils, commutator and its details of D.C. Machine (using CAD).
7. Draw transmission line structure (using CAD)
Text Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
K.B. Raina Electrical Design; Estimating and New Age International
S.K.Bhattacharya costing (p) Limited, New Delhi
Surjit Singh Electrical Estimating and costing Dhanpat Rai and
company, New Delhi
J.B.Gupta A course in Electrical Installation, S.K.Kataria & sons
Estimating & costing
S.L. Uappal Electrical wiring Estimating and Khanna Publication.
costing
A.K.Sawhney Electrical Machine Design Danpat Rai & co.

The Electricity Rule 2005 Universal Law Publishing

Co. Pvt. Ltd.
N. Alagappan Electrical Estimating and costing Tata Mc Graw Hill
S. Ekambaram Publication, New Delhi
Surjit Singh Electrical Engineering Drawing S.K.Kataria & Sons
 E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORITICAL)
GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL

SET ANSWERE PER MARK SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS
D QUESTION S

A 1, 2, 12 FIVE FIVE, TAKING AT

3,4,5 LEAST TWO
TWENTY ONE 1 X 20 FROM EACH TEN 10 X 5
B 6,7,8 11 = 20 FOUR GROUP = 50

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been allotted in
each unit and set the paper accordingly so that all units get the importance as allotted.

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)
1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the Sixth
Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job – 15, Notebook(Drawing Sheet)– 10.
2. External Assessment of 25 marks shall be held at the end of the Sixth Semester on the entire Sessional
syllabus. One Drawing sheet from any one of the above is to be drawn. Distribution of marks: On spot job – 15,
Viva-voce – 10.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Subject : Electrical Installation , Maintenance , Testing

Subject Code: EE/S6/EIMT Semester: SIXTH
Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks: 150
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 4 Hrs/week Mid Semester Exam.: 20 Marks
Tutorial: Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks
Practical: 3 Hrs/Week End Semester Exam.: 70 Marks
Credit: Practical : NIL
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. This is technology level subject with application in Industry, commercial, public utility
departments such as PWD, Electricity Board etc.
2. After studying this subject student will be able to inspect, test, install & commission electrical
machines as per IS .
Objective:
Sl. No. The student will be able to:
1. • Know safety measures & state safety precautions.
2. • Test single phase, three phase transformer, DC & AC machine as per IS.
3. • Identify / Locate common troubles in electrical machines & switch gear.
4. • Plan & carry out routine & preventive maintenance.
5. • Install LV switchgear & maintain it.
6. • Ascertain the condition of insulation & varnishing if necessary.
7. • Identify faults & measures to repair faults.
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Knowledge of electrical equipments
Contents (Theory) Hrs./Unit Marks
Unit: 1 Safety & Prevention of Accidents: 05 05
1.1 Definition of terminology used in safety
1.2 I.E. Act & statutory regulations for safety of persons & equipments
working with electrical installation
1.3 Dos & don’ts for substation operators as listed in IS.
1.4 Meaning & causes of electrical accidents factors on which severity
of shock depends,
1.5 Procedure for rescuing the person who has received an electric
shock, methods of providing artificial respiration,
1.6 Precautions to be taken to avoid fire due to electrical reasons,
operation of fire extinguishers
Unit: 2 General Introduction: 05 05
2.1 Objectives of testing significance of I.S.S. concept of tolerance,
routine tests, type tests, special tests.
2.2 Methods of testing a) Direct, b) Indirect, c) Regenerative.
2.3 Classification and need of maintenance
2.4 Advantages of preventive maintenance, procedure for developing
 preventive maintenance schedule,
2.5 Factors affecting preventive maintenance schedule.
2.6 Introduction to total productive maintenance.
Unit: 3 Testing & maintenance of rotating machines: 10 10
3.1 Type tests, routine tests & special tests of 1 & 3 phase Induction
motors,
3.2 Routine, Preventive, & breakdown maintenance of 1 & 3 phase
Induction motors as per IS 9001:1992
3.3 Parallel operation of alternators, Maintenance schedule of
alternators & synchronous machines as per IS 4884-1968
3.4 Brake test on DC Series motor.
Unit: 4 Testing & maintenance of Transformers: 10 10
4.1Listing type test, routine test & special test as per I.S. 2026-1981
4.2 Procedure for conducting following tests:
Impedance voltage, load losses, Insulation resistance, Induced over
voltage withstand test, Impulse voltage withstand test, Temperature
rise test of oil & winding, Different methods of determining temp
rise- back to back test, open delta (delta – delta) test.
4.3 Preventive maintenance & routine maintenance of distribution
transformer as per I.S. 10028(part III): 1981
Unit: 5 Testing & maintenance of Insulation: 08 10
5.1 Classification of insulating materials as per I.S. 8504(part III)
1994.
5.2 Factors affecting life of insulating materials.
5.3 Methods of measuring temperature of internal parts of windings/
machines & applying the correction factor when the machine is hot.
5.4 Properties of good transformer oil. List the agents which
contaminates the insulating oil.
5.5 Understand the procedure of following tests on oil as per I.S.
1692-1978
a) acidity test b) sludge test c) crackle test d) flash point test.
5.6Filtration of insulating oil
5.7 Protection of electrical insulation during the period of inactivity.
5.8 Methods of cleaning the insulation covered with loose, dry dust,
sticky dirt, & oily viscous films, procedure for cleaning washing &
drying of insulation & revarnishing.
5.9 Methods of internal heating & vacuum impregnation.
Unit: 6 Trouble shooting of Electrical Machines & Switch gear: 08 10
6.1Significance of trouble shooting of various electrical machines and
describes the procedure for the same.
6.2 Various types of faults (mechanical, electrical & magnetic) in
electrical machines and reason for their occurrence.
6.3 Use of following tools: Bearing puller, Filler gauge, dial indicator,
spirit level, growler.
6.4 Trouble shooting charts for Single & 3-phase induction motor,
Single & 3- phase transformer.
6.5 List the common troubles in HV and LV switchgear, contactors &
batteries.
Unit: 7 Installation: 12 10
7.1 Inspection procedure of Machine Installation.
7.2 Factors involved in designing the machine foundation,
7.3 Requirement of different dimension of foundation for static &
rotating machines procedure for levelling & alignment of two shafts
of directly & indirectly coupled drives, effects of misalignment.
7.4 Installation of rotating machines as per I.S. 900-1992.
 7.5 Use of various devices & tools in loading & unloading, lifting,
carrying heavy equipment.
7.6 Method of drying out of Machines.
7.7 Classification of transmission tower
7.8 Installation of Transmission Tower (From foundation to complete
erection).
Unit: 8 Earthing: 06 10
6.1 Introduction & importance.
6.2 Step potential & Touch potential.
6.3 Factors affecting Earth Resistance.
6.4 Methods of earthing
6 .5 Substation and Transmission Tower earthing
6.6 Transformer Neutral Earthing.
Total 64 70
Text Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
Tarlok Sibgh Installation, Commissioning & S.K.Kataria & Sons
Maintenance of Electrical
Equipment
B.V.S.Rao Operatin & Maintenance of Media Promoters &
Electrical Machines Vol I & II Publisher Ltd. Mumbai

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORITICAL)
GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL

SET ANSWERE PER MARK SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS
D QUESTION S

A 1, 2, 12 FIVE FIVE, TAKING AT

3,4,5 LEAST TWO
TWENTY ONE 1 X 20 FROM EACH TEN 10 X 5
B 6,7,8 11 = 20 FOUR GROUP = 50

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been allotted in
each unit and set the paper accordingly so that all units get the importance as allotted.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Course: Electrical Workshop II

Course Code: EE/S6/WSII Semester: SIXTH

Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks: 50

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: Practical : 50 Marks
Tutorial:
Practical: 3 hrs./week
Credit: 1 (One)
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. A technician should carry out routine & preventive maintenance of electrical machines &
possesses knowledge of Indian Electricity Act, safety rules, safety of machines & persons,
prevention of accident. He/She should also able to repair various appliences.
Objective:
Sl. No.
1. • Identify / Locate common troubles in electrical machines & switch gear.

2. • Plan & carry out routine & preventive maintenance.

3. • Ascertain the condition of insulation & varnishing if necessary.

4. • Identify faults & measures to repair faults.

Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Knowledge of electrical equipments and accessories.
Contents (Practical)
Suggested list of Practicals/Exercises:
Sl. No. Practicals/Exercises
1. To Demonstrate various components of D.O.L., Star-Delta and Auto Transformer Starter.

2. To prepare a report on specifications of earthing at different substations/different locations

& new trends in earthing schemes.

3. To observe & carry out periodic maintenance of D.C & A.C. motor in your workshop or
laboratories & prepare its report

4. To prepare trouble-shooting chart & carry out maintenance of a single and three phase
transformers
5. To prepare trouble-shooting chart & carry out maintenance of single and three phase
induction motors
6. To prepare trouble-shooting chart for HV and LV Switch Gear
 7. To carry out filtration of insulating oil and measure Break Down Voltage.
8.
Dismantling, assembly, testing, preparation of list of components, parts for: (any four)

i) D.C. compound motor

ii) 3 phase Induction motor.

iii) Geyser.

iv) UPS / Inverters / battery chargers

v) Microwave Ovens

vi) Semi automatic & fully automatic washing machine

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)
1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the Sixth
Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job – 15, Laboratory Notebook – 10.
2. External Assessment of 25 marks shall be held at the end of the Sixth Semester on the entire Sessional
syllabus. One Experiment per student from any one of the above is to be performed. Experiment is to be set by
lottery system. Distribution of marks: On spot job – 15, Viva-voce – 10.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Subject : ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PROJECTS

Subject Code: EE/S6/EEP Semester: Sixth
Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks:
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: Mid Semester Exam.: Marks
Tutorial: Assignment & Quiz: Marks
Practical: 5 hrs/week End Semester Exam.: Marks
Credit: 03 Practical : 100 Marks
Aim:
Sl. No.
1.
This subject is intended to teach students to understand facts, concepts and techniques of
electrical equipments, its repairs, fault finding and testing, estimation of cost and procurement of
material, fabrication and manufacturing of various items used in electrical field
2. This will help the students to acquire skills and attitudes so as to discharge the function of
supervisor in industry and can start his own small-scale enterprise
Objective:
Sl. No.
1. • Develop leadership qualities.
2. • Analyze the different types of Case studies.
3. • Develop Innovative ideas.
4. • Develop basic technical Skills by hands on experience.
5. • Write project report.
6. • Develop skills to use latest technology in Electrical field.
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Knowledge of subjects up to 5th Semester of Electrical Engineering
2.
Contents

This subject is the continuation of the part of Industrial Project of subject “INDUSTRIAL PROJECT AND

ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT “ studied in 5th Semester. Following activities related to project

are required to be dealt with, during this semester.

1 . Each project batch should carry out the actual Project works which have been approved in Fifth

Semester.

2.At the end of this semester each project batch should prepare the detailed project report &

submit the same to respective guide.

 The list of projects are same as in 5th semester which are as follows:

Group Projects
1 (1) Design of Rural Electrification Scheme for small
Village, Colony.
(2) Energy Conservation and Audit.
(3) Substation Model (Scaled)
(4) Wind Turbine Model (Scaled)
( 5) Pole Mounted Substation Model (Scaled)
(6) Conduct load survey to ascertain the total
load requirements of a locality /
polytechnic.
(7) Any other items as may be assigned by the
teacher concerned.
2 (1) Rewinding of Three Phase/Single Phase
Induction Motor.
(2) Rewinding of Single Phase Transformer.
(3) Fabrication of Inverter up to 1000 VA.
(4) Fabrication of Battery Charger.
(5) Fabrication of Small Wind Energy System for
Battery Charging.
(6) Fabrication of Solar Panel System for Battery
Charging.
(7)Fabrication of Water level controller.
(8)Fabrication of DC motor speed control
circuit by SCRs.
(9) Microprocessor/ Micro controller Based
Projects.
(10) Simulation Projects using Matlab.
(11) Any other items as may be assigned by the
teacher concerned.

Continuous Internal Assessment of 50 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the semesters.
Distribution of marks: Project Work – 25, Project Report Presentation – 15, Viva-voce – 10.

External assessment of 50 marks shall be held at the end of the Sixth Semester on the entire Project Work.
The external examiner is to be from Industry / Engineering College / University / Government Organisation.
Distribution of marks: Project Work - 25, Project Report Presentation – 15, Viva-voce – 10.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Subject : Industrial Management

Subject Code: EE/S6/IM Semester: Sixth
Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks:
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 3 hrs/week Mid Semester Exam.: 20 Marks
Tutorial: Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks
Practical: End Semester Exam.: 70 Marks
Credit: 03 Practical : NIL Marks
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. To study the techniques for improvement in productivity of the people and equipment. to plan
the production schedule accordingly organize material supply for the manufacturing activities.
To minimize the direct and indirect cost by optimizing the use of resources available. To learn
accounting process, inventory control and process planning. Modern manufacturing system
employ techniques such as JIT, TPM , FMS, 5’S’, kaizen which should be known to the
technician.
Objective:
Sl. No. The student will able to
1. Familiarize environment in the world of work
2. Explain the importance of management process in Business.
3. Identify various components of management
4. Describe Role & Responsibilities of a Technician in an Organizational Structure.
5. Apply various rules and regulations concerned with Business & Social Responsibilities
of the Technician
Pre-Requisite: NIL
Contents (Theory) Hrs./Unit Marks
GROUP A
Overview Of Business 04
01 1.1. Types of Business
Service
Manufacturing
Trade
1.2. Industrial sectors
Introduction to
Engineering industry
Process industry
Textile industry
Chemical industry
Agro industry
1.3 Globalization
Introduction
Advantages & disadvantages w.r.t. India
1.4 Intellectual Property Rights (I.P.R.)
02 Management Process 05
2.1 What is Management?
 Evolution
Various definitions
Concept of management
Levels of management
Administration & management
Scientific management by F.W.Taylor
2.2 Principles of Management (14 principles of
Henry Fayol)
2.3 Functions of Management
Planning
Organizing
Directing
Controlling
2.4 Social responsibility and Environmental
dimension of management
GROUP:B
03 Organizational Management 06
3.1 Organization :-
Definition
Steps in organization
3.2 Types of organization
Line
Line & staff
Functional
Project
3.3 Departmentation
Centralized & Decentralized
Authority & Responsibility
Span of Control
3.4 Forms of ownership
Propriotership
Partnership
Joint stock
Co-operative Society
Govt. Sector
04 Human Resource Management 10
4.1 Personnel Management
Introduction
Definition
Objectives
Functions
4.2 Staffing
Introduction to HR Planning
Recruitment Procedure
4.3 Personnel– Training & Development
Types of training
Induction
Skill Enhancement
4.4 Grievance handling
4.5 Leadership & Motivation
Maslow’s Theory of Motivation
4.6 Safety Management
Causes of accident
Safety precautions
4.7 Introduction to –
Factory Act
 ESI Act
Workmen Compensation Act
Industrial Dispute Act
GROUP:C
05 Financial Management 09
5.1. Financial Management- Objectives & Functions
5.2. Capital Generation & Management
Types of Capitals
Sources of raising Capital
5.3. Budgets and accounts
Types of Budgets
Production Budget (including Variance Report )
Labour Budget
Different financial ratios.

Introduction to Profit & Loss Account ( only

concepts) ;
Balance Sheet
5.4 Introduction to –
Excise Tax
Service Tax
Income Tax
VAT
Custom Duty
06 Materials Management 09
6.1. Inventory Management (No Numerical)
Meaning & Objectives
6.2 ABC Analysis
6.3 Economic Order Quantity(EOQ)
6.4 Stores function, Stores system, BIN card,
Materials issue request(MIR), Pricing of materials
Introduction & Graphical Representation
6.4 Purchase Procedure
Objects of Purchasing
Functions of Purchase Dept.
Steps in Purchasing
6.5 Modern Techniques of Material Management
Introductory treatment to JIT / SAP / ERP
07 Safety Engineering 05
7.1 Accidents-causes of accidents, Welfare
measures.
7.2 Need for safety
7.3 Organization for safety
7.4 Safety committee
7.5 Safety programmes
7.6 Safety measures

Total 48
Text Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
Dr. O.P. Khanna Industrial Engg & Dhanpat Rai & sons New
Management Delhi
V.Arun Viswanath, Industrial Engineering and SCITECh Publication(s) Pvt.
Anoop. S. Nair, Management Ltd
S.L.Sabu
 A. Bhat & A. Kumar Management Principles, Oxford University Press
Processes & Practices
Dr. S.C. Saksena Business Administration & Sahitya Bhavan Agra
Management
W.H. Newman The process of Management Prentice- Hall
E.Kirby Warren
Andrew R. McGill
Rustom S. Davar Industrial Management Khanna Publication

Banga & Sharma Industrial Organisation & Khanna Publication

Management
Jhamb & Bokil Industrial Management Everest Publication , Pune

Suggested List of Assignments/Tutorial :-

1. Preparation of financial budget of any organization.

2. Preparation of chart for fire safety.

3. Preparation of chart for personal, Tools & Equipments and products safety.

4. Preparation of chart to avoid accident.

5. Preparation of chart to show the different financial ratios.

6. Preparation of chart to show the different types of organization.

End Semester Examination Scheme. Maximum Marks-70, Time Allotted-3 hrs

Group unit Objective Questions Subjective Questions

No. of Total No. of To answer Marks per Total

questions marks questions question marks
to be set to be set

A 01,02 7 3

5, taking at
least one
B 03,04 7 25 3 from each 10 50
group

C 05,06,07 11 4

Note : For any modification of contents please refer www.webscte.org/syllabus.html

of “Industrial Management”
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the subject: INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION (Elective)

Subject Code: EE/S6/IA (EL) Semester: Sixth

Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks: 150

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory : 3 hrs/week Mid Semester Exam: 20 Marks
Tutorial: - hrs/week Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks
Practical : 2 hrs/week End Semester Exam: 70 Marks
Credit: 04 Practical : 50 Marks
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. To explain applications of control systems / Automation
2. Design & program PLC using Ladder logic.
3. To study working of control components
Objective:
Sl. No. Student will be able to
1. • Explain applications of control systems / Automation.
2. • Explain the hydraulic/ pneumatic systems.
3. • Describe & program PLC using Ladder logic.
4. • Describe working of control components.
5. • Draw power & control circuit.

Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Control system
2. Basic Electronics
3. AC, DC motors
Contents (Theory) Hrs./Unit Marks
Unit: 1 Automation 02
1.1 Need of automation
1.2 Advantages of automation
1.3 Requirements of automation
Unit: 2 Control System
2.1 Use of control system in automation.
2.2 Different types of control system in automation.
2.3 Development of block diagram for simple applications like 04 04
level, temperature, flow, speed control.
Unit: 3 Control System Components
3.1 Contacts-types, current capacity & load utilization categories
3.2 Solenoids-dc, ac
3.3 I/P devices- switches-push buttons, foot switch, selector
switch, pilot switch, proximity, photoelectric, temperature 08 12
actuated, level control, pressure sensing, overload sensing
3.4 Relays- electromechanical, reed
3.5 O/P devices- contactors, valves, pilot lamps
3.6 Symbols in power & control circuits
3.7 Developing control circuit-basic & thumb rule
3.8 Power & control circuit for different applications like hoist,
crane, conveyer belt, induction motors
Unit: 4 Application of Electrical Actuators in control system:
4.1 Potentiometers in control system.
4.2 Servomotors-AC & DC with their working principle. 08 10
4.3 Synchros - Transmitter, Control transformer, use as error
detector.
4.4 Stepper motor-PM & variable reluctance- working principle.
4.5 Tacho generator – AC & DC.
4.6 Applications of above components as AC/DC control system.
Unit: 5 Controllers
5.1 Hydraulic-advantages & disadvantages, hydraulic servomotor,
types of pumps used, control valves, components like
accumulator, filter, seals
5.2 Pneumatic-resistance & capacitance of pressure system, 08 10
pneumatic flapper-nozzle system, pneumatic relays,
actuating valves, cylinders, comparison between pneumatic &
hydraulic systems
5.3 Electrical & electronic controller- lead-lag networks.
5.4 Digital controllers-brief overview of microprocessor & micro-
controller to be worked as controller
Unit: 6 Control actions
6.1 On-Off, P, I, P+I, P+D,P+I+D, actions 06 10
6.2 P+I+D action using hydraulic, pneumatic electronic controller
6.3 Tuning of P+I+D controller
Unit: 7 Programmable Logic Controller
7.1 Role of PLC in automation.
7.2 PLC Vs PC in automation. 08 10
7.4 Block diagram of PLC.
7.5 Basic blocks like CPU, I/O modules, bus system, power
supplies & remote I/Os.
7.6 Different PLC′s available in market.
Unit: 8 Programming of PLC
8.1 Development of Ladder logic
8.2 Some simple programs such as I/O connections, starting of IM, 02 10
stepper motor control.

Unit: 9 Introduction to special control systems

9.1 Distributed Control System(DCS)-brief introduction to 02 04
hardware & software used
9.2 SCADA- brief introduction to hardware & software used.
Total 48 70
Contents (Practical)
Sl. No. Skills to be developed
 1.
Intellectual Skills: a. Logical development
b. Programming skills

2.
Motor Skills: a. Interpretation skills
b. Connecting properly

List of Practical: (At least Eight experiments are to be performed)

Sl. No.
1.
a) To plot the characteristics of potentiometer.
b) Use of potentiometer as error detector.
2. To plot V-I characteristics of DC & AC servomotors. compare them with DC & AC motor
characteristics.
3.
a) To plot the characteristics of synchro transmitter.
b) Use of synchro transmitter- control transformer pair as error detector.
4.
To measure step angle of a stepper motor in forward & reverse direction.
5. Observe various components /parts/symbols/connections of a PLC.
6. To perform Forward and Reverse operation of 3 phase Induction Motor using PLC.
7. To perform stepper motor/ temperature control using PLC.
8.
To Identify the parts of hydraulic/ pneumatic servomotor from cut-section/model.
9. To build P, I, PI, PD & PID controller using op-amps & R-C circuits. Plot V-I characteristics.

Text Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
Nagrath Gopal Control System Engg. Wiley Eastern
K.Ogata Modern Control Engg. Prentice Hall
Jacob Industrial Control Engg Prentice Hall
Andrew Parr Hydraulics & Pneumatics Jaico Publication
Programmable Logic Controller:
Webb & Reis Principle applications Wiley Eastern
S.K. Bhattachrya Control of Electrical Machines New Age International
Brijinder Singh Publishers
Jon stenerson Industrial automation and process Prentice Hall
control
Richad Shell Handbook of Industrial automation Taylor and Francis
 E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORITICAL)
GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL

SET ANSWERE PER MARK SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS
D QUESTION S

A 1, 2, 3,4 11 FOUR FIVE, TAKING AT

LEAST TWO
B 5,6,7,8,9 12 TWENTY ONE 1 X 20 FIVE FROM EACH TEN 10 X 5
= 20 GROUP = 50

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been allotted in
each unit and set the paper accordingly so that all units get the importance as allotted.

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)
3. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the Sixth
Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job – 15, Laboratory Notebook – 10.
4. External Assessment of 25 marks shall be held at the end of the Sixth Semester on the entire Sessional
syllabus. One Experiment per student from any one of the above is to be performed. Experiment is to be set by
lottery system. Distribution of marks: On spot job – 15, Viva-voce – 10.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the subject : Control of Electrical Machines (Elective)

Subject Code : EE/S6/CEM(EL) Semester : Sixth
Duration : One Semester Maximum Marks : 150
Teaching scheme : Examination scheme :
Theory: 3 Hrs./ Week Mid Semester Exam: 20 Marks
Practical: 2 Hrs./ Week Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks
End Semester Exam: 70 Marks
Practical: 50 Marks
Credit: 04

Aim:
Sl. No.
1. This subject is the combination of Electrical machine and Control system. Most of the motor
control circuits are based on these systems.
2. Understanding of the subject will provide skill to the students of different motor control
systems and their applications in industry.

Objective:
Sl. No. Student will be able to:
1. Interpret the basics of the motor control systems.
2. Demonstrate the solid state control of motor.
3. Describe the implementation of PLC in control systems.

Pre-Requisite:
1. Knowledge of Electrical machine.
2. Knowledge of Control system.

Contents (Theory): Hrs./Unit Marks

Unit : 1 1. Control Systems : 08 12

1.1 Concept of Automatic control system.
1.2 Illustration of Open loop and closed loop control system.
1.3 Need for feed back system.
1.4 Basic elements of a servo mechanism.
1.5 Examples of Automatic control system.
1.6 Introduction to solid state control.
1.7 Advantages of solid state control of machines.

Unit : 2 2. Magnetic Control Systems: 10 14

2.1 Operation & Applications of Contactor control circuit
components –
(i) Switches – Push button type, Selector type, Limit switch,
Pressure, Float type, Proximity, Thermostat (Temperature)
(ii) Fuses – Kit-kat type, Cartridge type, HRC type
(iii) MCCB, MCB.
(iv) Electromagnetic Contactor.
(v) Overload relays – Voltage operated, Current operated,
Thermal overload relay, Magnetic overload relay,
(vi) Time delay relays (OFF delay, ON delay).
(vii) Timer – Pnumatic type, Electronic type.
 (viii) Relays –Frequency response relay, Latching relay, Phase
failure relay (single phase preventer), Solid state relay.
(ix) Solenoid valve.
2.2 Principles of design of motor control circuits and power
circuits.

Unit : 3 3. MAGNETIC CONTROL OF DC MOTOR: 10 14

3.1 Operation of Control circuit & Power circuits of -
(i) Jogging operation of DC motor in one and two directions.
(ii) Starters of DC motor - Current limit accleration starter, Series
relay & Counter emf starter, Definite time accleration starter.
(iii) Braking of DC motor - Dynamic braking , Reversing &
plugging.
(iv) Protection of DC motor - Field failure protection circuit, Field
accleration protection circuit, Field deceleration circuit.

3.2 Solid State Control of DC Motor :

(i) Speed control of DC motor using chopper circuit.
(ii) Speed control of DC shunt motor using thyristor- Half-wave
drives & Full-wave drives.

Unit : 4 4. MAGNETIC CONTROL OF AC MOTOR: 10 14

4.1 Operation of Control circuit & Power circuits of -
(i) Reversing the direction of rotation of induction motor with
Interlocking systems
(ii) Simple ON-OFF motor control circuit,
(iii) Automatic Sequencial control of motor.
(iv) DOL starter,
(v) Automatic Auto-transformer starter,
(vi) Automatic Star-Delta starter.
(vii) Starter for multispeed operation of motor.
(viii) Plugging & Dynamic braking of AC motor.
(ix) Protection of AC motor – Overload, Short circuit and Over
temperature protection of high rating motors.

4.2 Solid State Control of AC Motor:

(i) Speed control of three phase induction motor using variable
voltage frequency control,
(ii) Speed control of slip-ring induction motor using variable rotor
circuit resistance.
(iii) Speed control of single phase induction motor using
thyristor.
(iv) Speed control of synchronous motor.
(v) Speed control of universal motor.

Unit : 5 5. Use of Programmable Logic Control (PLC): 10 16

5.1 Introduction & Advantages of PLC.
5.2 Function of each part of PLC.
5.3 Hardware of PLC.
5.4 Concept of Ladder diagram in PLC programming.
5.5 Ladder logic diagram for –
(i) DOL starter of Induction motor,
(ii) Automatic Star-Delta starter of Induction motor,
(iii) Sequential operation of three motors with a time gap,
(iv) Fluid filling operation.
5.6 Use of PLC in closed loop control, Proportional control,
 Integral control, Derivative control & PID control with illustration.
5.7 DC motor speed control using PLC programming.

Total 48 70

Practical:
Skills to be developed:

Intellectual Skills:
1. To select appropriate component and equipment.
2. Apply different designing skills.

Motor Skills:
1. Ability to draw the control & power circuit diagrams.
2. Ability to interpret the circuits and waveforms.

List of Practical: (At least Eight experiments are to be performed)

1. To study control components - Electromagnetic contactor, Thermal overload relay, Timer (OFF delay,
On delay), Push button Switches, Solenoid valve, MCB.

2. To make & test the control and power circuit for Jogging operation, forward & reverse rotation of
Sq.cage induction motor using contactor control.

3. To make & test the control and power circuit for fully-automatic star-delta starter operation of cage
induction motor using contactor control.

4. To make & test the control circuit for dynamic braking operation of induction motor using contactor
control.

5. To make & test the working of single phase preventer using contactor control.

6. To control speed of DC shunt motor using SCR drive.

7. To make & test the control circuit operation of DOL starter of induction motor using PLC.

8. To make & test the control circuit operation of automatic star-delta starter of induction motor using
PLC.

9. To study the Speed control of DC shunt motor with PID control using PLC.

10. To make & test the control circuit operation of three sequential motor operations using PLC.

List of Text Books:

Sl. No. Name of Author Title of the Books Name of Publisher

1. S.K.Bhattacharya Industrial Electronics and Control T.M.H.

2. Dr. S.K.Sen Electrical Machine Khanna Publisher
3. V. Subrahmanyam Electric Drives – concepts & T.M.Hill
applications
4 Petruzella Programmable Logic Controller T.M.Hill
 E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORITICAL)
GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL

SET ANSWERE PER MARK SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS
D QUESTION S

A 1, 2, 3 12 FIVE FIVE, TAKING AT

LEAST TWO
B 4,5 11 TWENTY ONE 1 X 20 FOUR FROM EACH TEN 10 X 5
= 20 GROUP = 50

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been allotted in
each unit and set the paper accordingly so that all units get the importance as allotted.

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)
1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the Sixth
Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job – 15, Laboratory Notebook – 10.
2. External Assessment of 25 marks shall be held at the end of the Sixth Semester on the entire Sessional
syllabus. One Experiment per student from any one of the above is to be performed. Experiment is to be set by
lottery system. Distribution of marks: On spot job – 15, Viva-voce – 10.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the subject : Process Control & Instrumentation (Elective)

Subject Code : EE/S6/PC(EL) Semester : Sixth
Duration : One Semester Maximum Marks : 150
Teaching scheme : Examination scheme :
Theory: 3 Hrs./ Week Mid Semester Exam: 20 Marks
Practical: 2 Hrs./ Week Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks
End Semester Exam: 70 Marks
Practical: 50 Marks
Credit: 04

Aim:
Sl. No.
1. This subject is the combination of control system and instrumentation. Most of the subjects
of Electrical Engineering are based on these systems.
2. Understanding of the subject will provide skill to the students of different process control
systems and their use in industry.

Objective:
Sl. No. Student will be able to:
1. Know about the basics of the process control systems.
2. Know about the digital Data Acquisition System.
3. Learn about the use of PLC in control systems.
4. Know about the digital Data Transmission Systems.

Pre-Requisite:
1. Knowledge of control system.
2. Knowledge of Instrumentation.

Contents (Theory): Hrs./Unit Marks

Unit : 1 1. Process Control System: 10 14

1.1 Introduction to the terminology of process control system –
Balanced condition, Self-regulation, Process disturbance,
Process time lag, Process reaction curve.
1.2 Block diagram of a process control system.
1.3 Realization of control actions using P, PI, PD, PID controller.
1.4 P, I, D actions with Pneumatic, Hydraulic and Electronic
systems, Amplifiers.
1.5 Concept of Feedback and feed forwards control systems,
Ratio control, Cascade control.
1.6 Control valves and Actuator.

Unit : 2 2. Measurement of Non Electrical Quantity: 10 14

2.1 Basic requirements of a transducer.
2.2 Measurement of Pressure:
Manometer, Bellows, Bourdon tube, Capacitance type
differential pressure transducer.
2.3 Measurement of Temperature:
Resistance temperature detector, Thermocouple, Pyrometer.
2.4 Measurement of Flow:
Rotameter, Electromagnetic flow meter, Hot wire anemometer.
 2.5 Measurement of liquid level.
2.6 Measurement of Humidity - Hygrometer.
2.7 Measurement of Viscosity.
2.8 Gas analyser.
2.9 Measurement of pH.

Unit : 3 3. Data Acquisition System: 10 12

3.1 Basic components of Data Acquisition System.
3.2 Components of a PC-based Data Acquisition System.
3.3 Analog input & output subsystem.
3.4 Digital input & output subsystem.
3.5 Single channel data acquisition system.
3.6 Multi channel data acquisition system.
3.7 Concept of Distributed Control System (DCS, DDC).
3.8 IEEE 488 Interface.

Unit : 4 4. Data Transmission Element / Telemetry: 06 12

4.1 Land line telemetry
4.2 Voltage and current telemetering, two wire current
transmitter.
4.3 Time division multiplexing, synchros, modem, synchronous
and asynchronous communication.
4.4 RF telemetry.
4.5 Modulation methods –
Amplitude modulation, Frequency modulation, Pulse width
modulation.
4.6 Pulse code modulation (PAM) Telemetry.

Unit : 5 5. Spectrum Analyzer: 06 08

5.1 Basic principle.
5.2 Block diagram.
5.3 Low cost Spectrum Analyser.
5.4 Experiments with low cost components.
5.5 Concept of spectrum analysis software.

Unit : 6 6. Use of Programmable Logic Control (PLC) in process 06 10

control:
6.1 Introduction & Advantages of PLC.
6.2 Function of each part of PLC.
6.3 Hardware of PLC.
6.4 PLC operation & Program execution.
6.5 Application of PLC in process control – Pressure,
Temperature, Liquid level control.

Total 48 70

Practical:
Skills to be developed:

Intellectual Skills:
1. To select appropriate equipment.
2. Apply different designing skills.

Motor Skills:
1. Ability to draw the circuit diagrams.
2. Ability to interpret the circuits and waveforms.
List of Practical: (At least Eight Experiments are to be performed)

1. To study of a bourdon tube, manometer and bimetallic transducer.

2. To measure fluid pressure using manometer.

3. To monitor and control of temperature using bimetal.

4. To study of different telemetering systems with the help of slide / model.

5. To study of AM, FM, PWM using trainer kit.

6. To study of a temperature controller and its application in temperature control circuit.

7. To study a typical pneumatic control system.

8. To study of Data Acquisition System using slide.

9. To study distributed digital control using 8085 microprocessor / microcontroller.

10. To make and execute circuit of any process control system using PLC programming.

11. To apply PID controller in a process control system and observe the output with variation of input
using MATLAB software.

12. Visit to a nearby Process Control Industry and study the control process with its allied components.

List of Text Books:

Sl. No. Name of Author Title of the Books Name of Publisher

1. Eckman Automatic Process Control Wiley Eastern

2. D. Patranabis Principle of Process Control T.M.H.
3. Purkait Electrical & Electronics Measurements T.M.H.
& Instrumentation
4. Curtis Johnson Ltd. Process Control Instrumentation P.H.I. Ltd.
5. Petruzella Programmable Logic Controller T.M.Hill
 E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORITICAL)
GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL

SET ANSWERE PER MARK SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS
D QUESTION S

A 1, 2 11 FOUR FIVE, TAKING AT

LEAST TWO
B 3,4,5,6 12 TWENTY ONE 1 X 20 FIVE FROM EACH TEN 10 X 5
= 20 GROUP = 50

Note: Paper-setter should take into account the marks which have been allotted in
each unit and set the paper accordingly so that all units get the importance as allotted.

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)
1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the Sixth
Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job – 15, Laboratory Notebook – 10.
2. External Assessment of 25 marks shall be held at the end of the Sixth Semester on the entire Sessional
syllabus. One Experiment per student from any one of the above is to be performed. Experiment is to be set by
lottery system. Distribution of marks: On spot job – 15, Viva-voce – 10.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Subject: Computer Hardware and Networking (Elective)

Subject Code: EE/S6/CHN (EL) Semester: SIXTH

Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks:
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: 3 Hrs/Week Mid Semester Exam.: 20 Marks
Tutorial: Assignment & Quiz: 10 Marks
Practical: 2 Hrs/Week End Semester Exam.: 70 Marks
Credit: 04 Practical : 50 Marks
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. To Identify various components of PC
2. To study construction, working and function of different peripheral devices.
3. To study Networking basic and know how to set up Local Area Network
Objective:
Sl. No.
1. • Identify various components of PC.
2. • Describe the construction, working and function of different peripheral devices.
3. • Read and interpret documentation .
4. • Assemble the PC and connect the modules.
5. • Install system software, application software and drivers.
6. • Set up Local Area Network.
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Digital Electronics
2.
Contents (Theory) Hrs./Unit Marks
Unit: 1 Introduction: 02 04
PC system units – Front Panel / Rear side connectors, switches and
indicators -specification parameters - Lap top PCs – Palm top PCs.
Unit: 2 Inside PC 12 16

2.1 Inside PC – functional blocks of mother board – CPU, RAM, BIOS,

Cache RAM, BUS extension slots, on-board I/O and IDE connectors PCI,
AGP & PCI express.
2.2 BIOS, services, organization and interaction.
2.3 CMOS, CMOS setup utilities, CMOS setup program.
2.4 Motherboard types.
2.5 Processors – CISC and RISC.
2.6 Features of Pentium 4 processor, Pentium Celeron processor,
CYRIX series processors, AMD series processors.
2.7 Chipsets – features of Intel 854, 915 series chipset motherboards
2.8 Bus standard and Bus architecture
2.9 Power supplies –SMPS for Computers, Power requirements in PCs.
Unit: 3 On board memory, I/O interface and storage device 05 8
3.1 PC’s memory organization
3.2 ROM, RAM, distinguish between static and dynamic RAM
3.3 DRAM, Synchronous DRAM, Cache Memory, Extended/
Expanded/Virtual memory.
3.4 I/O port – Serial port, Parallel port, USB port
3.5 Hard disk drives : Functional block diagram, SATA technology.
3.6 CD-ROM drive – Principle of operation, block diagram.
3.7 DVD technology – DVD disks, DVD drive, block diagram.
3.8 Pen drives.
Unit: 4 Input and Output Devices 05 7
4.1 Keyboard – types, operation, and keyboard signals, interface logic,
keyboard functions.
4.2 Mouse – principle of operation, mouse signals, optical mouse,
mouse installation.
4.3 Scanner – principle of operation, types.
4.4 Digital display technology (thin displays) – Liquid crystal displays,
Plasma displays, TFT monitors.
4.5 Modem: Introduction – functional block of modem – working
principle – types – installation.
4.6 Dot matrix printer – principle of operation.
4.7 LASER printer – principle of operation
4.8 Ink-jet printer- principle of operation,
4.9 Plotter – types, functional block diagram.
Unit: 5 Computer Network Basics: 12 16
Introduction – OSI layer model – Function of each layer network types –
LAN- WAN– MAN – internet – intranet – extranet – Blue tooth Technology.

TCP/IP: Introduction, History of TCP/IP, Function of each layer of TCP/IP,

User Datagram Protocol, Comparison of OSI and TCP/IP.

IP Addressing, IP address classes, Subnet Addressing, Domain Name System,

Email – SMTP, POP,IMAP; FTP, HTTP, Overview of IP version 6.
Unit: 6 Network Media& Hardware 08 12
Twisted wire - Coaxial cable - fiber optic cable, VSAT
Local Area Network:
Introduction to LANs, Features of LANs, Components of LANs, Usage of
LANs, LAN topologies – star – ring – mesh – bus – Client/Server – peer to
peer. IEEE 802 standards, Ethernet, LAN interconnecting devices: Hubs,
Switches, Bridges, Routers, Gateways.
Unit: 7 Cryptography : Encryption, Decryption, Asymmetric Key and Symmetric 04 7
Key Cryptography, Digital Signature.
Total 48 70
Contents (Practical)
Sl. No. Skills to be developed
1. Intellectual Skills: i) Identify various components of Computer
ii) Able to prepare a block diagram to correlate all the components based on
their functions
2. Motor Skills: i) Able to use the various tools efficiently
ii) Able to set Local Area Network.
 List of Laboratory Experiments:
Sl. No. Laboratory Experiments
1. Connecting & disconnecting computer peripherals and components & driver installation (For
example Printer/Modem/DVD/Scanner etc.)
2. To carry out Hard disk partitioning and formatting.
3. To install operating System like Windows 7 / Linux (Ubuntu)
4. To change the Standard settings and advanced settings (BIOS and Chipset features) of CMOS
set up Program.

5. To install the Network Interface Card and Familiarize with

O Networking cables (CAT5, UTP)
o Connectors (RJ45, T-connector)
o Hubs, Switches
6. To carry out Straight Through and Cross Over Cable connection with RJ 45 and CAT 5 cable
7. To set up a Local area Network with 5 nos. of computers.
8. To share Printer, Folder and Drives.
Text Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
Vikas Gupta Hardware and Networking Course Dreamtech Press
Kit
Steve Rackley Networking in easy steps Dreamtech Press
Behrouz A. Forouzen Data communication and Tata Mc. Graw-Hill
Networking Publishing Co. Ltd.
D Bala Subramanian Computer Installation and TMH, New Delhi
Servicing
Mike Meyers, scott Managing and troubleshooting TMH, New Delhi
PCs
Jernigan
Bhushan Trivedi Computer Network Oxford University Press

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (THEORITICAL)
GROUP UNIT ONE OR TWO SENTENCE ANSWER SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
QUESTIONS

TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL

SET ANSWERE PER MARK SET ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS
D QUESTION S

A 1, 2, 3,4 12 FIVE FIVE, TAKING AT

LEAST TWO
B 5,6,7 11 TWENTY ONE 1 X 20 FOUR FROM EACH TEN 10 X 5
= 20 GROUP = 50

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)
3. Continuous Internal Assessment of 25 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the Sixth
Semester. Distribution of marks: Performance of Job – 15, Laboratory Notebook – 10.
4. External Assessment of 25 marks shall be held at the end of the Sixth Semester on the entire Sessional
syllabus. One Experiment per student from any one of the above is to be performed. Experiment is to be set by
lottery system. Distribution of marks: On spot job – 15, Viva-voce – 10.
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Subject: Professional Practices IV

Subject Code: EE/S6/PFIV Semester: Sixth

Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks: 50

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: Mid Semester Exam.: Marks
Tutorial: Assignment & Quiz: Marks
Practical: 4 hrs / week End Semester Exam.: Marks
Practical : 50 Marks
Credit: 2
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. To acquire information from different sources
2. To present a given topic in a seminar, discuss in a group discussion
3 To prepare report on industrial visit, expert lecture.
Objective:
Sl. No. The student will be able to
1. Acquire information from different sources
2. Prepare notes for given topic
3. Present given topic in a seminar
4 Interact with peers to share thoughts
5 Prepare a report on industrial visit, expert lecture
Pre-Requisite:
Sl. No.
1. Knowledge of studying 5 semesters in Diploma Engineering
Activities
Sr . No. Activities Hours
1. Industrial / Field Visit : 12
Structured Field visits be arranged and report of the same should be
submitted by the individual student, to form part of the term work.
Visits to any ONE from the list below (should not have completed in earlier
semester):

i) Multistoried building for power distribution

ii) Any industry with process control and automation
iii) District Industries Centre (to know administrative set up, activities,
various schemes etc)
iv) Railway / metro railway signaling system
v) Motor rewinding in a motor rewinding shop
vi)Visit warehouse / Rail yard / port and observe Material Handling
Management & documentation.
 vii) A thermal / Hydel power generating station
viii) A Wind mill and / or Hybrid power station of wind and solar
ix) An electrical substation
x) A switchgear manufacturing / repair industry
xi) Protection system in a large industry.
xii) Visit to maintenance dept of a large industry.
xiii) A large industry to study protection system
xiv) Industry of power electronics devices
xv) Transmission tower project area
xvi) Any contemporary industry under MSME sector to understand detail of
operation and starting of a new venture.
xvii) A large industry to study protection system
xviii) Industry of power electronics devices
xix)Transmission tower project area
xx) Any contemporary industry under MSME sector to understand detail of
operation and starting of a new venture.
xix) Any other technical field area as may be found suitable alternative to
above list.

2. Guest Lecture by professional / industrial expert: 12

The guest lecture (s) any three of two hours duration each from the field
/industry experts, professionals or from experienced faculty
members(from own department or other departments) will be
encouraged) are to be arranged from the following or alike topics. A brief
report to be submitted on the guest lecture by each student as a part of
term work.

Group A (at least one)

i) Career opportunities for diploma engineers
ii)Industrial Dispute and Labour Laws
iii) Challenges in industrial working environment for diploma engineers
iv) Scope for diploma electrical engineers
v) Working in shopfloor.
vi) Oppurtunities in the service sector
vii) Any other topic of relevance as may be deemed fit for fresh engineers
as he starts his career in industry.

Group B (at least one)

i) Eco friendly air conditioning / refrigeration.

ii) Modern trends in AC machine
iii)Testing of switchgear
iv)Biomedical instruments – working, calibration etc.
v)Automobile pollution, norms of pollution control.
vi)nanotechnology
vii) Modern techniques in Power Generation
viii) New trends in power electronics devices
ix)TQM
 x)Recent modification in IE rules
xi)standardization / ISO certification
xii)Role of micro, small and mediun enterprise. In Indian economy.
xiii)Entrepreneurship development and oppurtunities
xiv) Interview techniques
xv)Any topic that could not be covered in earlier semesters and having
relevance to technical knowledge gathered in all semesters.
3. Information search 12
Information search can be done through manufacturers,
catalogue, internet, magazines, books etc and a report need to
be submitted. Can be done in a group of 2/3 students

Topic suggested (any two)Teachers may assign work on any

other cross disciplinary subjects for enrichment of knowledge
outside course work of Electrical discipline)

1. Blue tooth technology

2. Artificial technology
3. Data warehousing
4. Cryptography
5. Digital signal processing
6. Bio-informatics
7. Magnetic levitation system
8. Recent development in electrically operated vehicles for
mass transport
9. Comparative study of metro railway in Kolkata and Delhi
10.Alternative fuel and energy options
11. Comparison of transformer companies
12.Latest trends in classification of insulating materials
13.Design consideration for dry type transformers
14.State and national statistics of power generation
15.Market survey of contactors, relays and their comparative
analysis.
16. Market survey of any other electrical product which must
include among other things various manufacturers, cost,
specification, application areas etc.

4. Group Discussion 14

The students should discuss in a group of six to eight students. Each group
to perform any TWO group discussions. Topics and time duration of the
group discussion to be decided by concerned teacher. Concerned teacher
may modulate the discussion so as to make the discussion a fruitful one. At
 the end of each discussion each group will write a brief report on the topic
as discussed in the group discussion. Some of the suggested topics are –

i) Scope of outsourcing of electrical Engineering services.

ii)Pollution Control
iii) Rain water harvesting
iv) Trends in energy conservation
v) Safety in day to day life
vi) Use of plastic carry bag (social & domestic Hazard)
vii)Pollution control
viii) Any other common topic related to electrical field as directed by
concerned teacher.
5. Seminar / Poster presentation: 14
Students should select a topic for seminar based on recent development in
Electrical Engineering fields, emerging technology etc. Concerned Teachers
will guide students in selecting topic.

EXAMINATION SCHEME (SESSIONAL)

Continuous internal assessment of 50 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the
sixth semester. Distribution of marks: Information search = 10, seminar = 10, Group doscussion

= 5, field visit = 10, guest lecture

lecture attendance and report = 15
 West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
Kolkata Karigori Bhavan, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata - 700 013.

Name of the Subject: General Viva Voce

Subject Code: EE/S6/GVV Semester: SIXTH

Duration: one Semester Maximum Marks:
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Theory: Mid Semester Exam.:
Tutorial: Assignment & Quiz:
Practical: End Semester Exam.:
Credit: 02 Practical : 100 Marks
Aim:
Sl. No.
1. It is required to revisit the contents of the departmental subjects learnt by the students up to
sixth semester.
2. As a diploma holder of Electrical Engineering, students should be able to co relate the various
ideas and concepts learnt from various subjects throughout the course duration.
3. Student should equip themselves to face various types of technical questions during various
competitive examinations/ Interview Board.
Contents (Theory)
The syllabi of all the theoretical and sessional subjects taught in the three years of
diploma education

E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)
The Final Viva-Voce Examination shall take place at the end of Sixth Semester. It is to be taken by
Faculty members of the Institute concerned.